Home

AR-EF1 - Printertec

1. CN NO ASSEMBLY zen T GND2 1 PCU RES 2 PCU DSR 3 PCU RXD 4 Cu PCU TXD 5 CNA pr B14B PH K S PCU DTR e B PH K S 100V 200V gp BROW 5V1 7 24PR__ Les SEET NC 8 GND2 Dos SSES HLPRI 3 pap RL HLPR HOND 41 35 BRO HLCNTT HLCNT2_ 535 BR O HLCNT2 MSW MON 6 GH BR 8 GND2 Gy 9 Rin2 10 GND2 11 24V1 gg 12 MSWPRI PCU 13 MSW MON ond 14 NC B12P HL A ST CN17 AO gp BEE An PWB xuv
2. Ajuo Aooz Sud Ema xv XO8 XV vouao MSL sa A AS PA E MC reap GC A MS d V Ce f mr MARRE RE T i fianav EN A de NOlLdO CHE LXV s jm 1 D t TIdN Tun LIS OM WOW EMAOM aaaow 79915538 de Hd NouLao 138 AN zia NOLLdO NOLLAO d HO weree red TOAD SSOW AASIN SAQIN EXZHSHSINIA Sd90 NOILdO ke Le gt jIMd Y31713 Aen pea reded enum reread 1 8Md Ov AOOL LAS NOV VS Td Odo WI CO OC ONT ddd OW l oa Y IL P Am ________ e a cna c e i c MSO CSS Le S7 mm PUE EnD C TH edod a SW Joop nav I orarce A
3. FUSING UNIT it 100V LEE ceu cono SMP D4V NG SMR 04V Rth1 vB 2 Rint BA HEH 1 B 3 GND2 B 2 gg 2 GND2 Zeg V baa Rh2 B 3 Gy 3 RTH2 S GND2 a Rth2 OY 5 1 GND2 SA 4 GND2 4 CN1 CNA SRA 51T 4 wu VLP 03 quj B0SP VL 100v 200V B6B PH K S 100V 200V pp HIHO di ALT HL1 T all IUE HLT 24PR_ 1HR pK 2 AL2 AL2 2h Bx 2 HL2 BCEE GND2 215 HZ BK 3 N2 A N2 3 GY 3lN2 3 3 N2 HLPRY 3 BR 4 F GND F GND T4 HLCNT1 4 SRA 51T 4 _ O SRA 51T 4 ons HLCNT2 5 aR B2B PH K S JST 100V 200V MSW MON 6 2 SRA 51T 4 1 1 24V1 SRAS1T 4 2 FM GND2 x 100V 250 200V BK FL 100V m 250 BK Lout L1 AC DC cM FILTER i Bor M A 250 Wh PWB RD PWB Nout WH N1 EM 7 Rb 250 200V WH RD gt 5 YUGR 3243 Tier E E FN 100V 5V1 Drs H m CN3 5V1 Sos clos Z ze BO3B XASK 1 187 BO3P VH 33 3V 6 513 3 Es MFP only 200V ONLY 100V 33 3V 7 9R z E Rm BK ENER FE AR KR wa D INC NP E GND2 9 a N zi g g S IS GND2
4. h Take up roller paper feed roller 1 Remove the upper transport unit cover 2 Remove the paper feed roller cover 3 Remove the hook of each roller and remove each roller lt 3 gt Fix the mounting plate with the screw When the rotational volume sensor is replaced the sensor value must be adjusted to the paper size mark on the tray Refer to the SIM 53 6 or 53 7 g Original paper feed unit 1 Remove the OC cover 2 Remove the SPF lower cover i CIS unit 1 Remove the upper transport unit cover 2 Remove the CIS unit When the CIS unit is replaced the CIS shading adjustment must be performed Refer to the descriptions of ADJUSTMENTS AR M350 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY MAINTENANCE 7 10 3 Remove the cover and remove the CIS control PWB k Paper exit sensor 1 Remove the paper exit sensor l Paper exit roller For easy installation of the cover slide the e
5. SCN JNT PWB AR M350 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 7 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ENGINE 3 3 4
6. CNT 5 80P LT H1 BOARD TO BOARD D SOR LT H1 4V 1 1 24V 1D2 2 2 GND2 2V 3 3 12V 1D2 4 4 GND2 V 5 5 5V V 6 6 5V 1D2 7 7 GND2 3V 8 8 3 3V 1D2 9 9 GND2 1D2 10 10 GND2 is CCD Di 11 RES CCD D_ccD1 12 TXD CCD1 K CCD1 13 13 CLK CCD1 M CCDi 1 14 FRM CCD1 DBL 1 15 1_DBL DATA1 1 16 1_DATA1 DATAO f1 17 1_DATAO CLK D 18 1_CLK SEL1 1 19 PDSEL1 i 2 20 PD GO 21 21 SEGO G2 2 22 SEG2 23 23 IF1 i 2 24 IF3 2 25 TH SFT 2 28 ICCFT S 2 27 IcdS M 2 28 IcdM CP1 2 29 IcdCP1 CP2 3 20 IcdCP2 3 31 31 NC D VEE 3 32 LCD VEE jpo 33 33 LcdDO D1 3 34 IcdD1 1D2 3 35 LcdD2 1D3 3 38 LcdD3 1D2 3 37 GND2 S E 38 XL 3 39 XH MPS 4 40 STMPS 4V 41 41 24V 1D2 4 42 GND2 2V 43 43 12V 1D2 4 44 GND2 V 45 5V V 4 46 5V 1D2 4 47 GND2 3V ag 48 3 3V 1D2 4 49 GND2 1D2 5 50 GND2 1 51 51 CL1 D_CCD1 5 52 RXD CCD1 ID CCD1 53 53 ADD CCD1 GE1 5 54 PAGE1 DBL 5 55 1 DBL DATAT 5i 56 1 DATA DATA 5 57 1 DATAO CLK S 58 1 CLK ISELO 5 59 PDSELO SEL2 6i 60 PDSEL2 DON 61 61 KEYIN G1 6 62 SEG1 63 63 FO 6 64 F2 DY 6 65 FRDY Ka 6 66 BZR S 6 67 IcdS IM y ES LcdM ICP1 6 69 LcdCP1 jcP2 7 70 LedCP2 DIS 71 71 lcdDIS D vcc p 72 LCD VCC DO 73 73 IcdDO D1 7 74 IcdD1 D2 7 75 ledD2 D3 7 76 IcdD3 1D2 7 77 GND2 i 7 78 YH E 79 NL SET
7. AR M350 ADJUSTMENTS 9 4 Tighten the fixing screw of the mirror base drive pulley E Vertical sub scanning direction distortion 5 adjustment Winding pulley position adjustment 6 Perform procedures 1 through 3 7 If La is not equal to Lb perform procedures 4 and 5 This adjustment is executed in the following cases When the mirror base drive wire is replaced When the lamp unit or No 2 3 mirror holder is replaced When a copy shown below is made If La Lb the adjustment is completed Repeat procedures 1 through 6 until La Lb F Original detection light emitting unit height adjustment y La Lb 1 Execute SIM 41 3 2 Open the original cover hold the original detection light emitting unit x ad gently and select 1 and press START key without placing an direction original Original Copy 1 Set A3 white paper on the original table as shown below O E m O EFT AS white paper LC H EHTS B Jie s EE O Glass holding plate Fit the paper edge and the glass holding plate edge 3 Check that COMPLETE is displayed on the LCD and press 2 With the original cover open make a normal X 1 0 copy CUSTOM SETTING key and the screen returns to th
8. Section FAX Section FAX Item Operation Item Operation Operation Procedure A signal of 300bps is outputted Level Max Operation Procedure A signal of 300bps is outputted Enter a number during execution to change the Send level is set with SW signal Enter a number during execution to change the Press START to start sending a voice message signal Press CUSTOMSETTING to terminate Press START to start sending a voice message Press CUSTOMSETTING to terminate SIMULATION 66 11 300bps SIGNAL OUTPUT LEVEL MAX SELECT 1 6 AND PRESS SIMULATION 66 12 START 300bps SIGNAL OUTPUT SOFT SW SELECT 1 6 AND PRESS 1 1 gt 1 NO SIGNAL 2 11111 3 11110 4 00000 START z 5 010101 6 00001 o kl 1 NO SIGNAL 2 11111 3 11110 4 00000 z Select and press START key i z BE Se Press CUSTOM SETTING key z Select 1 and press START key 4 Press CUSTOM SETTING key z SIMULATION 66 11 SUSSOMSERINSIKSS S 300bps SIGNAL OUTPUT LEVEL MAX SELECT 1 6 AND PRESS SIMULATION 66 12 START z 300bps SIGNAL OUTPUT SOFT SW SELECT 1 6 AND PRESS EXECUTING START 1 NOSIGNAL 2 11111 3 11110 4 00000 EXECUTING 5 010101 6 00001 z 1 NO SIGNAL 2 11111 3 11110 4 00000 Same Select 3 and press START key z 5 010101 display Same Select 3 and press START key z SIMULATION 66 11 ISDEM 300bps SIGNAL OUTPUT LEVEL MAX SELECT 1 6 AND
9. Section Scanner reading Item Operation SIMULATION 2 2 Operation Procedure The sensor display is highlighted when it is SPF SENSOR CHECK detected SDD SPSD SPOD SWD6 SWD5 SWD4 SWD3 SWD2 SWD1 EES SLD2 sm STSET SCANNER SENSOR CHECK SWO_LEN FARAN SWD_AD R lt List of display values gt lt List of display value gt SSET SPF sensar SOCD Open sensor MHPS Optical system home position SCOV Paper feed cover sensor SDD Document set sensor SPSD Document resist front sensor SPCD Document exit sensor SWDn Document width sensor n 1 Inside 6 Outside SLDn Document length sensor n 1 Inside 2 Outside OSSET OS installation sensor STSET Stamp unit installation sensor SWD LEN SPF guide plate position Unit 0 1mm SWD AD SPF document width detection volume output AD value AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 9 2 3 Main code 3 Purpose Operation test check 3 2 Function Content Used to check the operation under load in the automatic document feeder unit and their control Purpose Operation test check circuits Function Content Used to check the operations of the sensors and Section DSPF detectors in the finisher and their control circuits Item Operation Section Finisher Operation Procedure Select with 10 digit key pad Item Operation Operation Procedure The display is highlighted when detected SIMUL
10. CIRCUIT DIAGRAM MFP 2 3 CND PHNR 6 H BU6P TR P H Bee Rice BR ST TE HBR BR 2178 RD 5 2aV G RD 4 22V SPF PLITB 3 PL PL hie BRA 4 BR BR 3TA MOTOR RD 21 x22V 5 RD RD 5 22V PL HIA 6 PL PL 67A 179228 3 EH 1 EE SPED SPED Z GND2 3 179228 3 XN TBL PHNR 11 H BU11P TR P H SNB PHDS
11. ds M ES Purpose Adjustment Purpose Adjustment Function Content Used to adjust the print density in the FAX mode Function Content Used to adjust the reading density in the FAX all modes An adjustment with this simulation mode normal mode affects all the reading density adjustment values Only when FAX is installed Only when FAX is installed Section Section Item Picture quality Item Picture quality Operation Procedure The exposure mode to be set is selected Operation Procedure The exposure mode to be set is selected FAX normal text mode individual adjustment FAX auto adjustment 1 The current set value is highlighted on the 1 The current set value is highlighted on the right side of each item In this screen be sure right side of each item In this screen be sure to select 1 COPY START Set value 1 to select 1 COPY START Set value 1 2 Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad 2 Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad Press P to store the set value Press P to store the set value Default 50 set range 0 99 Default 50 set range 0 99 3 Press START and copying is started and the 3 Press START and copying is started and the set value is stored Display value 1 set value is stored Display value 1 4 Select a paper feed tray Set value 2 4 Select a paper feed tray Set value 2 5 Select an exposure level Set value 3 SIMULATION 46 1
12. m Ge e Purpose Adjustment setup Purpose Adjustment setup Function Content Used to adjust the detection level of the manual Function Content Used to enter the adjustment value of the paper feed tray paper width volume manual paper feed tray width detection level Section Paper feed Section Paper feed Item Operation Item Operation Operation Procedure The manual feed tray size is adjusted Operation Procedure The adjustment value Specified on the back of 1 Extend the guide to the MAX position Select the tray pull out section of the manual feed tray 1 and press START When COMPLETE is size is entered displayed press CUSTOM SETTING to return to the initial screen SIMULATION 40 7 2 Move the guide to A4R position Select 2 and BYPASS TRAY VALUE SETTING SELECT 1 4 AND PRESS START i 1 MAX POSITION 72 press START When COMPLETE is 2 POSITION 1 Ke displayed press CUSTOME SETTING to 3 POSITION2 WO return to the initial screen Ae MIN POSITION oe 3 Move the guide to A5R position Select 3 and press START When COMPLETE is Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key displayed press CUSTOME SETTING to retirara the initial Sees BYPASS TRAY VAL SETTING INPUT VALUE 0 1023 AND PRESS START 4 Move the guide to MIN position in the initial 1 MAX POSITION screen Select 4 and press START When COMPLETE is displayed the adjustment is completed lt List of set values gt If ERROR
13. 1 HIGH dB 2 HIGH LOW fJ memory is installed a Section Fax List of set values gt Item Operation 0 Execution Operation Procedure The content of SRAM is backed up into Flash 1 HIGH High group level Memory AR MM9 2 HIGH LOW High group low group SIMULATION 66 19 SRAM BACK UP WRITE TO FLASH ROM 66 17 ARE YOU SURE Purpose Setup Function Content Used to test the dial signal DTMF output in the Fax tone dial mode Send level Odb fixed Used to check the dial IC operation Only when FAX is installed Section FAX Item Operation Operation Procedure The DTMF signal output is checked Output level 0 1 YES 2 NO Press START key SIMULATION 66 19 SRAM BACK UP WRITE TO FLASH ROM EXCUTING After completion of backup When CUSTOM SETTING is pressed the execution is terminated Set values SIMULATION 66 17 DTMF SIGNAL OUTPUT LEVEL MAX INPUT 0 9 AND PRESS START Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 66 17 DTMF SIGNAL OUTPUT LEVEL MAX EXCUTING DTMF signal 1 9 0 7 1 Backup execu ted 2 No backup AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 68 66 20 Purpose Setup Function Content Used to restore the backup data SIM 66 19 to SRAM When FAX is installed and FAX expansion memory is install
14. 1 One drawer tray included in the base engine a General Paper feed method One drawer tray When an optional PS3 expansion kit is Sizes to be fed A4 B5 8 5 x 11 installed Paper capacity 500 sheets at 80g m Function PCL5e PS PPD PPD Media available for Plain paper 60 105g m 16 28lbs PCL6 Windows _ Macintosh paper feeding l Copies 1 999 1 999 1 999 1 999 Paper type Plain recycled pre printed pre punched A color letter head Orientation Yes Yes Yes Yes Paper size switching To be switched by user Duplex print Yes Yes Yes Yes paper size to be entered from the operation Saddle stitch Yes Yes No N A panel Binding edge Left top Left top Long short Long short Dehumidification Not provided right right heater N 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 2 4 3 4 2 4 6 9 16 Balance detection Provided paper empty and 3 steps ns DEE Default size setting 100V system 200V N up direction Fixed Fixed Fixed Selectable system N up border line Yes Yes Yes always Yes Sm EE ES b Paper input Mounting demounting Provided p P of the tray When an optional PS3 expansion kit is installed C Output Equipment Function PCL5e PS PPD PPD 1 Face down Exit Tray included in the base engine PCL6 Windows Macintosh Output position Face down output at the upper side of main Paper size Yes Yes Yes Yes method unit Custom paper size 1 size 1 size 3 sizes 3 5 N A Output paper capacity 400 sheets 80g m sheet Source selection Yes
15. Note1 Print on Master individual carton 4 languages English French German Spanish Note2 Packed with machine DR 50K Developer UN Process UN Note3 The other maintenance parts which are not listed above are registered as service parts AR M350 CONSUMABLE PARTS 4 4 2 Production number identification A Drum cartridge C Developer cartridge The lot number printed on the front side flange is composed of 10 digits The lot number is composed of 10 digits each digit indicates the each digit showing the following content following The lot number is printed on the bag 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 Number 1 Number For this model this digit is 2 For this model this digit is 2 2 Letter 2 Letter Indicates the model conformity code T for this model Indicates the model conformity code T for this model 3 Number 3 Number Indicates the end digit of the production year Indicates the end digit of the production year 4 Number or X Y Z 4 Number or X Y Z Indicates the production month Indicates the production month X stands for October Y November and Z December X stands for October Y November and Z December 5 6 Number 5 6 Number Indicates the production day on the month Indicates the production day on the month 7 Number or X Y Z 7 Number or X Y Z Indicates the month of packing Indicates the m
16. 3 AUTO 4 LIGHT 5 DARK 6 AUTO H 7 LIGHT H 8 DARK H List of set values 1 gt 0 Paper feed tray selection 1 Print start Default 2 Exposure level selection 3 Auto 4 Bright 5 Dark 6 Auto Half tone 7 Bright half tone 8 Dark Half tone List of display values 1 Normal display NOW COPYING ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN Jam JAM Paper empty PAPER EMPTY List of set values 2 gt 1 TRAY1 2 TRAY2 3 TRAY3 4 TRAY4 5 Manual feed List of set values 3 gt 3 Auto 4 Bright 5 Dark 6 Auto Half tone 7 Bright half tone 8 _ Dark Half tone AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 41 List of set values 1 46 15 O Paper feed tray selection OA Adjustment 1 Print start Default Function Content Used to adjust the reading density in the FAX S sure ER mode fine mode Only when FAX is installed A Bright Section 5 Dark Item Picture quality 6 Auto Half tone Operation Procedure The exposure mode to be set is selected 7 Bright half tone FAX fine mode individual adjustment 8 Dark Half tone 1 The current set value is highlighted on the right side of each item In this screen be sure List of display values 1 gt to select 1 COPY START Set value 1 Normal display NOW COPYING
17. Select 2 and press START key SIMULATION 66 10 SIMULATION 66 9 ARE YOU SURE IMAGE MEMORY CLEAR MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK SOFT SW SELECT 1 20 AND PRESS START EXECUTING 1 YES 1 NONE 2 PAUSE 3 MESSAGE1 2 NO 4 MESSAGE2 5 MESSAGE3 6 MESSAGE4 7 MESSAGES 8 MESSAGE6 9 MESSAGE7 10 MESSAGE8 11 MESSAGE9 12 MESSAGE10 13 MESSAGE11 14 MESSAGE12 15 MESSAGE13 16 MESSAGE14 17 MESSAGE15 18 ALARM 19 RINGER 20 EXT TEL RINGER Press CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 66 9 gt MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK SOFT SW SELECT 1 20 AND PRESS START 1 NONE 2 PAUSE 3 MESSAGE1 4 MESSAGE2 5 MESSAGE3 6 MESSAGE4 7 MESSAGE5 8 MESSAGE6 9 MESSAGE7 10 MESSAGE8 11 MESSAGE9 12 MESSAGE10 13 MESSAGE11 14 MESSAGE12 15 MESSAGE13 16 MESSAGE14 17 MESSAGE15 18 ALARM 19 RINGER 20 EXT TEL RINGER AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 65 66 11 66 12 Purpose Operation test check Purpose Setup Function Content Used to check the output operation of FAX G3 mode 300BPS Used to check the MODEM operation Send level 0dB Max Only when FAX is installed Function Content Used to check the output operation of FAX G3 mode 300BPS Used to check the MODEM operation Signals are sent in the send level set with the Soft switch Only when FAX is installed
18. 3 TRAY1 4 TRAY2 A SIMULATION 50 10 PRINT OFF CENTER ADJUSTMENT INPUT VALUE 0 99 AND PRESS START Select 1 and press START Press START key key Press CUSTOM SETTING key Or copying is terminated SIMULATION 50 10 PRINT OFF CENTER ADJUSTMENT NOW COPYING press START Press START key or press CUSTOME SETTING key SIMULATION 50 10 PRINT OFF CENTER ADJUSTMENT SELECT 1 15 AND PRESS START FEED TRAY Select 2 and 1 TRAY1 2 TRAY2 3 TRAY3 4 TRAYA Press START key o press START key 5 BPT press CUSTOME SETTING key ABOVE 10 DUPLEX MODE SIMULATION 50 10 PRINT OFF CENTER ADJUSTMENT MAGNIFICATION INPUT 25 400 100 Default Set range 0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray selection 1 5 1 COPY START Copy start Initial value 2 MAGNIFICATION Print magnification ratio 100 25 400 setup 25 400 3 TRAY 1 Tray 1 adjustment 50 0 99 4 TRAY2 Tray 2 adjustment 50 0 99 5 TRAY3 Tray 3 adjustment 50 0 99 6 TRAY4 Tray 4 adjustment 50 0 99 7 BPT Manual feed tray adjustment 50 0 99 8 ADU Adjustment in refeed from 50 0 99 ADU List of display values 1 gt Normal display NOW COPYING ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN Jam JAM Paper empty PAPER EMPTY List of set values 2 gt 1 TRAY1 2 TRAY2
19. 50 6 Defauult Set range yl _ M a Y Purpose Adjustment 0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray selection 1 5 Function Content Copy lead edge adjustment DSPF 1 COPY START Copy start Initial value Section 2 MAGNIFICATION Print magnification ratio S 25 200 Item Picture quality setup 25 400 Operation Procedure Perform the SPF copy lead edge adjustment 3 SIDE 1 Document front scan start 150 0 99 1 The current set value is highlighted on the position adjustment right of each item In this screen be sure to 4 SIDE 2 Document back scan start 50 0 99 select 1 COPY START Set value 1 position adjustment 2 Enter the correction value with 10 digit ke pad q d 5 IMAGE LOSS Front lead edge image loss 15 0 99 Press P to store the set value LEAD SIDE 1 set valu 3 Press START to start copying and store the 6 IMAGE LOSS Front side Image loss set 20 0 99 set value Display value 1 SIDE SIDE 1 value 4 Select a paper feed tray Set value 2 7 IMAGE LOSS Back lead edge image loss 15 0 99 5 Set the scan magnification ratio Set value 3 LEAD SIDE 2 set value 8 IMAGELOSS _ Back side image loss set 20 0 99 SIMULATION 50 6 SIDE SIDE 2 value LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT SPF SELECT 0 10 AND PRESS START 9 IREAR LOSS Front rear edge image loss 0 0 20 0 TRAY SELECT H 1 COPY START 2 MAGNIFICATION SID
20. o gt Specification 1 5mm Adjustment position Measurement reference Specification Set value Default Range Print off center Tray 1 Tray 1 Output pattern center line As shone in the table below 50 0 99 Set value 1 SIM 50 10 Tray 2 Tray 2 0 1mm shift Tray 3 Tray 3 LCC left Tray 4 Tray 4 LCC right MFT Manual feed ADU Duplex For the duplex mode Single Duplex add 10 to the above set value When the print line is shifted toward a from the paper center decrease the value When the print line is shifted toward b from the paper center increase the value Specifications Machine OC mode Single 1 5mm Duplex 1 7mm Overall DSPF Single S S 2 8mm Single D S 3 5mm Duplex S D 3 0mm Duplex D D 3 5mm N Image density adjustment The image density adjustment is required for the following copy quality mode by using the simulation There are two methods the collective adjustment and the individual adjustment of the copy quality mode Copy mode FAX mode Copy quality mode Collective adjustment ee adjustment M riae Binary value mode Auto mode SIM46 2 Normal mode Binary value mode AUTO SIM46 12 SIM46 13 Character mode SIM46 9 LIGHT Character Photo mode SIM46 10 DARK Photo mode SIM46 11 S
21. List of set values 1 Printer counter 2 Other effective paper counter AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 26 24 10 24 11 SIMULATION 24 10 1 FAX SEND 2 FAX RECEIVED 3 FAX OUTPUT 4 SEND IMAGES 5 SEND TIME 6 RECEIVE TIME Press FAX COUNTER DATA CLEAR SELECT 1 6 AND PRESS START Press CUSTOM SETTING key or START key ARE YOU SURE 1 YES 2 NO SIMULATION 24 10 FAX SEND COUNTER DATA CLEAR List of set values 1 FAX SEND Number of times of FAX sending FAX RECEIVE Number of times of FAX reception FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity SEND IMAGES Sending quantity Purpose Data clear Purpose Data clear Function Content Used to clear the FAX counter Function Content Used to reset the drum rotation time toner motor Section FAX rotation time and developer rotation time Item Counter counters The developer counter of the DV unit Operation Procedure Select with 10 digit key pad and press START installed is reset key Section Process The procedure below is executed and the display OPC drum developing transfer cleaning returns to the original state Item Counter 1 Counter is cleared 2 Not cleared Operation Procedure Select with 10 digit key pad and press START key The procedure below is executed and the display returns to the original state 1 Counter is cleare
22. Set values 1 AE mode 2 Text mode 3 Text Photo mode 4 Photo mode 46 19 Purpose Adjustment Function Content Used to adjust gamma density gradient in the auto copy mode and to set the density detection area and to set the image process mode Section Item Picture quality Operation Procedure 1 Change the control method of exposure mode The current set value is displayed on the right of each item Set value 1 2 Set with 10 digit key pad AE mode 3 Set with 10 digit key pad AE fixed mode 1 AE MODE SIMULATION 46 19 EXP MODE SETUP SELECT 1 2 AND PRESS START 2 AE STOP MODE 0 1 Select 1 and press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key Hn gt m 1 AE MODE SIMULATION 46 19 EXP MODE SETUP INPUT VALUE 1 2 AND PRESS START gt Select 2 and press START key Press START key or press CUSTOME SETTING Key sn SIMULATION 46 19 EXP MODE SETUP INPUT VALUE 0 1 AND PRESS START 2 AE STOP MODE Set value 1 1 AE mode 2 AE fixed mode AE mode 1 Picture priority mode 2 Toner consumption priority mode AE fixed mode 0 AE fixed function OFF 1 AE fixed function ON Default 0 46 20 Purpose Adjustment Function Content
23. 3 Developer cartridge counter AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 28 266 e XS 26 10 a Purpose Setup Purpose Setup Function Content Used to set the specification according to the Function Content Used to set Enable Disable of toner save destination operation Section This simulation is enabled only in Japan and UK Item Spec versions Depends on SIM 26 6 Destination Operation Procedure After setting the destination the power is turned setup off on For the other destinations user program P22 When NIC is installed reset cannot be performed Therefore the power must be turned off on This simulation cannot change the FAX destination Use SIM 66 2 to change the FAX destination SIMULATION 26 6 DESTINATION SETUP SELECT 1 10 AND PRESS START 1 USA 2 CANADA 3 INCH 4 JAPAN 5 AB_B 6 EUROPE 7 UK 8 AUSTRALIA 9 AB A 10 CHINA List of destinations United States of America Canada Inch series EX Japan AB series B5 Europe UK Australia AB series A5 China CO NIDO A A Go PO E o 26 10 Loc ELE SESSEL M ESSE Es Purpose Setup Function Content Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner Section Item Operation Operation Procedure The network scanner trial mode is set Testing scanner without product key is limited to 500 sheets Default 0
24. O Paper feed tray selection 1 Copy start Default SIMULATION 46 13 EXP LEVEL SETUP FAX NORMAL SELECT 3 5 AND PRESS START 2 FAX mode exposure setup EXP LEVEL SELECT x 7 3 AUTO 4 LIGHT 5 DARK List of display values 1 Normal display NOW COPYING ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN Jam JAM paper empty PAPER EMPTY List of set values 2 gt 1 TRAY1 2 TRAY2 3 TRAY3 4 TRAYA 5 Manualfeed AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 40 List of set values 1 0 Paper feed tray selection 1 Print start Default 2 Exposure level selection 3 Auto 4 Bright 5 Dark List of display values 1 Normal display NOW COPYING ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN Jam JAM paper empty PAPER EMPTY List of set values 2 gt 1 TRAY1 2 TRAY2 3 TRAY3 4 TRAY4 5 Manual feed List of set values 3 3 Auto 4 Bright 5 Dark 46 14 Purpose Adjustment Function Content Used to adjust the reading density in the FAX mode small text mode Only when FAX is installed Section Item Picture quality Operation Procedure The exposure mode to be set is selected FAX small text mode individual adjustment 1 The current set value is highlighted on the right side of each item In this screen be sure to select 1 COPY START Set val
25. AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 3 Code Main Sub Function Content Purpose Section Item 26 41 Used to set Enable Disable of the magnification ratio auto Setup Spec Operation selection function AMS in the pamphlet copy mode mode Common operation 52 Used to set Enable Disable of count up when white paper is Setup Paper transport discharged White paper means the index paper Paper exit without copying in the OHP index paper insertion mode Switchback transport the front rear covers without copying in the cover insertion mode and white paper in the duplex exit mode CA etc 27 1 Used to set the operation specifications when a communication Setup Communication Spec Operation trouble occurs between the host computer and MODEM RIC MODEM mode machine side When a communication trouble occurs Common between the host computer and MODEM machine side self operation diag display U7 00 is displayed and setup is made to inhibit or allow printing 5 Used to enter the machine tag No This function allows to Setup Communication Data check the machine tag No from the computer RIC MODEM 30 1 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in Operation test check Operation the paper feed paper transport and paper exit sections and their control circuits 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in Operation t
26. SIMULATION 46 15 EXP LEVEL SETUP FAX SUPER FINE SELECT 3 8 AND PRESS START EXP LEVEL SELECT 3 AUTO 4 LIGHT 6 AUTO H 7 LIGHT H 5 DARK 8 DARK H AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 42 List of set values 1 46 16 O Paper feed tray selection 8 Ju 2 Exposure level selection Function Content Used to adjust the reading density in the FAX 3 Auro mode super fine mode Only when FAX is 4 Bright installed 5 Dark Section 6 Auto Half tone Item Picture quality 7 Bright half tone Operation Procedure The exposure mode to be set is selected FAX super fine mode individual adjustment 1 The current set value is highlighted on the right side of each item In this screen be sure to select 1 COPY START Set value 1 2 Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad Press P to store the set value Default 50 set range O 99 3 Press START and copying is started and the Set value is stored Display value 1 4 Select a paper feed tray Set value 2 5 Select an exposure level Set value 3 SIMULATION 46 16 EXP LEVEL SETUP FAX ULTRA FINE SELECT 0 8 AND PRESS START 0 TRAY SELECT 1 PRINT START 2 EXP LEVEL 3 AUTO 4 LIGHT 5 DARK 6 AUTO H 7 LIGHT H 8 DARK H EN Select other than 0 2 and press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key mime mimm SIMULATION 46 16 EXP
27. amp 4 INPUT NUMBER AND PRESS START 0123456789 01234567 66 27 Purpose Setup Function Content Only when FAX is installed Used to register the voice warp transfer number Section FAX Item Operation Operation Procedure This mode is for development and inhibited in the market SIMULATION 66 27 V WP TRANSMIT NUMBER SETTING 0 9 0 9 INPUT NUMBER AND PRESS START 0123456789 01234567 AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 70 66 28 66 30 Purpose Setup Purpose Setup Function Content Used to record a sound message Recording is available in 1 5 max 6sec for Function Content Used to check TEL LIU status change Only when FAX is installed 2 Press CUSTOM SETTING to recording interrupt This mode is for development and inhibited in the market SIMULATION 66 28 VOICE RECORD SELECT 1 5 AND PRESS START 1 MESSAGE1 2 MESSAGE2 3 MESSAGE3 4 MESSAGE4 5 MESSAGES 66 29 Purpose Setup Function Content Used to clear the telephone directory Section FAX one Only when FAX is installed Section FAX Section FAX Item Operation Item Operation Operation Procedure The TEL LIU status can be checked Operation Procedure 1 Record a sound message from the handset The display is highlighted when the status is changed SIMULATION 66
28. 5 DSPF SPF Type DSPF One scan dual side scanning method DSPF with OC integrated Scan speed Standard mode 45 opm High quality mode 22 5 opm Original Center alignment alignment Original size A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5 A5R11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x13 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 R in Fax mode long length paper up to 800mm is applicable Original 50 128g m 15 34lbs paper weight Original Max 50 sheets stack max 30 sheets for A3 B4 11 x17 8 5 x14 capacity When however exceeding 105g m and A3 B4 11 x17 8 5 x14 max 15 sheets or Total thickness less than 6 5mm at 50 80g m 15 21lbs 5 0mm at 80 128g m 21 34lbs Not Transparency film secondary original paper transportable tracing paper carbon paper thermal paper original type original with crumple crimp rip original with attachment clipping original with many punch holes with 2 or 3 holes acceptable original preprinted with ink ribbon Original size Provided detection Sizes to be Automatic one detection unit to be used with software detected modification by destination Inch 1 11x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 Default at overseas 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 100V base engine Inch 2 11x17 8 5 x13 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 AB 1 Default at A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5 A3 Japan domestic B4 A4 A4R A5 100V overseas 8 5 x11 216x330 mm 200V base engines AB 2 A3 B4 A4 A4R
29. CHECKING Checking OK Check complete Normal NG Check end Abnormal AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 73 11 TROUBLE CODES 1 Trouble codes list Trouble Contents Remark Trouble codes detection C1 00 MC trouble PCU E6 10 CIS shading trouble When the SCANNER Black correction scanner is installed 11 CIS shading trouble When the SCANNER White correction scanner is installed 14 CIS ASIC communication When the SCANNER trouble scanner is installed E7 02 Laser trouble PCU 03 HDD trouble With HDD Controller installed 06 Decode error trouble Controller 10 Shading trouble When the SCANNER Black correction scanner is installed 11 Shading trouble When the SCANNER White correction scanner is installed 14 CCD ASIC communication When the SCANNER trouble scanner is installed 50 LSU connection trouble PCU 80 SCANNER PWB When the ICU communication trouble scanner is installed 90 PCU communication trouble When the ICU scanner is installed F1 00 Finisher communication trouble With Finisher PCU installed 08 Finisher staple shift motor With Finisher PCU trouble installed 10 Finisher stapler motor trouble With Finisher PCU installed 11 Finisher bundle exit motor With Finisher PCU trouble installed 15 Finisher lift motor trouble With Finisher PCU installed 19 Finishe
30. SPF width detection adjustment value Touch panel adjustment value Exposure level adjustment value Gamma change value OC SPF exposure correction value Shading adjustment value CCD CIS CCD shading start position adjustment value 3 Adjustment values saved in MFP controller Counters Adjustment values Others Copy counter FAX SOFT SW etc Trouble history Printer counter Jam history FAX reception counter Destination setup FAX transmission counter Language setup Trouble counter Toner save mode setup Jam counter 13 setup Auditor setup Serial number Middle binding mode AMS setup PC Modem communication trouble detection YES NO setup Tag number setup y change value Exposure mode setup OC SPF exposure correction value Printer setup values Network setup values 5 Key operator program KEY OPERATOR PROGRAM Set value Default Remark Engine section LCD Copy function settings Initial status settings Paper tray exposure mode copy ratio duplex mode output mode Exposure adjustment 1 5 9 Rotation copy setting Auto paper selection setting 600dpi x 600dpi scanning mode 600x300dpi 600x600dpi Quick scan from document glass 600x300dpi 600x600dpi Device control Original size detector setting
31. 1 Developer cartridge counter 1 Drum cartridge counter 24 6 Purpose Data clear 2 Toner cartridge counter 24 9 Function Content Used to reset the copy counter Purpose Data clear Section Item Counter Operation Procedure Select with 10 digit key pad and press START key The procedure below is executed and the display returns to the original state 1 Counter is cleared 2 Not cleared SIMULATION 24 6 COPY COUNTER DATA CLEAR PRESS START 1 COPY EEI Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key Or START key SIMULATION 24 6 ARE YOU SURE 1 YES 2 NO COPY COUNTER DATA CLEAR List of set values 4 Copy effective paper counter Function Content Used to clear the printer print counter After completion of maintenance this counter must be cleared Section Printer Item Counter Operation Procedure Select with 10 digit key pad and press START key The procedure below is executed and the display returns to the original state 1 Counter is cleared 2 Not cleared SIMULATION 24 9 PRESS START PRINTER OTHERS COUNTER DATA CLEAR SELECT 1 2 AND 1 PRINTER 2 OTHERS Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key o r START key SIMULATION 24 9 ARE YOU SURE 1 YES 2 NO PRINTER COUNTER DATA CLEAR
32. 100 Default Set range 0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray selection 1 5 COPY START Copy start Initial value 2 MAGNIFICATION Print magnification ratio 100 25 400 setup 25 400 3 PLATEN OC mode adjustment 50 0 99 4 SPF SIDE1 SPF Front surface adjustment 50 0 99 5 SPF SIDE2 SPF Back surface adjustment 50 0 99 lt List of display values 1 gt Normal display NOW COPYING ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN Jam JAM Paper empty PAPER EMPTY lt List of set values 2 gt 1 TRAY1 2 TRAY2 3 TRAY3 4 TRAY4 5 Manual feed The selected tray is registered as an initial set value in the initial Screen At the above value 10 the SPF enters the duplex mode DD making duplex copies List of set values 3 Set range 25 400 Adjustment procedure 1 Select a paper feed tray to be used in the adjustment set the magnification ratio and enter the adjustment item 2 After entering the adjustment value press START and printing is started 3 Check the off center distance from the paper edge of the copy Repeat procedure 2 until a satisfactory result is obtained AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 53 List of set values 1 Main code 51 45PPM 35PPM 0 TRAY Paper feed tra
33. Code Main Sub Function Content Purpose Section Item 50 1 Used to adjust the document scan position the image print Adjustment Picture Picture position and the void area image loss A similar adjustment quality position can be made with SIM 50 2 simple method 2 Used to adjust the document scan position the image print Adjustment Picture Picture position and the void area image loss This simulation allows quality position simple procedure of the similar adjustment to SIM 50 1 6 Document scan position adjustment DSPF Adjustment Picture quality 7 Document scan position adjustment Simple method DSPF Adjustment Picture quality 10 Used to adjust the print image center position Adjustment Image process ICU Picture Picture Adjusted for each paper feed section quality position 12 Used to adjust the reading image center position Adjustment Image process ICU Picture Picture Adjusted for each document mode quality position 51 2 Used to adjust the contact pressure of paper on the resist roller Adjustment Paper transport Operation in each section machine paper feed duplex paper feed SPF paper exit paper feed This adjustment is required when the print image switchback transport position varies or when paper jam occurs frequently 53 6 Used to adjust the DSPF width detection level Adjustment Operation 7 Used to enter the
34. This simulation is a simpler procedure compared to the similar adjustment using SIM 50 1 Section Item Picture quality Operation Procedure Perform the copy lead edge adjustment 1 The current set value is highlighted on the right of each item In this screen be sure to select 1 COPY START Set value 1 2 Enter the correction value with 10 digit key pad Press P to store the set value 3 Press START to start copying and store the Set value Display value 1 4 Set the scan magnification ratio Set value 3 SIMULATION 50 2 LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT CALC SELECT 0 9 AND PRESS START 0 TRAY SELECT 1 COPY START 2 MAGNIFICATION 3 11 4 12 5 IMAGE LOSS LEAD 6 IMAGE LOSS SIDE 7 DENB Ej 8 DENA 9 FR VOID Select other than 0 2 and press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key mime mime SIMULATION 50 2 LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT CALC INPUT VALUE 0 99 AND PRESS START Select 1 and press START key Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key Or copying is terminated SIMULATION 50 2 LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT CALC NOW COPYING Select 0 and press START key Press START key o press CUSTOME SETTING key SIMULATION 50 2 LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT CALC SELECT 1 5 AND PRESS START FEED TRAY 1 TRAY1 2 TRAY2 3 TRAY3 4 TR
35. DATA indicator Lights up or blinks when print data is being received Also lights up or blinks when printing is being performed 4 IMAGE SEND key Press to enter the network scan fax mode LINE indicator LINE indicator Sheet During sending or receiving FAX data or scan data this lamp is lighted DATA indicator Lights up or blinks when FAX data is being received Also lights up or blinks when printing is being performed 5 COPY key Press to select the copy mode and display the basic screen of the copy mode Even when the machine is busy in another mode the basic copy mode screen will appear when the COPY key is pressed If this key is pressed and held while the basic screen of the copy mode is displayed the total output count and the quantity of toner remaining percentage will be displayed 6 JOB STATUS key Press to display the current job status 7 CUSTOM SETTINGS key Use to adjust the contrast of the touch panel or to set key operator programs 8 Numeric keys Use to enter number values for various settings 9 key ACC C key If the auditing mode has been set press this key to close an open account after finishing a copy facsimile scanning or network scanning job 10 P key Press to select the job memory mode 11 C key Press to clear a copy quantity entry If this key is pressed while the automatic document feeder is being used any originals in progress will be automatically output 12 Start key When t
36. Operation test check Fax Operation Used to print the confidential password Used when the confidential password is forgotten Only when FAX is installed User data output check display print Fax Data Used to print the image memory data memory send receive Only when FAX is installed User data output check display print Fax Data Used to check the output operation of the FAX sound signals Sound output IC operation check Send level OdB Max Only when FAX is installed Operation test check Fax Operation Used to check the output operation of the FAX sound signals Sound output IC operation check Only when FAX is installed Operation test check Fax Operation 10 Used to clear all data of image memory memory send receive Confidential data are also cleared Only when FAX is installed User data output check display print Fax Data 11 Used to check the output operation of FAX G3 mode 300BPS Used to check the MODEM operation Send level 0dB Max Only when FAX is installed Operation test check Fax Operation 12 Used to check the output operation of FAX G3 mode 300BPS Used to check the MODEM operation Signals are sent in the send level set with the soft switch Only when FAX is installed Operation test check Fax Operation 13 Used to enter set the number for the FAX dial signal output
37. P 24 5V 1 DATAO 57 57 1 DATAO A 2d GND 1_CLK 5 58 1 CLK Sd 2 28 PDSELO 5 59 PDSELO 5V 5VA 27 27 5V PDSEL2 ed 6d PDSEL2 GND2 AGND 2 28 GND2 IKEYIN 61 61 KEYIN 12V 29 29 12V SEG1 6 62 SEG1 8 M2 Bd Bd 12V IFO 6 63 FO IF2 6 64 F2 FRDY E 65 FRDY SCH 6 68 BZR BR ledS 67 67 l0dS SH a LcdM 6 Sa LodM GNDZAGND 2 LcdCPi S 69 LcdCP1 AIN 3 LcdCP2 70 d LcdCP2 IcdDIS 71 71 lcdDIS LCD VCC 7 72 LCD VCC IcdDO 7 73 leift IcdD1 7 74 IcdD1 IcdD2 7 75 IcdD2 IcdD3 7 76 IcdD3 GND2 77 77 GND2 YH 7 78 YH NL 79 79 YL STSET Er 50 ISTSET CN7 96048 05C FFC 5Pin GND2 1 5 GND2 GND2 2 4 GND2 7CL1 3 3 ICL1 CL1 24V 4 BESCH 24V 5 HES A CN6G B4B PHA S e 179228 4 175694 4 24V1 Tee L1 24v1 ISTAMPS 212 21 STAMPS grp STSET 3 Sy 3 STSET GND2 4 4 GND2 8 7 5 4 AR M350 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 2
38. sec FAX SEND mmm FAX RECEIVE TONER counts sec PAK OUTPUT ee DEVE counts sec SEND IMAGES SEND TIME msn RECEIVE TIME eee seee List of display values gt DRUM Drum cartridge counter Count value counts List of display values l Rotating time sec TONER Toner cartridge counter Count value counts FAX SEND Number of times of FAX sending Rotating time sec FAX RECEIVE Number of times of FAX receiving DEVE Developer cartridge counter Count value counts FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity Rotating time sec SEND IMAGES Quantity of sending SEND TIME Time for sending RECEIVE TIME Time for receiving 22 19 HEEEENNNNEEE Purpose Adjustment setup operation data output check 22 12 display print E Function Content Used to display the scanner mode counter Purpose Adjustment setup operation data output check Section display Item Counter Function Content Used to check the misfeed position and the Operation Procedure The counter values related to the network number of misfeed at that position scanner are displayed If the number of misfeed is considerably great the machine must be repaired SIMULATION 22 19 Section DSPF NETWORK SCANNER COUNTER DISPLAY
39. Check harness and connector in the Detail Bundle exit motor operation abnormalit communication line p d Replace the Mail bin stacker PWB or PCU Cause Motor lock PWB Motor rpm abnormality 5 Mal E ENORM Overcurrent to the motor 0 Content ail bin stacker AR S1 Console finisher control PWB trouble transport motor abnormality Checkand Use DIAG SIM3 3 to check the motor Detail Transport motor trouble remedy operation Cause Motor lock 15 Content Finisher AR FN6 lift motor trouble Motor rpm abnormality s e Overcurrent to the motor Detail Lift motor operation abnormality Mail bin stacker control PWB trouble Cause s lock b li Check and Use DIAG SIM3 21 to check the transport otor rpm abnormality remedy motor operation Overcurrent to the motor Console finisher control PWB trouble AR M350 TROUBLE CODES 11 4 MAIN SUB MAIN SUB F1 12 Content Mail bin stacker AR MS1 gate trouble F1 19 Content Console finisher AR FN7 Detail Gate operation abnormality front alignment motor trouble Cause Gate lock Detail Front alignment motor operation abnormality Mail bin stacker control PWB trouble Cause Motor lock Check and Use DIAG SIM3 21 to check the transport Motor rpm abnormality remedy gate operation Overcurrent to the motor 80 Content Mail bin sta
40. INPUT VALUE 1 165 AND PRESS START ARE YOU SURE M ie 2 NO D List of set values gt Press START Rey 1 Initial value Set range 1 FAX reception 45PPM 104 104 150 SIMULATION 62 2 35PPM 80 45PPM HDD R W TEST EXECUTING SE After completion E 35PPM y Press CUSTOM SETTING key to stop SIMULATION 62 2 61 4 HDD R W TEST OK or NG Purpose Adjustment lt List of set values gt Function Content Used to adjust the laser power absolute value 1 Execution in the printer mode 2 Cancel Section PCU Item Operation Procedure Set the laser power value in the printer mode 62 3 Purpose Operation test check Function Content Used to check the hard disk operation SIMULATION 614 read write Deen a dd i cn Only for the model with the hard disk All area check Section Memory Press Press CUSTOM SETTING key Item Operation Operation Procedure Perform the all area check of read write of the hard disk EXECUTING is displayed during check When check is normally completed OK is displayed When an error occurs NG is displayed SIMULATION 61 4 LASER POWER SETTING PRINTER INPUT VALUE 1 165 AND PRESS START 1 PRINTER List of set values SIMULATION 62 3 Initial value Set range HDD
41. Item Operation Item Operation Operation Procedure Adjust the machine SPF document tray size Operation Procedure Enter the adjustment value indicated on the adjustment back of SPF of SPF document tray size SIMULATION 53 7 1 MAX POSITION 2 POSITION 1 3 POSITION 2 4 MIN POSITION SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT MANUAL SELECT 1 4 AND PRESS START 66 456 791 Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 53 7 PRESS START 1 MAX POSITION SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT MANUAL INPUT VALUE 0 1023 AND List of set values Initial value Range 1 Max width 66 0 1023 2 Adjustment point 1 456 3 Adjustment point 2 713 4 Min width 791 AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 55 Main code 60 Main code 61 60 1 61 1 Purpose Operation test check Purpose Operation test check Function Content Used to check the ICU DRAM operation read write Function Content Used to check the operations of the laser scan unit DRUM After starting NOW CHECKING is displayed during checking When the read write check is normally completed OK is displayed If an error occurs NG is displayed SIMM MEMORY ON BOARD MEMORY Section PCU Section Image process ICU Item Operation Item Operation Operation Procedure Check the LSU Turn on the LSU and check that Operation Procedure Perf
42. Laserstrahl V ARO AVATTAESSA JA SUQJALUKITUS OHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NAKYMATONT CASERSATELYLLE ALA KATSO SATEESEEN ANNAT SATT AN DENNA BRUKSANVISNING SPECIFICERATS KAN ANVANDAREN UTSATTAS FOR LASER KLASSE 1 OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING SOM OVERSKRIDER GRANSEN FOR LASERKLASS 1 A E U UAYLH ut BBI THD ISI 0 0 ERES CUA IE V P HICESENMBUVKSICUTC EW 1 PRODUCT OUTLINE cece eee ee 1 1 2 CONFIGURATION 1 System Configurations asesu aaa ana urn anu 2 1 2 Standard eege ere Wk Ve d e eck 2 1 3 List of combination of peripheral devices 2 2 3 SPECIFICATIONS 1 Basic Specification 0 000000 2 Specific Function was asaan ana Seanad iana a aia 3 B W Scanner Module DPP 4 Rack for Scanner 0 eee 4 CONSUMABLE PARTS 1 Supply system table oooococoococcccoco oo 2 Production number identification 3 Environmental conditions 000 5 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 1 Appearance EEN a es Operation Panel Touch Panel lulii gk dw x ee er Noc Ro mv Q A o n o o o Q ct o 2 D o z 6 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 1 Installing procedure flowchart o oo oo Note for installation place s auananuaaunnn Unpacking procedure ooooccccccccco cee ee eee Machine installing procedure 0 AR EF1 AR RK1 doc oN Oa bk Lo DD CONTENTS 7
43. List of set values O AMS setting disabled 1 AMS setting enabled the host computer and MODEM machine side Self diag display U7 00 is displayed and setup is made to inhibit or allow printing Section Communication RIC MODEM Item Spec Operation Procedure Yes No of communication trouble between PC MODEM is set Default 0 Japan only SIMULATION 27 1 DISABLING OF U7 00 TROUBLE SELECT 0 1 AND PRESS START 0 YES de List of set values 0 U7 00 is not displayed in a communication trouble 1 U7 00 is displayed in a communication trouble 27 5 T c i i Purpose Setup Used to enter the machine tag No This function allows to check the machine tag No from the computer Section Communication RIC MODEM Item Data Operation Procedure The tag number is set The current value is displayed on PRESENT column Enter a new tag number with 10 digit key pad and press START to store Function Content 26 52 poe ee na a CP H Purpose Setup Used to set Enable Disable of count up when white paper is discharged White paper means the index paper without copying in the OHP index paper insertion mode the front rear covers without copying in the cover insertion mode and white paper in the duplex exit
44. Toner cartridge for installation CD ROM for AR 350 450 series printers Operating Manual Counter kit contract 4 Machine installing procedure Note In advance to installation of the machine the paper feed option units AR D13 or AR D14 should have been installed A Removal of the machine 1 Remove the cushioning materials from the right and left of the front side 2 Remove the locking tape from the right and left sidesof the tray Then Remove the top of the carton and lower the plastic bag covering the machine while the machine is still on the carton base 3 Remove the packing tape from the paper tray pull out the paper tray until it stops and remove it by tilting it upward 4 One person must lift by the empty front tray pocket with the right hand and steady the machine with the left hand placed at the upper left of the machine The other person must lift with the right hand by using the lifting recess in the rear of the machine and also steady the machine with the left hand as shown in the illustration Front side Note The center of gravity of the machine lies in the left side when viewed from the Back of machine When lifting the machine be careful not to drop it AR M350 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6 2 B Installation of paper feed options to the machine 3 Reattach the paper tray of the main unit Note Before use of this machine one of the paper feed optio
45. U1 trouble Only when FAX is installed Section Item Trouble Operation Procedure Select with 10 digit key pad SIMULATION 13 ARE YOU SURE 1 YES 2 NO U1 TROUBLE CANCELLATION List of set values entry menu 1 After canceling U1 trouble the display returns to the main code 2 Without canceling a trouble the display returns to the main code entry menu AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 18 Main code 14 Main code 17 Purpose Cancel in case of a trouble Purpose Cancel incase of a trouble Function Content Used to cancel the self diag U1 LCC US PF troubles Function Content Used to cancel the self diag PF trouble when copy is inhibited by the host computer Section Section Communication RIC MODEM ltem Trouble Item Trouble Operation Procedure Select with 10 digit key pad Operation Procedure Select with 10 digit key pad SIMULATION 17 SIMULATION 14 ARE YOU SURE 1 YES 2 NO TROUBLE CANCELLATION OTHERS List of set values ARE YOU SURE 1 YES 2 NO PF TROUBLE CANCELLATION List of set values 1 After canceling a trouble other than U1 U2 PF and LCC the display returns to the main code entry menu entry menu 1 After canceling PF trouble the display returns to the main code 2 Without canceling a trouble
46. copy mode This adjustment is made so that the copy density becomes the same as that in the document table copy mode Used to adjust the copy density correction in the SPF DSPF copy mode for the document table Section Item Picture quality Operation Procedure 1 The exposure correction of OC and SPF is 2 Set with 10 digit key pad performed The current set value is displayed on the right of each item Set value Default 128 set range 0 255 3 Add Set value 128 to the shading adjustment value SIM 46 17 SIMULATION 46 20 1 SPF ODD i 2 SPF EVEN EZ 3 DSPF OC SPF EXP ADJUSTMENT SELECT 1 3 AND PRESS START Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 46 20 OC SPF EXP ADJUSTMENT INPUT VALUE 0 255 AND PRESS START 1 SPF ODD Set value 1 SPF surface CCD odd pixel 2 SPF surface CCD even pixel 3 DSPF back surface AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 44 46 21 46 23 Purpose Adjustment setup operation data output check display print Purpose Adjustment setup operation data output check display print Function Content Used to adjust the scanner exposure level 1 mode auto adjustment Function Content Used to adjust the scanner exposure level and to make individual setup Small text mode Scanner auto adjustment The current set value
47. 2 Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN Press P to store the set value Jam JAM Default 50 set range 0 99 Paper empty PAPER EMPTY 3 Press START and copying is started and the set value is stored Display value 1 List of set values 2 gt 4 Select a paper feed tray Set value 2 1 TRAY1 5 Select an exposure level Set value 3 2 TRAY2 3 TRAY3 SIMULATION 46 15 4 TRAY4 EXP LEVEL SETUP FAX SUPER FINE SELECT 0 8 AND PRESS START 5 Manual feed 0 TRAY SELECT 1 PRINT START PXP LEVEL Mee List of set values 3 gt 6 AUTO H 7 LIGHT H 8 GAREN 3 Auto A A 4 Bright and ern ai Press CUSTOM SETTING Key E 5 Dark 6 Auto Half tone 7 Bright half tone SIMULATION 46 15 EXP LEVEL SETUP FAX SUPER FINE INPUT VALUE 0 99 AND PRESS 8 Dark Half tone START Select 1 and press START key Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key Or copying is terminated SIMULATION 46 15 EXP LEVEL SETUP FAX SUPER FINE NOW COPYING Select 0 and press START key Press START kevio press CUSTOME SETTING key SIMULATION 46 15 EXP LEVEL SETUP FAX SUPER FINE SELECT 1 5 AND PRESS START FEED TRAY Select 2 and 1 TRAY1 2 TRAY2 3 TRAY3 4 TRAYA 5 BPT Press START kevio press START key press CUSTOME SETTING key
48. 2 The Centro port check is started 3 If normal OK is displayed If abnormal the stage number where an error occurred and NG are displayed This simulation is used only for production and inhibited in the market SIMULATION 67 2 CENTRO PORT CENTRO PORT CHECK READY E Press START key under the ready state Press CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 67 2 CENTRO PORT CHECK CENTRO PORT o ORA lt Display message gt WAITING Waiting READY Check start OK OK Check complete normal STAGE NG Check end An error occurred in Stage 1 11 67 11 Purpose Adjustment Function Content Used to set Enable Disable of the parallel I F select signal of the printer Section Printer Item Operation Operation Procedure The select signal of Centro port is set Press START to set SIMULATION 67 11 CENTRO SELECT IN SIGNAL SETTING SELECT 0 1 AND PRESS START 0 OFF 1 ON Set values 0 OFF 1 ON Initial value Item Operation Operation Procedure The network card is checked SIMULATION 67 16 NIC CHECKING NETWORK INTERFACE CARD CHECK Check complete y Press CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 67 16 NIC OK or NG NETWORK INTERFACE CARD CHECK lt Display message gt
49. 29 LedDO LcdD0 27 4g LcdD0 LcdD1 28 12 LcdDT LcdD1 2j M LedD1 LcdD2 2 13 LcdD2 LcdD2 aj 47 LcdD2 MFP LodD3 2 14 LcdD3 LcdD3 21 ag LcdD3 LcdM LodM PWB LcdM 49 LcdM LedS 18 i18 LedS LedS 11 50 LedS LedcPi f 17 LedCP1 LcdCP1 mm r LedCP1 LcdCP2 14 ba LedCP2 LcdCP2 T4 52 LcdCPZ LcdDIS 1 19 LcdDIS LCD VCC M1 53 LCD VCC LCD VEE 49 120 LCD VEE RES MFP 9 54 RES MFP VCCW SCN 8 Z1 VCCW SC FRDY 7 B5 FRDY TXD SCN 6 22 TXD SCN RXD SCN 5 56 RXD SCH DSRSCN 4 23 DSR SCN DIR SCN 3 57 DTR SCN RES SCN Z 24 RES SCN POFSCN 1 58 POF SCN TSCNSET P 25 ISCHSET GND2 E 59 GND2 12V T8 1 28 12V 12V 17 60 12V GND2 18 27 GND2 GND2 1 61 GND2 5V 14 pa 5V 5V IS 5V 5V 1 29 5V 5V m Je 5V 3 3V 1 30 3 3V 33V 9 64 3 3V GNDZ 8 21 GND2 GND2 7 65 GND2 24V 6 32 24V 24V 5 66 24V 24V 4 33 24V GND2 3 67 GND2 CNDZ 2 34 GNDZ GNDZ 1 68 GND2 N E pL HSP SHF AA BSP SHF TAA 35V Te ey 1 GND2 Y 3 12 GND2 OCSW LB LB 3 OCSW OCSW 3E 3 RD 24V alar RD ILEDO Sue BR ORS LED1 i LB LED S3B PH 53053 0310 MOLEX ws D Re INPS T GND2 ZC p 2 GND2 MHPS 5V 3 3 5V S5B PH MIMA 1 MIMB 2 IMIMA 3 MIM IMIMB 4 24V 5 B13E BB PHR 13 PNC 111 ICOPY 2 2 ICA 3 3 READY 4 4 TAUD 5 5 5V 6 6 GND2 7 7 24V 8 8 NC 9 9 TC 1010 24V 1177 PNC a 1212 GND2 1313 AR M350 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 3
50. 3 TRAYS LCC1 4 TRAY4 LCC2 5 Manualfeed Screen The selected tray is registered as an initial set value in the initial At the above value 10 the SPF enters the duplex mode DD making duplex copies List of set values 3 Set range 25 400 Adjustment procedure 1 Select a paper feed tray to be used in the adjustment set the magnification ratio and enter the adjustment item 2 After entering the adjustment value press START and printing is started 3 Check the off center distance from the paper edge of the copy Repeat procedure 2 until a satisfactory result is obtained Note Wien adjusting the off center of LCC1 set only the left tray of LCC When adjusting the off center of LCC2 set only the right tray of LCC This is because there is no distinction between right and left in selection of a tray AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 52 50 12 List of set values 1 Purpose Adjustment Function Content Used to adjust the reading image center position Adjusted for each document mode Section Image process ICU Item Picture quality Operation Procedure Perform the document print off center adjustment 1 The current set value is highlighted on the right of each item In this screen be sure to select 1 COPY START Set value 1 Enter the correction value with 10 digit key pad Press P to store the set value 3
51. 4 Remove the scanner upper cabinet unit g Scan motor removal 1 Remove the scanner rear cabinet and the rear lower cabinet 2 Pull out the harness from the scanner control PWB 1 9 3 Remove the scan motor AR M350 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY MAINTENANCE 7 5 h OC open sensor k Operation panel unit 1 Remove the rear cabinet 1 Remove the operation panel lower cabinet 2 Remove the OC open sensor i Mirror home position sensor 1 Remove the rear cabinet 2 2 Remove the mirror home position sensor 3 Remove the scanner right cabinet j Scanner control PWB 4 Remove the operation panel unit 1 Remove the scanner rear lower cabinet 2 Disconnect the connector and earth band and pull out the scanner control PWB DS 3 When the scanner control PWB is replaced the EEPROM must be replaced AR M350 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY MAINTENANCE 7 6 l Inverter PWB LVDS PWB LCD panel n Original detection PWB Light receiving side 1 Remove the operation panel unit 1 Remove the operation panel lower cabinet 2 Remove the harness and remove the inverter PWB and the LVDS 2 Remove the original detection PWB light receiving side PWB e 4 o Scan lamp 1 Remove the table glass 2 Remove the scan lamp unit E 3 Remove the LCD rear cover and remove the LCD p CCD lens unit 1 Remove the table glass 2 Remove the dark box cover 7 9 2 ge m Operation
52. 5 OUTPUT key Touch to display the output mode setting screen A highlighted selection on the screen will indicate the currently selected mode The setting screen can be closed by touching the OK key on the setting screen whether or not a selection change was made 6 SPECIAL MODES key Touch to display the special modes selection screen 7 Paper size display The display shows the location of the paper trays the size of the paper in the trays and the approximate amount of paper loaded in each tray The approximate amount of paper in a tray is indicated by 8 Original size display The original paper size will be displayed when originals are placed on the document glass or in the document feeder 9 Exposure display and A touch of the EXPOSURE key will open the exposure selection window EXPOSURE key A highlighted key on the exposure window indicates which exposure mode AUTO TEXT TEXT PHOTO or PHOTO is currently selected When an exposure mode other than AUTO is selected an exposure level scale will also appear in the window 10 Paper select display and Displays the selected paper size When the auto paper select mode has been selected AUTO will be PAPER SELECT key displayed A touch of the PAPER SELECT key will open the paper selection window When a selection is made the selection window will close To close the window without making a selection touch the key again 11 Copy ratio display and Displays the selected copy ra
53. 7 MESSAGE5 8 MESSAGE6 9 MESSAGE7 10 MESSAGE8 11 MESSAGE9 12 MESSAGE10 13 MESSAGE11 14 MESSAGE12 15 MESSAGE13 16 MESSAGE14 17 MESSAGE15 18 ALARM 19 RINGER 20 EXT TEL RINGER lt List of set values gt 1 NONE NONE 2 PAUSE PAUSE 3 MESSAGE1 MESSAGE1 4 MESSAGE2 MESSAGE2 5 MESSAGE3 MESSAGE3 6 MESSAGE4 MESSAGE4 7 MESSAGE5 MESSAGE5 8 MESSAGE6 MESSAGE6 9 MESSAGE7 MESSAGE7 10 MESSAGE8 MESSAGE8 11 MESSAGE9 MESSAGE9 12 MESSAGE10 MESSAGE10 13 MESSAGE11 MESSAGE11 14 MESSAGE12 MESSAGE12 15 MESSAGE13 MESSAGE13 16 MESSAGE14 MESSAGE14 17 MESSAGE15 MESSAGE15 18 ALARM ALARM 19 RINGER RINGER 20 EXT TEL RINGER EXT TEL RINGER AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 64 List of set values 66 9 1 NONE NONE Purpose Operation test check 3 MESSAGE1 MESSAGE1 Function Content Used to check the output operation of the FAX 4 MESSAGE2 MESSAGE sound signals l 5 MESSAGES MESSAGES Sound output IC operation check 6 MESSAGE4 MESSAGE4 Only when FAX is installed 7 MESSAGES MESSAGES soU M 8 MESSAGE MESSAGES Zem Operation 9 MESSAGE MESSAGE7 Operation Procedure A voice message is outputted 10 MESSAGES MESSAGES Send level is set with SW 11 MESSAGES MESSAGE9 Enter a number during execution to change the 19 MESSAGE10 MESSAGE10 signal 13 MESSAGE11 MESSAGE11 Press START to start sending a voice m
54. A5 B5 B5R 216x330 mm 8 5 x11 Original tray Center of the tray Original reference position guide inscribeddisplay Original face down placement display indication din Original Guide From Center inscribed display BBE A4E A5 8 5 H B4 B5 11 A3 A4 The position available to attach the staple position guide label when the optional finisher desktop console type is equipped Supplied from the main unit 7 Dimensions External dimensions WxDxH 808 x 619x180 mm Occupied space dimensions WxD 945 x 619 mm When the tray is extended Weight Approx 19 5 kg 8 Display device at scanner part Type Dot map LCD touch panel Display dot number 640 x 240 dots dot pitch 0 24x0 24 mm LCD operating dimension 153 5 x 57 5 mm LCD back light Fluorescent tube method LCD brightness adjustment Provided 9 Key Mode selection area Job status key Printer mode key online display LED data in memory display LED Scan Fax mode key busy display LED data in memory display LED Copy mode key User definition key Basic input area Start key CA key 10 key Clear key key key 10 Touch sense method Resistive film method 11 Used character in the LCD Dot 8x16 16 x 16 dots Bold display O 4 Rack for Scanner 1 Dimensions Strength 60 kg Ex
55. AR FN6 11 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000x3 AR SC2 Common with cartridge for AR FN7 TI Note1 Print on Master individual carton Toner Developer in 2 languages English French DR in 4 languages English French German Spanish For USA Government Note2 Packed with machine DR 50K Developer UN Process UN Note3 The other maintenance parts which are not listed above are registered as service parts B CANADA Latin America NO Name Content Life Product name Remark 1 Toner CA Black Toner Toner Net Weight 814g 27K AR 450NT Life setup is based on A4 6 2 Developer Developer Developer Net Weight 450g 100K AR 450ND 3 Drum Drum x1 50K AR 450DR 4 50K PM kit Cleaner blade x1 50K AR 450KC Drum separation pawl x4 Screen grid x1 Toner reception seal x1 Side malt F x1 Side malt R x1 Charging plate x1 5 100K PM kit Transfer roller x1 100K AR 450KA Discharging plate x1 Paper dust removing unit x1 DV blade x1 DV side seal F x1 DV side seal R x1 6 200K PM kit Upper heat roller x1 200K AR 450KB Lower heat roller x1 Fusing separation pawl Upper x4 Fusing separation pawl Lower x2 Cleaning roller x1 Bearing x2 7 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 3000x3 AR SC1 Common with cartridge for AR FN4 amp AR FN6 8 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000x3 AR SC2 Common with cartridge for AR FN7 Note1 Print on Master individual carton Toner Deve
56. Item Trouble Operation Procedure The history of the latest 50 paper jams is NETWORK SCANNER ORIGINAL COUNTER displayed Refer to the jam code table below MAIL COUNTER tree FTP COUNTER SIMULATION 22 12 lt List of display values gt SPF JAM HISTORY Keke Rei iii A A A E E MERERI A NETWORK SCANNER Number of scanned documents RA AA AA AAA AA A A A ORIGINAL COUNTER total of OC and SPF SE MAIL COUNTER Number of times of mail sending PR A dh Kate SEENEN NEG FTP COUNTER Number of times of FTP sending eene 10 lines x 80 digits 800 characters Jam code table gt Code Description SPSD N SPSD not reaching jam SPSD S SPSD remaining jam SPOD N SPOD not reaching jam SPOD S SPOD remaining jam SPSDSCN Exposure start timer end AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 24 Purpose Data clear Main code 24 24 3 24 1 Purpose Data clear Function Content Used to clear the number of use of the staple DSPF and the scanner reading unit Function Content Used to clear the misfeed counter misfeed history trouble counter and trouble history After completion of maintenance these counters must be cleared Section Item Counter Operation Procedure Select with 10 digit key pad and press START key The procedure below is executed and the display returns to the original state 1 Counter is cleared 2 Not cleared SIMULATION 24 1
57. Operation possible mode Judgment Trouble Trouble block code Copy read FAX send Email send FAX print Print List print interruption etc Scanner section troubles SCANNER L1 L3 U2 X X X O O O Mirror motor lens copy lamp 80 81 FAX board trouble Controller F6 F7 O X O X O O FAX FAX power OFF Controller O X O X O O Network error Controller CE O O X O O O Staple trouble PCU F1 10 Al O O Al Al A1 Paper feed tray trouble PCU F3 U6 A2 O O A2 A2 A2 Desk PCU section troubles PCU X O O X X X Motor fusing etc After work trouble PCU AS O O A3 A3 AS Laser trouble PCU E7 X O O X X X 02 only L6 HDD trouble Controller E7 03 X X X X X X CCD troubles Shading etc SCANNER E7 X X X O O O 10 11 13 Scanner communication trouble Controller E7 80 X X X O O O PCU communication trouble Controller E7 90 X O O X X X Backup battery voltage fall Controller U1 01 02 O X X O O O O Operation possible X Operation impossible A Operation possible depending on conditions A1 Operation possible except for the staple mode A2 Operation possible except for the trouble tray AS Operation possible except for the trouble paper exit section B Operation inhibited E Judgment Trouble ee mode rouble Block code Copy read FAX send Email send FAX print Print List print interruption etc Memory trouble Controller U2 X X X X X X Expansion RAM not installed etc 00 11 12 External communication invalid RIC Controller U
58. SC wm Face down Face down 4 Adjustment values A Processing adjustment values Each controller has its EEPROM The adjustment values are collected to the MFP controller If any adjustment value is changed the changed value is returned to the controller and saved When any adjustment value is changed it is retuned to each controller and saved Transmission of saved adjustment value When turning on the power etc SCANNER CONTROLLER AR M350 MACHINE OPERATION 8 1 B Adjustment values 1 Adjustment values saved in PCU Counters Adjustment values Others Drum rotating time counter accumulated time Developing bias voltage value Serial number Developing unit rotating time counter Cleaning mode developing bias voltage value Trouble history Toner supply time Section IC chip Main high voltage adjustment Tray 1 size Drum rotating time Section IC chip Transfer charger voltage value LCC tray size Total counter Transfer belt cleaning voltage value Manual feed destination information Maintenance counter Toner concentration reference value Tray 2 destination information Developing counter Concentration correction start set time Developing unit Desk 1 destination information Drum counter Concentration correction rotating time Developing unit Desk 2 destination information Toner cartridge counter Concentra
59. SIMULATION 8 17 1 FRONT 0 375 TRANSFER ROLLER SETTING INPUT VALUE AND PRESS START Press CUSTOM SETTING key Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key Or after 30sec output SIMULATION 8 17 1 FRONT 0 375 TRANSFER ROLLER SETTING EXECUTING List of set values Default Set range SHV front surface 160 45PPM 0 375 2 SHV back surface 120 35PPM 3 THV output 780 0 1250 AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 17 Main code 9 Main code 10 9 1 Purpose Operation test check Function Content Used to check the operation under load clutches and solenoids in the duplex section and their control circuits Section Duplex Item Operation Operation Procedure Select with 10 digit key pad SIMULATION 9 1 1 ADMEN1 2 ADMEN2 3 DGS Press ADU OUTPUT CHECK SELECT 1 3 AND PRESS START Press SIMULATION 9 1 1 ADMEN1 2 ADMEN2 3 DGS ADU OUTPUT CHECK EXECUTING lt List of set values gt Purpose Operation test check Function Content Used to check the operation of the toner motor and its control circuit Section Process OPC drum developing transfer cleaning Developing toner Item Operation Operation Procedure Select with 10 digit key pad The toner motor rotates for 10sec 1 ADME
60. TRAY3 13 TRAYS3 with Duplex SIMULATION 51 2 4 TRAY4 14 TRAY4 with Duplex RESIST TIMING ADJUSTMENT SELECT 0 8 AND PRESS START 5 Manual feed 15 Manual feed with Duplex 0 TRAY SELECT _4 PRINT START 2 ai 3 TRAY2Ef 4 DESK Eg The selected tray is registered as an initial set value in the initial 5 BPT E e Apu 7 SPF HIGH 8 SPF LOW Ef screen A Select 0 or 1 and ves Sa Press CUSTOM SETTING key E SIMULATION 51 2 S RESIST TIMING ADJUSTMENT INPUT VALUE 0 99 AND PRESS START 1 TRAY1 Se TT Press CUSTOM SETTING key E press BART Or copying is terminated E SIMULATION 51 2 RESIST TIMING ADJUSTMENT NOW PRINTING Select 0 and Press START key or E press START key press CUSTOME SETTING Key SIMULATION 51 2 RESIST TIMING ADJUSTMENT SELECT 1 15 AND PRESS START FEED TRAY 1 TRAY1 2 TRAY2 3 TRAY3 4 TRAY4 5 BPT ABOVE 10 DUPLEX MODE AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 54 Main code 53 53 7 53 6 Purpose Adjustment setup operation data output check display print Purpose Adjustment Function Content Used to adjust the DSPF width detection level Function Content Used to enter the adjustment value of SPF width detection 1 Extend the guide to MAX position select 1 and press START When COMPLETE is displayed press CUSTOM SETTING to return to the initial screen Move the guide to A4R position select 2 and press START
61. Values Description ODD GAIN Pixel gain adjustment value EVEN GAIN Pixel gain adjustment value ODD MAX Pixel MAX ODD MIN Pixel MIN ODD AVE Od pixel average EVEN MAX Even pixel MAX EVEN MIN Even pixel MIN EVEN AVE Even pixel average ODD OFFSET Black offset EVEN OFFSET Even offset ODD DEV Odd standard deviation EVEN DEV Even standard deviation CIS data Only when DSPF installed Values Description GAIN Gain adjustment value MAX Pixel MAX MIN Pixel MIN AVE Pixel average OFFSET Black offset DEV Standard deviation SIMULATION 63 2 1 OC SHADING 2 DSPF SHADING SHADING EXECUTION SELECT1 3 AND PRESS START 3 CCD TEST SHADING E Press START key O SIMULATION 63 2 1 OC SHADING SHADING EXECUTING After completion y Press CUSTOM ETTING key to stop Inn ce nm SIMULATION 63 2 1 OC SHADING SHADING COMPLETED List of set values 1 OC analog data correction and shading correction data making making 2 DSPF analog level correction and shading correction data 3 Execution of CCD data taking test 63 7 Purpose Adjustment Function Content Used to adjust the white plate scan start position in shading white correction Section Scanner exposure Item Operation Operation Procedure Adjust the white plate scan start position in shading white correction Enter the ad
62. de 141 A A4 210 297 4 202 4 1 Form B5 182 257 4 168 4 AR M350 AR M450 Console type AB 148 210 4 140 4 2 Engine speed Japanese postcard 100 148 4 92 4 Paper size AR M350 AR M450 Ledger 279 432 4 271 4 A4 8 5 x 11 35ppm 45ppm Legal 216 356 4 208 4 A5R 5 5 x 8 5 R 35ppm 45ppm Foolscap 216 330 4 208 4 B5 35ppm 45ppm Letter 216 279 4 208 4 B4 8 5 x 14 20ppm 22ppm Executive 184 267 4 183 4 A3 11 x 17 17ppm 20ppm Invoice 140 216 4 132 4 3 Engine composition Com 10 envelope 105 241 4 97 4 C5 envelope 162 229 4 154 4 Photoconductor type OPC diameter of photoconductor 30mm Record method Electrophotograph laser Monarch envelope 98 191 S 90 4 Development method Dry type dual component magnetic brush DL envelope 110 220 4 102 4 development ISO B5 envelope 176 250 4 168 4 Charge method Charged saw tooth method Transfer method Transfer roller 6 Warm up Cleaning method Counter blade Warm up time less than 80 seconds Fusing method Heat roller Pre heat requirement Required Used toner disposal 4 Engine resolution Toner recycling system Jam recovery time Target about 30 seconds Under standard condition of 60 seconds left after side cover opening polygon motor halt Resolution Write 600dpi Smoothing Write 1200dpi equivalent 7 Power source Gradation Write 2 levels Voltage 100V system 200V system 5
63. key SIMULATION 66 5 SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK SOFT SW SELECT 1 32 AND PRESS START gt 1 NOSIGNAL 2 33 6 V34 3 31 2 V34 4 28 8 V34 5 26 4 V34 6 24 0 V34 7 21 6 V34 8 19 2 V34 9 16 8 V34 10 14 4 V34 11 12 0 V34 12 9 6 V34 13 7 2 V34 14 4 8 V34 15 2 4 V34 16 14 4 V33 17 12 0 V33 18 14 4 V17 19 12 0 V17 20 9 6 V17 21 7 2 V17 22 9 6 V29 23 7 2V29 244 8 V27t 25 2 4 V27t 26 0 3 FLG 27 CED 2100 28 CNG 1100 29 0 3 V21 30 ANSam 31 RINGER 32 No RBT List of set values 1 No signal 17 12 0 V33 2 33 6 V34 18 14 4 V17 3 31 2 V34 19 12 0 V17 4 28 8 V34 20 9 6V17 5 26 4 V34 21 7 2 V17 6 24 0 V34 22 9 6 V29 7 21 6 V34 23 7 2 V29 8 19 2 V34 24 4 8 V27t 9 116 8 V34 25 2 4 V27t 10 114 4 V34 26 OS3FLG 11 12 0 V34 27 CED2100 12 19 6 V34 28 CNG1100 13 7 2 V34 29 0 3 V21 14 14 8 V34 30 ANSam 15 2 4 V34 31 RINGER 16 114 4 V33 32 No RBT 66 6 Purpose User data output check display print Function Content Used to print the confidential password Used when the confidential password is forgotten Only when FAX is installed Section Fax Item Data Operation Procedure The confidential pass code is printed 1 The currently selected data is displayed on the side of menu 2 The paper size is automatically selected by the size stored in the image memory SIMULATION 66 6 PASS CODE PRINT OUT PRESS START
64. transfer cleaning Item Operation Operation Procedure SIMULATION 44 1 PROCESS CORRECTION VALUE SETTING INPUT VALUE 0 127 AND PRESS START BITO Vg1 BIT1 Vg2 BIT2 Vb1 BIT3 Vb2 BIT4 Vb3 BIT5 LD1 BIT6 LD2 bit 1 Correction enabled Bit 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 o Jo Jo Jo f fo fo P 0 ERI mend Madii 44 4 SS M M M l Purpose Setup Function Content Used to set the target image reference density level in the developing bias voltage correction Section Process OPC drum developing transfer cleaning Item Data Operation Procedure The process correction value is set Select an item 1 9 and enter a value with 10 digit key pad Press SYTART to store the value SIMULATION 44 4 PROCESS CONTROL VALUE SETTING SELECT 1 8 AND PRESS START 1 PTH o0 2 S WT 3 Vb1 1 4 Vb1 2 EMA cO 6 Vb2 1 7 Vb2 2 8 Vb2 3E Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 44 4 PROCESS CONTROL VALUE SETTING INPUT VALUE AND PRESS START 1 PTH List of display values 1 PTH 1 Process Thermistor temperature forcible set value 0 99 C Normal 0 2 S_WT 2 Vb Devepoping bias correction value rising correction wait time 0 180sec Default 90 3 Vb1 1 3 Vb Devepoping bias correc
65. 1 4 AND PRESS START 1 MAX POSITION o6 2 POSITION 1 456 3 POSITION 2 T13 4 MIN POSITION 791 Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 53 7 SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT MANUAL INPUT VALUE 0 1023 AND PRESS START 1 MAX POSITION 66 2 When replacing the original width detection volume Execute SIM53 6 to perform the machine DSPF original tray size adjustment 1 Extend the guide to MAX position select 1 and press START When COMPLETE is displayed press CUSTOM SETTING to return to the initial screen 2 Move the guide to A4R position select 2 and press START When COMPLETE is displayed press CUSTOM SETTING to return to the initial screen 3 Move the guide to A5R position select 3 and press START When COMPLETE is displayed press CUSTOM SETTING to return to the initial screen 4 Move the guide to MIN position select 4 and press START When COMPLETE is displayed the adjustment is completed If ERROR is displayed in procedures 1 4 repeat the adjustment again SIMULATION 53 6 SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT SELECT 1 4 AND PRESS START 1 MAX POSITION 2 POSITION 1 3 POSITION 2 4 u POSITION Sel d 1 and z z S press START key key Press CUSTOME EE E ke SIMULATION 53 6 SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT MAX POSITION COMPLETE or ERROR Select 2 and press START key P
66. 11 12 0 V34 12 9 6 V34 13 7 2 V34 14 4 8 V34 15 2 4 V34 16 14 4 V33 17 12 0 V33 18 14 4 V17 19 12 0 V17 20 9 6 V17 21 7 2 V17 22 9 6 V29 23 7 2 V29 24 4 8 V27t 25 2 4 V27t 26 0 3 FLG 27 CED 2100 28 CNG 1100 29 0 3 V21 30 ANSam 31 RINGER 32 No RBT Press CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 66 4 e SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK LEVEL MAX SELECT 1 32 AND PRESS START 1 NOSIGNAL 2 33 6 V34 3 31 2 V34 4 28 8 V34 5 26 4 V34 6 24 0 V34 7 21 6 V34 8 19 2 V34 9 16 8 V34 10 14 4 V34 11 12 0 V34 12 9 6 V34 13 7 2 V34 14 4 8 V34 15 2 4 V34 16 14 4 V33 17 12 0 V33 18 14 4 V17 19 12 0V17 20 9 6 V17 21 7 2V17 22 9 6 V29 23 7 2V29 24 4 8 V27t 25 2 4 V27t 26 0 3 FLG 27 CED 2100 28 CNG 1100 29 0 3 V21 30 ANSam 31 RINGER 32 No RBT AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 62 66 5 Purpose Operation test check Function Content Used to check the operations of data signal output in the FAX data output mode Used to check the MODEM operation Signals are sent in the send level set with the soft switch Only when FAX is installed Section FAX Item Operation Operation Procedure Signal output check Send level is set with the soft SW When CUSTOM SETTING is pressed during execution of this simulation execution is stopped Enter a number and press START to change the kind of signal Same display SIMULATION 66 5 SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK SOFT SW SELECT 1 32 AND PRESS
67. 8 80 STSET 96045 BI FFC 5Pin 1D2 1 5 GND2 1D2 2 4 GND2 4 3 3 CL1 CU 4V 4 2 24V 4V 5 1 24V sun sl mp 179228 4 175694 4 4v1 1r U E 3 TAMPS 2 2 STAMP SET 3 3 STSET SIME 1D2 4 4 GND2 SCN PWB CN19 BM50B SRDS G TF CN18 BM20B SRDS G TF I F PWB CN TICKET D 1T T_ZCLK 8AL050S boe 35 LK T DATA H 2 DATA l I DATAO 4 38 T DATAU TDATAT H 3 LDATAT M DATAT 4 37 IL DATAT ros di 4 t D8c D I Fha T_DBL END Hd 15 GND2 GND2 3d B9 GND2 2 CLK 3 6 2 CLK 2 CLR 51 ua 2 CLK 2 DATAOU Pn 7 2 DATAO 2 DATAO 358 al 2 DATAO Z DATAT 5 8 2 DATAT ZDATAT P 42 2 DATAT 2 DBL j 9 72_DBLF 2 DBL 31 43 I2 DBL GNDZ 3 10 GND2 ege D Joe LodDO
68. Content Used to adjust the print density for each density 3 Exposure level 1 0 level display value in the copy mode 4 Exposure level 15 binary Text mode 5 Exposure level 2 0 A desired reading density can be set for each 6 Exposure level 2 5 density level display value 7 Exposure level 30 Section 8 Exposure level 3 5 ltem Picture quality 9 Exposure level 4 0 Operation Procedure The exposure mode to be set is selected 10 Exposure level 4 5 Text mode 11 Exposure level 5 0 1 The current set value is highlighted on the right side of each item In this screen be sure List of display values 1 to select 1 COPY START Set value 1 Normal display NOW COPYING 2 Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN Press P to store the set value Jam JAM Default 50 set range O 99 paper empty PAPER EMPTY 3 Press START and copying is started and the set value is stored Display value 1 lt List of set values 2 gt 4 Select a paper feed tray Set value 2 1 TRAY1 5 Select an exposure level Set value 3 2 TRAY2 3 TRAY3 SIMULATION 46 9 4 TRAY4 EXP LEVEL SETUP CHAR 2 SELECT 0 11 AND PRESS START 5 Manual feed 0 TRAY SELECT 1 COPY START 2 EXP LEVEL lt List of set values 3 gt 3 1 0 EE 4 5 Eg 520 EJ 6 2 5 E 7 30 EN s 35 Ep 3
69. ECK Display message CHECKING Checking OK Checking complete NG Checking end AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 71 66 33 Purpose Setup Function Content Used to check signal detection Section FAX Item Operation Operation Procedure When the signal is detected the display is highlighted This mode is for development and inhibited in the market SIMULATION 66 33 SIGNAL DETECT CHECK BUSY TONE rie CED FNET DTM 66 34 Purpose Setup Function Content Used to measure and display the communication time Section FAX Item Operation Operation Procedure The time spent for communication is measured Send receives performed in the normal mode The communication time is displayed with the simulation unit ms denke ms SIMULATION 66 34 COMMUNICATION TIME DISPLAY Setup for send SIMULATION 66 35 ARE YOU SURE 1 YES 2 NO MODEM PROGRAM RELOAD Press START key SIMULATION 66 35 MODEM PROGRAM RELOAD EXECUTING LOADER OK or Check Sum value 1 byte hexadecimal MODEM COMPLETE or NG code 1 byte Hexadecimal After completion of writing SIMULATION 66 35 LOADER OK MODEM PROGRAM RELOAD MODEM COMPLETE Result of MODEM writing COMPLETE Writing completed 81 Check sum error 82 W
70. Fax Operation Procedure The dial test number is set Item Operation Enter a number with 10 digit key pad key and Operation Procedure The dial test is performed 20PPS output The make time is set When CUSTOM SETTING is pressed the execution is terminated Press START to register SIMULATION 66 15 SIMULATION 66 13 DIAL TEST 20PPS SELECT 0 1 AND PRESS START DIAL TEST NUMBER SETTNG 0 9 0 9 Sp 0 EXECUTE _ INPUT NUMBER AND PRESS START 1 MAKE TIME 4 9 ms 0123456789 01234567 A Select 0 and Gg SH gy Selec Tand press START Key Press ICUSTOM SETTING Kej 8 or START key z 66 14 STARR SIMULATION 66 15 Purpose Setup DIAL TEST 20PPS SELECT 0 15 AND PRESS START d 1 MAKE TIME Function Content Used to add time to the FAX pulse dial Press CUSTOM SETTING key mode 10PPS and to test the dial signal output The dial number signal set with SIM 66 13 is outputted Used to check dialing troubles and the operation Only when FAX is installed SIMULATION 66 15 DIAL TEST 20PPS EXECUTING 1 MAKE TIME d 9 ms Section Fax Item Operation List of set values Operation Procedure The dial test is performed 10PPS output O Execution The additional time is set 1 Dial pulse make time setup 0 15 When CUSTOM SETTING is pressed the execution is te
71. PRESS SIMULATION 66 12 START 300bps SIGNAL OUTPUT SOFT SW SELECT 1 6 AND PRESS EXECUTING START 1 NOSIGNAL 2 11111 3 11110 4 00000 EXECUTING 5 010101 6 00001 z 1 NO SIGNAL 2 11111 3 11110 4 00000 inr mem 5 010101 6 00001 Press CUSTOM SETTING key a SIMULATION 66 11 300bps SIGNAL OUTPUT LEVEL MAX SELECT 1 6 AND PRESS z SIMULATION 66 12 START rb 300bps SIGNAL OUTPUT SOFT SW SELECT 1 6 AND PRESS 1 NOSIGNAL 2 11111 3 11110 4 00000 START 5 010101 6 00001 1 NOSIGNAL 2 11111 3 11110 4 00000 5 010101 6 00001 List of set values 1 NO SIGNAL No signal List of set values 2 11111 1 NO SIGNAL No signal 3 11110 2 11111 4 00000 3 11110 5 10101 4 00000 6 100001 5 10101 6 00001 AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 66 66 13 66 15 Purpose Setup Purpose Setup Function Content Used to select the FAX dial signal output test The dial number signal set with this simulation is outputted in the dial signal output test with SIM 66 14 16 Only when FAX is installed Function Content Used to set the add time to the FAX pulse dial mode 20PPS and to test the dial signal output The dial number signal set with SIM 66 13 is outputted Used to check dialing troubles and the operation key The upper limit is 20 digits Press CLEAR to return to the initial state Section FAX Only when FAX is installed Item Data Section
72. PRESS START 1 PAPER JAM 2 SPF JAM 3 TROUBLE JAM TROUBLE COUNTER DATA CLEAR SELECT1 3 AND Press START key Press SIMULATION 24 1 ARE YOU SURE 1 YES 2 NO PAPER JAM COUNTER DATA CLEAR Section Item Counter Operation Procedure Select with 10 digit key pad and press START key The procedure below is executed and the display returns to the original state 1 Counter is cleared 2 Not cleared SIMULATION 24 3 ORG STAPLE COUNTER DATA CLEAR SELEC1 5 AND PRESS START 1 SPF 2 SCAN 3 STAPLER 4 PUNCH 5 STAMP Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key or START key SIMULATION 24 3 ARE YOU SURE 1 YES 2 NO SPF COUNTER DATA CLEAR lt List of set values gt lt List of set values gt 1 SPF paper passing quantity 2 Number of times of document scan 3 Number of times of stapling 4 Number of times of punching 5 Number of times of finish stamp 24 4 PAPER JAM Number of times of paper jam SPF JAM Number of times of SPF jam TROUBLE Number of times of troubles 24 2 Purpose Data clear Function Content Used to clear the number of use print quantity of each paper feed section Section Paper feed Purpose Data clear Function Content Used to reset the maintenance counter Section ltem Co
73. PROGRESS STATUS JOB QUEUE 1 COPY 003 000 COPYING aah 1 Job list A job list which indicates the current job and reserved jobs or a job list which indicates completed jobs is displayed The icons to the left of the jobs in queue represent the job mode Print mode 5 Copy mode en Network scan mode La Fax mode transmission job e Fax mode reception job When a job list which indicates the current job and reserved jobs is displayed the displayed jobs themselves are operation keys To cancel printing or to give a job the highest print priority touch the relevant job key to select the job and execute the desired operation using the keys described in 7 8 and 9 2 Mode switching key Use to switch the job list between JOB QUEUE and COMPLETE JOB QUEUE Displays the list of the current job and the reserved jobs COMPLETE Displays the list of completed jobs 3 PRINT JOB key Use to display the print job list for all modes print copy network scan and fax 4 E MAIL FTP key Use to display the list of jobs that use the network for sending e mail by SNMP protocol or sending to an ftp site or desktop by ftp protocol 5 FAX JOB key Use to display the fax communication status and the reserved transmission job status 6 Display switching keys Use to switch the page of the displayed job list 7 STOP DELETE key Use to cancel or delete the current job or delete the selected reserved job Received fa
74. Press START keyjo press CUSTOME SETTING key TT 3 1 0 6 2 5 9 4 0 SIMULATION 46 11 EXP LEVEL SETUP PHOTO2 SELECT 3 11 AND PRESS START EXP LEVEL SELECT 4 1 5 5 2 0 7 3 0 8 3 5 10 4 5 11 5 0 List of set values 1 Paper feed tray selection Copy start Default Exposure level selection Exposure level 1 0 Exposure level 1 5 Exposure level 2 0 Exposure level 2 5 Exposure level 3 0 Exposure level 3 5 CO NIDA BG PO oc Exposure level 4 0 Exposure level 4 5 mre ao Exposure level 5 0 List of display values 1 Normal display NOW COPYING ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN Jam JAM paper empty PAPER EMPTY List of set values 2 gt 1 TRAY1 2 TRAY2 3 TRAY3 4 TRAY4 5 Manual feed lt List of set values 3 gt 99 Exposure level 1 0 Exposure level 1 5 Exposure level 2 0 Exposure level 2 5 Exposure level 3 0 Exposure level 3 5 ooo amp Exposure level 4 0 Exposure level 4 5 k alo Exposure level 5 0 AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 39 46 12 46 13 groom PC M c NAcc NN UN w
75. Process thermistor open 37 Content Console finisher AR FN7 Cause Process thermistor trouble backup RAM trouble Process thermistor harness disconnection Detail Backup RAM contents are disturbed PCU PWB trouble Cause Console finisher control PWB trouble Check and Check connection of harness and connector Malfunction by noise remedy ofthe process thermistor Check and Replace the console finisher control PWB Check PCU PWB remedy F3 12 Content Machine no 1 tray lift up trouble 38 Content Console finisher AR FN7 Detail PED does not turn ON in the specified time punch AR PN1 backup RAM trouble LUD does not turn ON in the specified time Detail Punch unit backup RAM contents are Cause PED LUD trouble disturbed No 1 tray lift up trouble Cause Punch control PWB trouble Check connection of harness between the Malfunction by noise PCVU PWB lift up unit and paper feed unit Check and Replace the punch control PWB Check and Check PED LUD and their harness and remedy remedy connectors 81 Content Console finisher transport motor abnormality Check the lift up unit Detail Transport motor trouble 22 Content Multi purpose tray lift up trouble Cause Motor lock Detail MCPED does not turn ON in the specified Motor rpm abnormality time Overcurrent to the motor MCLUD does not turn ON in the specified Console finisher control PWB trouble time Check and Use DIAG SIM3 3 to check the motor Cause MCPED MCLUD trouble remedy operation Mu
76. START 1 NOSIGNAL 2 33 6 V34 3 31 2 V34 4 28 8 V34 5 26 4 V34 6 24 0 V34 7 21 6 V34 8 19 2 V34 9 16 8 V34 10 14 4 V34 11 12 0 V34 12 9 6 V34 13 7 2 V34 14 4 8 V34 15 2 4 V34 16 14 4 V33 17 12 0 V33 18 14 4 V17 19 12 0 V17 20 9 6 V17 21 7 2 V17 22 9 6 V29 23 7 2 V29 24 4 8 V27t 25 2 4 V27t 26 0 3 FLG 27 CED 2100 28 CNG 1100 29 0 3 V21 30 ANSam 31 RINGER 32 No RBT Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 66 5 SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK SOFT SW SELECT 1 32 AND PRESS START EXECUTING 1 NOSIGNAL 2 33 6 V34 3 31 2 V34 4 28 8 V34 5 26 4 V34 6 24 0 V34 7 21 6 V34 8 19 2 V34 9 16 8 V34 10 14 4 V34 11 12 0 V34 12 9 6 V34 13 7 2 V34 14 4 8 V34 15 2 4 V34 16 14 4 V33 17 12 0 V33 18 14 4 V17 19 12 0 V17 20 9 6 V17 21 7 2 V17 22 9 6 V29 23 7 2 V29 244 8 V27t 25 2 4 V27t 26 0 3 FLG 27 CED 2100 28 CNG 1100 29 0 3 V21 30 ANSam 31 RINGER 32 No RBT Select 2 and press START key SIMULATION 66 5 SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK SOFT SW SELECT 1 32 AND PRESS START EXECUTING 1 NOSIGNAL 2 33 6 V34 3 31 2 V34 4 28 8 V34 5 26 4 V34 6 24 0 V34 7 21 6 V34 8 19 2 V34 9 16 8 V34 10 14 4 V34 11 12 0 V34 12 9 6 V34 13 7 2 V34 14 4 8 V34 15 2 4 V34 16 14 4 V33 17 12 0 V33 18 14 4 V17 19 12 0 V17 20 9 6 V17 21 7 2 V17 22 9 6 V29 23 7 2 V29 24 4 8 V27t 25 2 4 V27t 26 0 3 FLG 27 CED 2100 28 CNG 1100 29 0 3 V21 30 ANSam 31 RINGER 32 No RBT Press CUSTOM SETTING
77. Scanner super fine mode individual The current set value is highlighted on the 2 Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad The set value is changed only and printing is not performed SIMULATION 46 25 EXP LEVEL SETUP SCANNER ULTRA FINE SELECT 0 5 AND PRESS START 0 AUTO 50 1 LIGHT E 2DARK BJ 3 AUTO H Bj 4 LIGHT H E 5 DARK H El W Select 0 5 and press START key Press START key or CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 46 25 EXP LEVEL SETUP SCANNER ULTRA FINE INPUT VALUE 0 99 AND PRESS START 0 AUTO Set value O Auto Bright Dark Auto half tone Bright Half tone O AR w Po Dark Half tone AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 46 List of set values 1 Main code 48 0 Paper feed tray selection 1 Copy start Default 48 1 2 Print magnification ratio E 3 Main scan magnification ratio CCD Purpose Adjustment T EET 4 Sub scan magnification ratio CCD Function Content Used to adjust the copy magnification ratio 5 SPF surface magnification ratio sub scan main scan direction sub scan direction 6 SPF back magnification ratio CIS main scan Section Scanner reading Item Picture quality List of display values 1 Operation Procedure Perform the magnification ratio correction Normal display NOW C
78. Toner control sensor trouble Detail Punch motor operation abnormality The toner cartridge seal is not removed Cause Motor lock Check and Check connection of the connector in the Motor rpm abnormality remedy toner motor section Overcurrent to the motor Check connection of connector and harness Console finisher control PWB trouble to the main PWB Check and Use DIAG SIM3 3 to check the motor Check for disconnection of harness remedy operation Toner control sensor output check DIAG 35 Content Console finisher AR FN7 SIM25 1 punch AR PN1 side registration sensor Remove the toner cartridge seal trouble 04 Content Improper cartridge life cycle error etc Detail Sensor input value abnormality Detail An improper process cartridge is inserted Cause Sensor breakage Cause IC chip trouble Harness disconnection Improper cartridge Console finisher control PWB trouble Check and Insert a proper cartridge Check and Use DIAG SIM3 2 to check the sensor remedy remedy operation 05 Content CRUM error 36 Content Console finisher AR FN7 Detail Communication with IC chip cannot be punch AR PN1 timing sensor trouble made Detail Sensor input value abnormality Cause IC chip trouble Cause Sensor breakage Improper cartridge Harness disconnection Check and Insert a proper cartridge Console finisher control PWB trouble remedy Check and Use DIAG SIM3 2 to check the sensor 39 Content Process thermistor trouble remedy operation Detail
79. adjustment with SIM 48 1 Refer to the adjustment described below q Scanner interface PWB 1 Remove the table glass 2 Remove the PWB cover and the harness cover 3 Remove the scanner interface PWB MZA TAR lt o 3 D SPF unit a Upper transport unit 1 Remove the upper transport unit cover 2 Remove the upper transport unit AR M350 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY MAINTENANCE 7 8 e Original length sensor b Stopper solenoid 1 2 Remove the OC cover 1 Remove the upper transport unit cover Remove the stopper solenoid c Sensors 2 Remove the upper transport unit cover Remove the sensors 1 2 Remove the original length sensor cover and remove the sensor d D SPF control PWB SPF control PWB Remove the SPF PWB and remove the D 1 f Original width detection volume 1 Remove the OC cover Remove the original length sensor cover 2 Remove the volume cover and remove the volume 3 AR M350 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY MAINTENANCE 7 9 Original width detection volume installation 3 Remove the original paper feed unit lt 1 gt Extend the original guide to the maximum position lt 2 gt Adjust so that the mark on the width detection pinion gear is fitted with the mark on the volume mounting plate
80. adjustment value of SPF width detection Adjustment setup SPF ADF RADF UDH Operation operation data output check display print 60 1 Used to check the ICU DRAM operation read write Operation test check Image process ICU Operation SIMM memory Onboard memory 61 1 Used to check the operations of the LSU unit Operation test check Operation 2 Used to adjust laser power absolute value in the copy mode Adjustment Operation 3 Used to adjust laser power Adjustment Operation absolute value in the FAX reception mode Only when FAX is installed 4 Used to adjust laser power Adjustment Operation absolute value in the printer mode 62 2 Used to check the hard disk operation read write Operation test check Memory Operation Only for the model with the hard disk Partial check 3 Used to check the hard disk operation read write Operation test check Memory Operation Only for the model with the hard disk All area check 63 1 Used to check the shading correction result Adjustment setup Scanner exposure Operation The shading correction data are displayed operation data output check display print 2 Used to execute shading Adjustment setup Scanner exposure Operation operation data output check display print 7 Used to adjust the white plate scan start position in shading Adjustment Scanner exposure Operation white correction 64 1 Used to check the operations of the printer section Operation
81. card lt 1 gt Remove the screws that fix the cover and remove the cover lt 2 gt Insert the connector of the print server card to the connector of the MFP control PWB unit lt 3 gt Fix the print server card using the removed screws Installation of HDD expansion PWB lt 1 gt Remove the three screws shown in the illustration among the screws that fix the MFP control PWB unit 2 Mount the three PWB fixing screws to the positions from which three screws have been removed 3 Insert the HDD expansion PWB to the connector of the MFP control PWB lt 4 gt Fix the HDD expansion PWB to the PWB fixing screws using the three screws that have been removed AR M350 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6 9 5 Attach the MFP control PWB Attach the MFP control PWB unit to the main unit of the printer and fix it using five screws 6 Connect the cables to the MFP control PWB Connect all the cables that have been removed in step 2 to the connectors of the MFP control PWB unit Cable for scanner LAN cable Centronics cable If another peripheral device must be installed carry out the following step at the end of the installation work 7 Turn on the main switch of the main unit of the printer Insert the power plug of the main unit of the printer to the outlet Then turn the main switch located on the front side of the main unit to the ON position ON V 8 Check the operation lt 1 gt
82. gt gt gt gt XXOXX b OP mx XXOXX b OP mx XX OXX b obbIx XX OXX gt Om x Fusing section Upper heat roller Lower heat roller Upper separation pawl Lower separation pawl Thermistor Upper heat roller gear Paper guides O Gears Cleaning roller CL roller collar Filters Ozone filter Paper feed section Paper feed roller Torque limiter Transport section PS follower roller Paper exit reverse section Transport rollers Clean and remove paper dust X X OX o b boo X X OX x boo XX OX ob b oo X X OX obhb oo X X OX x boo X X OX obhb oo Note 1 Note 1 O O O O OJ OJIOXO Transport paper guides Paper dust remover Drive section Specified position Belts Image quality Xx x x x x x Other Sensors x x F lt MP O00XX P DP mt Oh xX gt gt gt gt FOOIOXxXbhbbb tobxb bb x X OOO X O0O 0XXx Dp X OOO xX OOO X OOO x x x x X xX PR O O O X xk gt x Note 1 Replacement reference Use the counter value of each paper feed port as the replacement reference Paper feed roller Torque limiter section 80K or 2 years AR M350 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY MAINTENANCE 7 2 C Peripheral devices Maintenance cycle 50K X Check Clean
83. has forgotten the key operator code operation data output check display 8 Used to check the number of use of the staple DSPF and Adjustment setup Counter scanner reading unit operation data output check display 9 Used to check the number of use print quantity of each paper Adjustment setup Paper feed Counter feed section operation data output check display 10 Used to check the system configuration Adjustment setup Spec Option option internal hardware operation data output check display AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 2 Code Main Sub Function Content Purpose Section Item 22 11 Used to check the use frequency of FAX send receive Adjustment setup FAX Data Only when FAX is installed operation data output check display 12 Used to check the misfeed position and the number of misfeed Adjustment setup DSPF Trouble Misfeed at that position If the number of misfeed is considerably great operation data output the machine must be repaired check display 13 Used to display the process cartridge data Adjustment setup Counter operation data output check display 19 Used to display the scanner mode counter Adjustment setup Counter operation data output check display 24 1 Used to clear the misfeed counter misfeed history trouble Data clear Counter counter and trouble his
84. hg e ATIS GND2 iter 2 z e su FW 1 Le EE s E S y z I mr II ar a g Jan o Sp ELP 03V ELR 03V 2 2 g sw ES M M 2 NC 2 WH S 5g 3 N2 3 2 2 Sz YL GR Sir z 2a i i CIS Te IcN2 a 4 200V wo Zi 1j Isls Z ic m 7 AJA E E I zzz 9 S a VLP 04V VLR 04V MFP Elsass H BO3P VH WH WH 200v 11 N 11 VH 4Pin ek pri plk only OUTLET AC DC 3 FN 3 FILTER PWB Pins are soldered BK BK q 4A FL la 8 PWB VH 3Pin m VLP 02 VLR 02 EL CN Z lo IG ps WH FTN HE 305 6 e E 100V 2 L 2 NI E INLET EISE ELP 03V ELF m E 1112 D E FUSE PWB 100V 200V 2 NC 2 n h N ELP 02V 250 BL sK FEIRON OPTION DCPS 3L N2 3 L1 zz L FG FG aa E GE wii SE i 200V JE Gel SIN 41T O9R RWZV K2GGP4 CZHR 04V k 24S BK MFP only 8 4 Rih1 Rint m K L 25081 BK B 3 GND2 EW 250 YL 200V REACTOR Rth2 e ty Xl Pour NC INLET WH 4250 8D gc WH N Lout ELP 02V ELR 02VF to DESK 187 250 YL 1 DHL 14 WH q L L h Nout 2 DAN 2 or HES H 2 HL2 HLZ THe SIN 21T 1 8 BK to MULTICS 3 1 L DH L 4 F GND F GND 187 SIN 21T 1 8 WH yyy UN NL DH N FAX VLR 06V VLP 06V 1 PAX p BK L B 1 LFin 1 BK POWER WH FAX YLIGR YLIGR N N 2 FG 2 SW DCPS BK BK 3 LFout 3 Wit NFin 4 WH N YUGR 5 eG E YLIGR WH WH BK 6 NFout 6 L L DCPR N WH AR M350 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 8
85. is displayed in procedures 1 4 1 Max width Max repeat the adjustment again 2 Adjustment point 1 P1 This adjustment is performed only when the width detection volume 3 Adjustment point 2 P2 is replaced 4 Min width Min Normally use SIM 40 7 for input SIMULATION 40 2 40 1 1 BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT SELECT 1 4 AND PRESS START 1 MAX POSITION Purpose Operation test check 2 POSITION 1 3 POSITION 2 Function Content Used to check the width detection level of the 4 MIN POSITION multi purpose tray paper width detector When 1 celica A A A Section Paper feed press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key z z Item Operation z Operation Procedure The multi purpose tray MPT sensors are SIMULATION 40 2 EMI checked The sensor name is highlighted when it BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT is highlighted MAX POSITION COMPLETE or ERROR SIMULATION 40 11 MULTI PURPOSE TRAY SENSOR CHECK 2 is selected START key Press CUSTOM SETTING ke SIMULATION 40 2 BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT POSITION 1 COMPLETE or ERROR Zum NES MCSS2 MCSS3 MCSS4 Multi Purpose Tray width size Ve List of display values MCSS1 Multi purpose tray size detection 1 RUNE E MCSS2 Multi purpose tray size detection 2 press ISTART key Press UTN MCSS3 Multi purpose tray siz
86. mode CA etc Function Content Section Paper transport Paper exit switchback transport Item Operation Procedure Count up setting of white paper exit mode is made Press START key to save Default O for Japan and Australia 1 for the others The following counters are not counted up Copies counter Total counter Printer counter Effective paper counter Department control counter SIMULATION 26 52 BLANK PAPER COUNT UP SETTING SELECT 0 1 AND PRESS START 0 NO NO COUNT UP 1 YES COUNT UP List of set values O Count up is not made 1 Count up is made SIMULATION 27 5 TAG st SETTING INPUT VALUE AND PRESS START PRESENT 00010000 NEW 00009999 AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 30 Main code 30 Main code 40 30 1 40 1 OLD i ae SS aaa a SS Purpose Operation test check Purpose Operation test check Function Content Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed paper transport and paper exit sections and their control circuits Section Item Operation Function Content Used to check the operations of the manual paper feed tray paper size detectors and their control circuit The operations of the manual paper feed tray paper size detectors can be monitored on the LCD display Operation Procedure Then sensors of the machine are checked The sensor name is highlighted wh
87. of troubles When discharging to the left side of machine AINPDN ADU paper entry sensor not reaching jam AINPDS ADU paper entry sensor remaining jam APODN ADU paper exit sensor not reaching jam APODS ADU paper exit sensor remaining jam APPD1N ADU transport sensor 1 not reaching jam APPD1S ADU transport sensor 1 remaining jam APPD2N ADU transport sensor 2 not reaching jam When ADU transport APPD2S ADU transport sensor 2 remaining jam When ADU transport AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 20 Code Description BPT Manual feed tray paper feed jam APPD2 not reaching 22 4 APPD25M ADU transport sensor 2 remaining jam Purpose Adjustment setup operation data output check Manual feed tray feed paper display DESK2 Desk tray 2 paper feed jam DPFD3 not reaching Function Content Used to check the total trouble self diag history DPFD3SD2 DPFD3 remaining jam Desk tray 2 feed paper Section DESK1 Desk tray 1 paper feed jam DPFD2 not reaching Item Trouble DPFD2ND2 DPFD2 not reaching jam Desk tray 2 feed paper Operation Procedure The history of the latest 30 troubles is displayed DPFD2SD1 DPFD2 remaining jam Desk tray 1 feed paper DPFD2SD2 DPFD2 remai
88. original mode Max 140 pages B W reverse Shading Mirror image Repeat Date stamp Stamp Page stamp Zaurus print X X X X X X gt lt gt lt 2 O O O gt lt X x Ol O O O Standard Function X Not provided 3 B W Scanner Module DSPF 1 Form Operation panel integral type Scanner Document glass DSPF standard common hardware for all the destinations 2 Destination judgment will accordingly be changed When connected with a base engine the type Japan domestic 100V overseas 100V or overseas 200V systems is detected and the settings 3 Resolution Gradation Reading Copy mode resolution Magnification 25 99 100 101 200 201 400 dpi OC 600x600 600x600 600x600 600x600 OC 600x600 600x300 600x600 600x600 High speed DSPF 600x300 600x300 600x600 SPF standard DSPF SPF 600x600 600x600 600x600 high quality Input and FAX transmit mode transmitting Selection mode Standard Fine Super fine Ultra fine resolution Input 600x391 2 600x391 2 600x391 2 600x391 2 dpi resolution OC Input 600x300 600x300 600x300 600x300 resolution DSPF Transmitting 2032978 2032x1956 203 2x391 406 4x391 resolution Scanner mode Selection mode Standard Fine Super fine Ultra fine Input 600x391 2 6
89. press START key The jogger moves to LT position Inch series or A4 position AB series according to the entered value and stops there SIMULATION 3 6 FINISHER JOGGER ADJUSTMENT INPUT VALUE 40 60 AND PRESS START A CH Press START key to get started Press CUSTOM SETTING key to stop Stops when the operation is terminated SIMULATION 3 6 FINISHER JOGGER ADJUSTMENT MOVING A Stored on PCU PWB 3 10 Finisher Console finisher P AGIS i urpose justmen 1 T2S Tray2 Se 1 FFC Folding BER Function Content Used to adjust the console finisher AR FN7 2 T2OM Paper exit motor 2 FPSM Puncher side register Section Finisher motor Item Operation 3 SPS Stopper solenoid 3 FPNM Punch motor Operation Procedure Setting of the console finisher is performed 4 SCRS Roller pressure 4 FLM Shift motor release solenoid SIMULATION 3 10 CONSOLE FINISHER SETTING SELECT 1 10 AND PRESS START 5 PPS Rear edge h folding 5 FFSM Stapler motor 1 SADDLE POSITION 2 FOLDING POSITION solenoid 3 FRONT ADJUST 6 SCGS Compiler gate 6 FSM Slide motor SE SON E EM solenoid 8 STAPLE PITCH 9 PUNCH CENTER 7 STTM Staple rotation motor 7 FRJM Alignment motor R 10 PUNCH HOLE 8 STUM Stapler shift motor 8 FFJM Alignment motor F 9 MM
90. quality process mode 20 Used to adjust the copy density correction in the SPF DSPF Adjustment Picture Density copy mode for the document table copy mode This adjustment quality is made so that the copy density becomes the same as that in the document table copy mode 21 Used to adjust the scanner exposure level Adjustment setup Scanner reading Picture Density 1 mode auto adjustment operation data output quality check display 22 Used to adjust the scanner exposure level and to make Adjustment setup Scanner reading Picture Density individual setup Normal mode operation data output quality check display 23 Used to adjust the scanner exposure level and to make Adjustment setup Scanner reading Picture Density individual setup Small text mode operation data output quality check display 24 Used to adjust the scanner exposure level and to make Adjustment setup Scanner reading Picture Density individual setup Fine mode operation data output quality check display 25 Used to adjust the scanner exposure level and to make Adjustment setup Scanner reading Picture Density individual setup Super fine mode operation data output quality check display 48 1 Used to adjust the copy magnification ratio Adjustment Scanner reading Picture main scan direction sub scan direction quality 5 Used to adjust the scan motor speed Adjustment Scanner reading Picture quality AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 5
91. roller SPF O O O O O O O O O Other Sensors O O O O For cleaning blow air Finish stamp section Stamp solenoid A Option Stamp individual part User replacement Japan only x X XXX X X xX X fat 10K ort year Note 2 Replacement reference Same as above or 2 years AR M350 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY MAINTENANCE 7 1 B Engine section For disassembly procedures refer to the AR P350 P450 Service Manual Maintenance cycle 50K X Check Clean replace or adjust as necessary O Clean A Replace A Adjust x Lubricate Move position Unit name Part name a 50K 100K 150K 200K 250K 300K 350K 400K Remark Drum peripheral Drum Cleaner blade Toner reception seal Side molt Transfer roller x Discharge plate x TR bearing F R Transfer roller collar After transfer star ring TR gear x Screen grid O x Drum separation pawl UN Charger case M C Charging plate saw teeth Developing section Developer DV blade DSD oollar DV side seal F DV side seal R Toner cartridge Attached when installing EX Japan 814g user replacement for every 27K Installed when shipping XxX xP gt gt aD al gt gt Xxbh bbb Xxbhbbb Supplied when installing PPO Pm bobRbxXxxx bbbb bhobPbbobkbbxxxbhbbbbb gt i OP mh bobkRbxxxx bbbbb gt i Oli gt i gt Oli gt i gt ixX gt gt gt gt
92. set values Only once If same as the previous one it is not stored Any times Though same as the previous one it is stored AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 29 Purpose Setup 27 1 Function Content Used to stop printing when developer life is oa expired Purpose Setup Section Other Function Content Used to set the operation specifications when a Item Operation communication trouble occurs between the host Operation Procedure Print enable disable is set when the developer computer and MODEM machine side cartridge is expired in a DM machine Default 1 When a communication trouble occurs between This simulation is ignored in the AR model that is the operation is continued SIMULATION 26 38 DEVELOPER LIFE END SETTING SELECT 0 1 AND PRESS START 0 PRINT CONTINUE 1 PRINT STOP List of set values 0 Print continue 1 Print stop 26 41 quic c P dit Purpose Setup Used to set Enable Disable of the magnification ratio auto selection function AMS in the pamphlet copy mode Function Content Section Item Spec Operation Procedure Pamphlet mode AMS setting is enabled or disabled Press START key to save Europe 1 Others 0 SIMULATION 26 41 PAMPHLET MODE AMS SETTING SELECT 0 1 AND PRESS START 0 NO 1 YES
93. test The dial number signal set with this simulation is outputted in the dial signal output test with SIM 66 14 16 Only when FAX is installed Setup Fax Data 14 Used to set the make time in the FAX pulse dial mode 10PPS and to test the dial signal output The dial number signal set with SIM 66 13 is outputted Used to check dialing troubles and the operation Only when FAX is installed Setup Fax Operation AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 7 Code Function Content P i l Main Sub unction urpose Section tem 66 15 Used to set the make time in the FAX pulse dial mode 20PPS Setup Fax Operation and to test the dial signal output The dial number signal set with SIM 66 13 is outputted Used to check dialing troubles and the operation Only when FAX is installed 16 Used to test the dial signal DTMF output in the FAX tone dial Setup Fax Operation mode The dial number signal set with SIM 66 13 is outputted The send level can be set to an optional level Dialing troubles and operation Only when FAX is installed 17 Used to test the dial signal DTMF output in the Fax tone dial Setup Fax Operation mode Send level Odb Max Used to check the operation Only when FAX is installed 18 Used to test the dial signal DTMF in the FAX tone dial mode Setup Fax Operation The send level set w
94. test check Printer Operation self printing The print pattern paper feed mode print mode print quantity density can be changed optionally 65 1 Used to adjust the touch panel LCD display section detecting Adjustment Operation position display operation 2 Used to check the result of the touch panel Adjustment setup Operation LCD display section detecting position adjustment operation data output display operation The coordinates are displayed check display print AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 6 Code Main Sub Function Content Purpose Section Item 66 1 Used to set the FAX soft switch function Used to utilize the FAX soft switch function Setup Fax Used to set the FAX soft switch setup to the default Except for the adjustment values Data clear Fax Data Used to check the operations of FAX PWB memory read write This adjustment is required when replacing the PWB with a new one Operation test check Fax Data Used to check the operations of data signal output in the FAX data output mode Used to check the MODEM operation Send level 0dB Max Only when FAX is installed Operation test check Fax Operation Used to check the operations of data signal output in the FAX data output mode Used to check the MODEM operation Signals are sent in the send level set with the soft switch Only when FAX is installed
95. the operations of the main drive section Operation test check Drive Operation excluding the scanner reading section and the toner density sensor The toner density sensor output can be monitored 2 Used to initialize the toner density when replacing developer Setup Process OPC drum Auto adjustment developing transfer cleaning 26 3 Used to set the specification mode of the auditor Setup must Setup Auditor Spec be made according to the use condition of the auditor 5 Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the Setup Spec Counter maintenance counter 6 Used to set the specification according to the destination Setup Spec Destination 10 Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner Setup Operation 18 Used to set Enable Disable of toner save operation Setup Spec Operation This simulation is enabled only in Japan and UK versions mode Depends on SIM 26 6 Destination setup Common For the other destinations user program P22 allows to make operation the similar setup 30 Used to set the operation mode conforming to the CE mark Setup Spec Operation Europe standards mode For flickers when driving the fusing heater lamp Common operation 35 Used to set whether the trouble history of SIM 22 4 is displayed Setup Spec as one time trouble or continuous troubles when two or more number of a same trouble occurred 38 Used to stop printing when developer life is expired Setup Other Operation
96. trouble 17 0 Used to cancel the self diag PF trouble Cancel Communication Trouble Error when copy is inhibited by the host computer incase of a trouble RIC MODEM 21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle Setup Spec Counter 22 1 Used to check the print count in each section and in each Adjustment setup Counter operation mode Used to check the maintenance timing operation data output check display print 2 Used to check the number of total misfeed and troubles Adjustment setup Trouble If the number of misfeed is considerably great the machine operation data output must be repaired The misfeed rate is obtained by dividing this check display count by the total counter value 3 Used to check the misfeed position and the number of misfeed Adjustment setup Trouble Misfeed at that position operation data output If the number of misfeed is considerably great the machine check display must be repaired Sections other than DSPF sections 4 Used to check the total trouble self diag history Adjustment setup Trouble operation data output check display 5 Used to check the ROM version of each unit section Other Software 6 Used to print the list of adjustments and setup data Adjustment setup Data Setup simulations FAX soft switches counters operation data output adjustment check print data 7 Used to display the key operator code Adjustment setup Data User data Used when the customer
97. write error Detail The sample data is at 68 or below when auto Cause EEPROM trouble developer adjustment is performed EEPROM is not initialized Cause Toner concentration sensor trouble Controller PWB EEPROM access circuit Charging voltage developing voltage trouble abnormality Check and Check that EEPROM is properly inserted Insufficient toner concentration remedy Save the counter adjustment values with the Developing unit trouble DIAG simulation PCU PWB trouble Use DIAG SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble Check and Use DIAG SIM25 2 to perform auto Replace the Controller PWB remedy developer adjustment 11 Content Counter check sum error Controller EU Content Auto developer adjustment trouble Detail Counter data area check sum error Under toner Cause EEPROM trouble Detail The sample data is of 168 or above when Control circuit trouble by noise auto developer adjustment is performed Controller PWB EEPROM access circuit Cause Insufficient toner concentration trouble Charging voltage developing voltage Check and Check that EEPROM is properly inserted abnormality remedy Save the counter adjustment values with the Insufficient toner concentration DIAG simulation Developing unit trouble Use DIAG SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble PCU PWB trouble Replace the Controller PWB Checkand Use DIAG SIM25 2 to perform auto 12 Content Adjustment value check sum error remedy developer adjustment Controller F9 02 Content PRT Centro port check e
98. 00 CN2 7 100MQ CHARACTER Text mode 650V 5V 645 200 900 MIX Text Photo 650V 5V 645 200 900 mode PHOTO Photo mode 650V 5V 645 200 900 PRINTER Printer mode 650V 5V 645 200 900 FAX Fax mode 650V 5V 645 200 900 Transfer current THV SIM 8 6 FRONT Front 45PPM 267 0 620 35PPM 220 BACK Back 45PPM 310 0 620 35PPM 267 Developing bias DV BIAS SIM 8 1 AUTO AE mode 500V 5V 485 0 745 CN2 1 100MQ CHARACTER Text mode 500V 5V 485 0 745 MIX Text Photo 500V 5V 485 0 745 mode PHOTO Photo mode 500V 5V 485 0 745 PRINTER Printer mode 500V 5V 485 0 745 FAX Fax mode 500V 5V 485 0 745 PLUS Positive bias 150V 5V 150 0 255 Separation voltage SHV SIM 8 17 FRONT Front 1 25V 0 1V 45PPM 160 0 375 CN2 3 10MQ 35PPM 120 BACK Rear 1 25V 0 1V 45PPM 160 0 375 35PPM 120 Transfer voltage THV SIM 8 17 800V 10V 780 0 1250 CN2 5 10GQ AR M350 ADJUSTMENTS 9 1 2 Engine section A LSU right angle adjustment This adjustment is required in the following cases When the LSU is replaced When a distortion is generated in printer output Check with self print pattern 71 After completion of this adjustment perform the following adjustments Print off center adjustment Void area adjustment 1 2 3 Execute SIM 64 1 Make self print of print pattern 71 and grid pattern from tray 1 Check the self printout Right angle check method gt 1 Make a self print pattern 71 2 Draw a line pe
99. 00x391 2 600x391 2 600x600 resolution OC Input 600x300 600x300 600x300 600x300 resolution DSPF Transmitting 200x200 300x300 400x400 600x600 resolution Reading 256 tones level Exposure Electrodeless xenon lamp lamp Output level Binary 4 Document Glass Reading 297x431 8 mm area 11 717 Original Left edge Rear corner alignment alignment Original size Provided detection Standard size only Sizes to be Automatic one detection unit to be used with software detected modification by destination Inch 1 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 Default at overseas 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 100V base engine Inch 2 11x17 8 5 x13 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 AB 1 Default at Japan A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R domestic 100V A5A3 B4 A4 A4R A5 overseas 200V base engines AB 2 A3 A4R A5 216x330 mm AR M350 SPECIFICATIONS 3 5 6 Power Source OR guide display Rear left side Original reference position gt Print display Left side OR guide From the Interior side Print display 5 1 2 A5E B5E A4E A5 8 5 HB4 B5 11 HA3 A4 Interior side OR guide Print display From the left side 5 1 2 A5 B5 A4 A5E gt 8 1 2 B5E 11 A4E 13 14 B4 A3 17 Book marks are at A4 and 8 1 2 positions Interior side OR guide The position available to attach the staple position guide label when the optional finisher desktop console type is equipped
100. 1 3 AR RK1 Stand MPD amp 2000 sheet O Scanner rack X X Multi purpose drawer O O Stand 3 x 500 sheet paper drawer O O Power supply unit al Scanner rack Related for paper feed unit Multi purpose drawer Stand 3 x 500 sheet paper drawer Stand MPD amp 2000 sheet paper drawer Duplex module bypass tray Duplex module Output units Saddle stitch finisher Finisher A Mail bin stacker Exit tray 4 Upper exit tray extension Punch unit Related for extension of functions and others PS3 expansion kit Network scanner expansion kit Facsimile expansion kit Fax memory 8 MB Power supply unit AR DC1 Hard disk drive AR HD3 Multi function controller AR M11 board 3 Print server card AR NC5J O Must be installed together O Any of the units must be installed together O Must be installed for installation of the stand 3 x 500 sheet paper drawer or the stand MPD amp 2000 sheet paper drawer Xx Cannot be installed together 3 Standard 4 AR DU4 Standard AR M350 CONFIGURATION 2 2 3 SPECIFICATIONS in mm Ste Paper size A B C D E 1 Basic Specification A8 297 420 7 289 7 A Base Engine AR M350 M450 ps BOT eT
101. 1 PRINT START EN E Select 1 and press START key If there is no data to print return without printing SIMULATION 66 6 PASS CODE PRINT OUT EXECUTING 1 PRINT START After completion of printing Set value 1 Print start AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 63 66 7 Purpose User data output check display print Function Content Used to print the image memory data memory send receive Only when FAX is installed Section Fax Item Data Operation Procedure The content of image memory is printed The paper size is automatically selected with the paper size stored in the image memory SIMULATION 66 7 1 PRINT START IMAGE MEMORY PRINT OUT PRESS START Selec E 1 and press START key When 1 is selected SIMULATION 66 7 1 PRINT START IMAGE MEMORY PRINT OUT EXECUTING I After completion of printing Set value 1 Print start 66 8 Purpose Operation test check Function Content Used to check the output operation of the FAX sound signals Sound output IC operation check Send level 0dB Max Only when FAX is installed Section FAX Item Operation Operation Procedure A voice message is outputted Level 0 Enter a number during execution to change the signal Press START to start sending a voice message Pre
102. 1 REGISTERED Various registered information 2 MANAGEMENT Communication management information 3 FILE Fine management information MANAGEMENT 4 SYSTEM ERROR System error information 5 PROTOCOL Protocol information 66 22 Purpose Setup Function Content Used to adjust the handset sound volume Only when FAX is installed Section Fax Item Operation Operation Procedure The hand set sound volume is set 1 Press START to set 2 During execution selection of 1 2 and 3 is possible y SIMULATION 66 22 HANDSET VOLUME SETTING SELECT 1 3 AND PRESS START 1 MIN E Press START key 2 MIDDLE Press CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 66 22 3 MAX HANDSET VOLUME SETTING SELECT 1 3 AND PRESS START EXECUTING 1 MIN 2 MIDDLE 3 MAX Same di HL m x E Select 3 and press START key SIMULATION 66 22 HANDSET VOLUME SETTING SELECT 1 3 AND PRESS START EXECUTING a 1 MIN Press CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 66 22 2 MIDDLE 3 MAX HANDSET VOLUME SETTING SELECT 1 3 AND PRESS START 1 MIN 2 MIDDLE 3 MAX List of set values Min Middle Max AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 69 66 23 66 25 Purpose Operation test check Purpose Setup Function Content Used to download the FAX program Only when FAX is installed Function Content
103. 10 digit key pad The current set value is highlighted at the right of each item After entering the value with 10 digit key pad press START key The output is made for 30sec at the set value Then the output is stopped SIMULATION 8 6 THV SETTING SELECT 1 2 AND PRESS START 1 FRONT Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 8 6 1 FRONT 0 620 THV SETTING INPUT VALUE AND PRESS START Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key Or after 30sec output SIMULATION 8 6 THV SETTING EXECUTING 1 FRONT List of set values Default Set range 1 Cassette manual paper feed 45PPM 267 0 620 35PPM 220 2 Paper feed from ADU 45PPM 310 35PPM 267 8 17 Purpose Operation test check Function Content Used to set and check the transfer roller output Section Process OPC drum developing transfer cleaning Item Operation Operation Procedure Enter the output value to be adjusted with 10 digit key pad The current set value is highlighted at the right of each item After entering the value with 10 digit key pad press START key The output is made for 30sec at the set value Then the output is stopped SIMULATION 8 17 1 SHV FRONT 2 SHV BACK 3 THV TRANSFER ROLLER SETTING SELECT 1 3 AND PRESS START Press
104. 12V SD0 14 15 SD0 GND2 Gier 122 GND2 AGND DGND 1 14 DGND 5V Gen 23 5V SD1 1 13 SD1 GND2 Gier 124 GND2 AGND DGND 12 12 DGND 35V D5 rg 28 5V SD2 11 411 SD2 ICISSET 2 26 CISSET DGND 10 10 DGND NC 27 SD3 9 9 SD3 NC 28 DGND 8 8 DGND SD4 7 7 SD4 DGND 6 6 DGND SD5 5 5 SD5 DGND 4 4 DGND SD6 3 3 SD6 DGND 2 2 DGND SD7 1 1 SD7 O GY O SY SY O FG SRA 21T 4 SRA 21T 4 9 SYO re SRA 21T 4 AR M350 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 5 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM MFP 3 3 CN4 20FLS SM1 TB GND2 20 1 GND2 Vss NC 19 412 NC NC 18 43 NC NC 17 4 NC NC 18 5 NC GND2 Vss 15 6 GND2 Vss LCD D3 1 7 LCD D3 LCD D2 13 8 LCD D2 LCD D1 1 9 LCD D1 LCD LCD DO 11 10 LCD DO GND2 Vss _ 1d 3411 GND2 Vss LCD VEE 9 12 LCD VEE LCD VCC 8 13 LCD VCC lcd DIS 7 14 lcd DIS GND2 Vss 6 15 GND2 Vss CP2 5 16 CP2 GND2 Vss 4 17 GND2 Vss CP1 3 18 CP1 LCDM 2 19 LCDM LCDS 1 20 LCD S LVDS PWB CN5 FFC 4PIN 04FM 1 0S
105. 16 to cancel U2 trouble Replace the Controller PWB U7 00 Content RIC communication trouble Detail RIC communication trouble Communication cable test error after turning on the power or exiting DIAG Cause Disconnection of connector and harness RTC control PWB trouble Control PWB Controller trouble Noise or interference Check and Canceled by turning OFF ON the power remedy Check connector and harness in the communication line PF 00 Content RIC copy inhibit signal is received Detail Copy inhibit command from RIM host is received Cause Judged by the host Check and Inform to the host remedy 3 Network communication error Error code table Error code Content of error CE 01 The print server card AR NC5J is broken down or is not installed CE 02 The specified mail server or FTP server is not found CE 03 Communication with the specified server is interrupted during image transmission CE 04 The account name or the password for the FTP server is invalid CE 05 The directory of the FTP server is invalid CE 00 A communication error other than the above is generated such as NIC cable disconnection AR M350 TROUBLE CODES 11 10 4 Fatal Non Fatal Error Tables A Troubles where the machine can be operated depending on the conditions Include Multi Function
106. 2 SIMULATION 46 13 p Ee FAX A SET SELECT 0 2 AND PRESS START HET EE Pal 0 5 AND PRESS START 1 ARES Je auto ER 4 LIGHT 5 DARK EJ Select other than O 1 Select other than 0 2 A A and press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key E and press START Kent Press CUSTOM SETTING key E SIMULATION 46 12 SIMULATION 46 13 EXP LEVEL SETUP FAX AUTO SET INPUT VALUE 0 99 AND PRESS EXP LEVEL SETUP FAX NORMAL INPUT VALUE 0 99 AND PRESS START START SC SE 2 FAX EXP LEVEL 50 Select 1 and I prece BR k Pi zs k press SES E OVI Press CUSTOM SETTING Key Tom 9 5 Press CUSTOM SETTING Key Or copying is terminated Or copying is terminated Pying i l SIMULATION 46 13 SIMULATION 46 12 EXP LEVEL SETUP FAX NORMAL NOW COPYING EXP LEVEL SETUP FAX AUTO SET NOW COPYING E Select a Press START key or Select 0 and Press START Keylor E press WS press CUSTOME SETTING key press START key press CUSTOME SETTING key z z SIMULATION 46 13 SIMULATION 46 12 ioe FAX NORMAL SELECT 1 5 AND PRESS START EXP LEVEL SETUP FAX AUTO SET SELECT 1 5 AND PRESS START Do ea ee FEED TRAY S BET 1 TRAY1 2 TRAY2 3 TRAY3 4 TRAY4 5 BPT z Select 2 and Press START keyjor E List of set values 1 press START key press CUSTOME SETTING Key
107. 28 50 List of display values OCSW Original cover state Open Normal display Close Highlighted PD1 7 PD sensor detection level Figures in indicate the adjustment threshold values 41 2 adjustment value The current set value is highlighted on the right of each item Select an item 1 6 and enter a set value with 10 digit key pad Press START key to store the value SIMULATION 43 1 FUSER TEMPERATURE SET SELECT 1 6 AND PRESS START 1 INSIDE NORMAL ETE 5 INSIDE MPT 2 OUTSIDE NORMALER 6 OUTSIDE MPT 3 INSIDE PREHEAT El 4 OUTSIDE PREHEAT El Press CUSTOM SETTING key Press START key SIMULATION 43 1 FUSER TEMPERATURE SET INPUT VALUE AND PRESS START 1 INSIDE NORMAL Enter the value with 10 key lt List of display values gt Default Set range 1 Heater inside Normal 190 165 210 2 Heater outside Normal 190 165 210 3 Heater inside Pre heat 150 100 160 4 Heater outside Pre heat 150 100 160 5 Heater inside Manual paper feed 190 165 210 used 6 Heater outside Manual paper feed 190 165 210 used AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 34 Main code 44 44 1 WEE Purpose Setup Used to set Enable Disable of each correction operation in the image forming process Function Content section Section Process OPC drum developing
108. 3 or WLT paper on the table glass and check that all the sensor displays except for OCSW on the LCD are highlighted 3 Gradually move the unit to the left and check that the highlighted sensor displays turn off one by one sequentially SIMULATION 41 1 PD SENSOR CHECK OCSW Sec PD5 PD6 PD7 The detected sensors are highlighted AR M350 ADJUSTMENTS 9 5 Orignal size detection photo sensor adjustment Execute SIM 41 2 At that time check that the scanner mirror base is at the home position Open the document cover Select 1 without placing paper on the table glass and press START When COMPLETE is displayed on the LCD press CUSTOM SETTING to return to the initial screen Place A3 or WLT paper on the table glass select 2 and press START When COMPLETE completed If ERROR is displayed the error PD sensor is displayed SIMULATION 41 2 PD SENSOR ADJUSTMENT SELECT1 2 AND PRESS START PLEASE OPEN THE ORIGINAL COVER EA SIMULATION 41 2 1 NO ORIGINAL Press CUSTOM SETTING key PD SENSOR ADJUSTMENT 2 A3 ORIGINAL NO ORIGINAL COMPLETE or ERROR atfziPMiPP A3 ORIGINAL INCOMPLETE is displayed the adjustment is normally Select 1 and press START key elect 1 and press START key In case of an error n com Press CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 41 2 PD SENSOR ADJUSTMENT NO ORIGINAL COMPLETE A3 ORIGI
109. 30 HS1 HS2 TEL LIU SENSOR CHECK EXHS lt List of set values gt HS1 Polarity reverse signal HS2 Polarity reverse signal RHS Handset hook SW EXHS External telephone hook SW 66 31 Item Operation Purpose Setup Operation Procedure 1 Select with 10 digit key pad and press START to execute the following Function Content Used to set the TEL LIU status Only when FAX is installed 1 Telephone directory clear Section Fax 2 Telephone directory not clear Item Operation Operation Procedure Entry of only 0 or 1 is effective SIMULATION 66 29 ADDRESS DATA CLEAR ARE YOU SURE 1 YES 2 NO Shift the cursor to the bit to enter Cursor shift keys gt The bits are 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 and 8 from the left The entered bit is highlighted Press STHT to select the relay SIMULATION 66 31 TEL LIU SETTING INPUT O 1 AND PRESS START MOVEMENT LEFT RIGHT 4 12345678 1 2 CION 3 MR 4 EC 1 0 5 emm 7 DP 8 66 32 Purpose Setup Function Content Used to check the received data Only when FAX is installed Section FAX Item Operation Operation Procedure The fixed data received from the line are checked This mode is for development and inhibited in the market SIMULATION 66 32 RECEIVED DATA CH CHECKING OK or NG
110. 5 4 MULTI amp MobDE P 7 Duplex 1 Single print 6 LEVEL i 7 DUPLEX 2 Duplex print lt Print pattern gt Select 1 and Press CUSTOM SETTING key press START key or START key 50 Total surface 1BY1 Vertical 70 Scaled print adjustment pattern SIMULATION 64 1 Vertical SELF PRINT MODE INPUT VALUE AND PRESS START 51 Total surface 1BY1 71 Grid pattern PRINT PATTERN Horizontal INPUT 50 99 52 Total surface 1BY2 Vertical 72 Slant line 45 degrees 53 Total surface 1BY2 73 Slant line 26 6 degrees SIMULATION 64 1 Horizontal DENS ON ANO PRESS START 54 Total surface 1BY3 Vertical 74 Slant line 63 4 degrees 1 255 55 Total surface 1BY3 75 ID BG pattern Horizontal SIMULATION 64 1 56 Total surface 1BY4 Vertical 76 Dot pattern 12 5 perpe INPUT VALUE AND PRESS START 57 Total surface 1BY4 77 Dot pattern 28 A m Horizontal IT 58 Total surface 1BY5 Vertical 78 Dot pattern 50 SIMULATION 64 1 59 Total surface 1BY5 79 Whole surface error diffusion SELF PRINT MODE SELECT 1 8 AND PRESS START Horizontal background T NIRE AQ 60 Total surface 2BY2 Vertical 70 Whole surface dither process 5 SMOOTHING TONER SAVE 6 SMOOTHING HALF TONE 51 Halal surface 2BV2 8i background xs 7 TONER SAVE HALF TONE otal surface oc ixels 8 SMOOTHING TONER S
111. 50 SIMULATIONS 10 50 List of set values 1 50 7 Defauult Set range pe Oo wur n Purpose Adjustment O TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray selection 175 Function Content Copy lead edge adjustment Simple method 1 COPY START Copy start Initial value DSPF 2 MAGNIFICATION Print magnification ratio 200 25 200 Section setup 25 400 Item Picture quality 3 L4 Distance from the front lead 0 999 Operation Procedure Perform the SPF copy lead edge adjustment edge of copy image to the Simple method scale of 10mm g 1 The current set value is highlighted on the SPF 200 right of each item In this screen be sure to 4 115 Di stance from the back lead 0 999 select 1 COPY START Set value 1 edge of copy image to the 2 bd the correction value with 10 digit key scale of 10mm Ge P to store the set value SFF 200 3 Press START to start copying and store the 5 io EE Front mee edge image loss 15 0 99 set value Display value 1 set value 4 Select a paper feed tray Set value 2 6 IMAGE LOSS Front side image loss set 20 0 99 5 Set the scan magnificat
112. 7 PF X X X X X X Image memory trouble decode error Controller E7 01 06 X X X X X X X Operation impossible AR M350 TROUBLE CODES 11 11 C Operation mode in FAX send receive operations Operation enable mode Trouble Trouble code Send reservation Print Send call Receive call Note PCU general troubles O X O O Note Possibly causing memory full Paper feed tray trouble F3 U6 O A 1 O O Paper exit section trouble Fi O A3 O O Scanner general troubles X O O O FAX trouble F6 F7 X X X X ICU trouble E7 01 06 80 90 X X X X ICU memory error U2 00 11 12 X X X X RIC external communication trouble PF U7 X X X X Backup battery voltage fall U1 X A2 X Note X Transfer enable Door open O X O O Note Possibly causing memory full Toner empty O X O O Note Possibly causing memory full No process cartridge etc O X O O Note Possibly causing memory full Paper empty O X O O Note Possibly causing memory full Paper jam O X O O Note Possibly causing memory full Document jam X O O O Simulation X X X X Key operation Communication disable X X X X O Operation enable X Operation disable A 1 Enable in other than trouble tray A 2 Go to FAX status check menu and printing of list is allowed Received document is outputted A 3 Paper exit enable to other tray than trouble one D Trouble mode process Machine operat
113. 80R L CIRCUIT DIAGRAM MFP 1 3 a Toy GND2 2 2 GND2 12V 3 3 12V GND2 4 4 GND2 5V 5 5 45V 5V 6 6 5V GND2 7 7 GND2 3 3V 8 8 3 3V A GND2 9 9 GND2 GND2 10 10 GND2 RES CCD i 11RES CCD TXD_CCD1 i 12 TXD_CCD CLK CCDi i 13 CLK CCD FRM CCDi H 14 FRM_CCD A_DBL n 18 1 DBL 1 DATAE f 18 1 DATAT 1 DATA 7 17 1_DATAO 1 CLK 1 481 CLK PDSEL1 19 E PDSEL1 PD 20 20 PD SEGO 21 21 SEGO SEG2 2 22 SEG2 TF1 2 23 F1 TF3 2 24 IF3 TH 2 25 TH ICCFT 2 28 CCFT IcdS 27 27 IcdS IcdM 2 28 IcdM IcdCP1 29 29 IcdCP1 IcdCP2 30 30 IcdCP2 NC 31 31 NC CN101 CNS LCD VEE b 32 LCD VEE SFW30S 2STE1 30FMZ BT Gg 5 Ba Lcdbo GND2 DGND 1 1 GND2 EET 5 Baan 1 CLK 2 2 1 CLK LcdD2 8 35 LcdD2 c 1_CLK 3 3 1_CLK LcdD3 3 36 LcdD3 1_DATAO 4 4 1_DATAO GND 57 37 GND2 1 DATAO 5 5 1_DATAO CR 5 Ba XL GND2 DGND 6 6 GND2 XH 39 Bd XH 1_DATA1 7 7 1 DATA1 SCN ISTMPS el ISTMPS 1 DATA1 8 8 1 DATA1 24V m DESCH 1 DBL 9 9 1 DBL JNT mE NDA Ti DBL 10 1d 1 DBL AN TIN GND2 DGND 11 11 GND2 GNDZ GND FRM CCD1 M 12 FRM CCD1 PWB SCH Seu PAGET 13 13 PAGET au da CLK CCDi i 14 CLK CCD1 GNDZ Gel 7 GND2 op ROC qm Sy 2 E E GND2 lag GND2 RXD_CCD1 Di 17 RXD CCD1 GND2 50 ena GND2 ONE a ICL1 51 51 CL1 GND2 DGND 1 1d GND2 RXD CCDT 5 52 RXD CCD 3 3V 2d 20 3 3V ADD CCDi 5 53 ADD CCD 3 3 21 21 3 34 PAGE1 5 54 PAGET GND2 DGND 2 24 GND2 UDB B SSA DEC 5V 5VD 23 23 5V 1 DATAt 5 58 1 DATAT 5V 5VD
114. A FINE SELECT 3 8 AND PRESS START EXP LEVEL SELECT 3 AUTO 4 LIGHT 6 AUTO H 7 LIGHT H 5 DARK 8 DARK H CCD CIS The current set value is displayed don the right of each item Set value 2 Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad Press START to store the set value Default 128 set range 0 255 SIMULATION 46 17 CCD CIS SHADING GAIN DATA SETUP SELECT 1 3 AND PRESS START 1 CCD ODD 2 3 cis EH CCD EVEN Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 46 17 CCD SHADING GAIN START 1 CCD ODD DATA SETUP INPUT VALUE 0 255 AND PRESS Set values 1 CCD CDD 2 CCDEVEN 3 JCS AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 43 46 18 Purpose Adjustment Function Content Used to adjust gamma density gradient in each copy mode Section Item Picture quality Operation Procedure 1 Change the gamma value The current set value is displayed on the right of each item Set value 2 Set the gamma with 10 digit key pad Press START to store the set value Default 64 set range 0 127 3 The greater the value is the greater the gradient is SIMULATION 46 18 GAMMA SETUP SELECT 1 4 AND PRESS START 1 AE 2 CHARA Rz MIX 4 PHOTO Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 46 18 1 AE GAMMA SETUP INPUT VALUE 0 127 AND PRESS START
115. ATION 2 3 SPF LOAD TEST SE LECT 1 7 AND PRESS START 1 MOTOR H 2 MOTOR L 3 SDSS 4 SPFS 5 SPFC 6 SPSC 7 STMPS Finisher AR FN6 Press START key to get started Press SIMULATION 2 3 SPF LOAD TEST EXECUTING 1 MOTOR H 2 MOTOR L 3 SDSS 4 SPFS 5 SPFC 6 SPSC 7 STMPS SIMULATION 3 2 FINISHER SENSOR CHECK lt List of set values gt Motor high speed rotation Motor low spe ed rotation Document stopper solenoid Document feed solenoid Document feed clutch Document res ist clutch PID SCID SCID2 PPD SCPD POD T1PF T2UP T2DN T2PD STSP STLS STNC STHP JFHP JRHP PSHP STUHP XXXX STTHP1 STTHP2 DOPD DSW1 DSW2 24VM MMLK Console finisher AR FN7 SIMULATION 3 2 FINISHER SENSOR CHECK FSSS FJS FFDSW FTCS FFDS FSPS FSUC FSS FSTHPS FSHPS FLE FLLLS FULS FFE FFES FFRHPS FFHPS FFPS FSLS FBES FOBHPS FAS FRJHPS FFJHPS FARHPS FPHPS FES FPE FPSHPS FPUC FPDS FPDSS4 FPDSS3 FPDSS2 FPDSS1 FPTS Devices in are added when the punch unit is installed NIONA WIN Stamp solenoid lt List of display values gt Finisher Console finisher STHP Stapler HP detection FSSS Stapler safety switch POD Tray 2 paper exit detection FJS Joint switch SCID Staple compiler paper entry FFDSW Front door switch dete
116. AVE HALF TONE Horizontal every 32 i SIMULATION 6471 62 Total surface 2BY3 Vertical 82 1 block 128 pixels SELF PRINT MODE INPUT VALUE AND PRESS START every 16 gradations LEVEL 63 Total surface 2BY3 83 1 block 128 pixels 15 Horizontal every 8 gradations 64 Whole surface background 84 Memory check pattern SIMULATION 64 1 Copy SELF PRINT MODE SELECT 1 5 AND PRESS START 65 Special pattern Vertical 85 Cleaning check pattern FEED TRAY 66 1 block 128 pixels 86 Offset check pattern 1 TRAY1 2Z TRAY2 3 TRAY3 4 TRAY4 5 BPT every 32 gradations SIMULATION 64 1 67 1 block 128 pixels 87 Test B image for aging SELF PRINT MODE SELECT 1 2 AND PRESS START every 16 gradations DUPLEX es 68 1 block 128 pixels 88 Printer 6 every 8 gradations 69 11 do t pattern 89 Printer 5 SIMULATION 64 1 98 List of setup values SELF PRINT MODE EXECUTING O TRAY SELECT 2 PRINT PATTERN 3 DENSITY H 4 MULTI 5 amp MODE P EN 6 LEVEL 7 DUPLEX AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 59 Main code 65 Main code 66 65 1 66 1 Purpose Adjustment Purpose Setup Function Content Used to adjust the touch panel LCD display section detecting position Function Content Used to set the FAX soft switch function Used to utilize the FAX soft switch function Press the four cross marks on the LCD and the pressed mark will turn gray Wh
117. AY4 5 BPT Select 2 and Press START key or E press START key press CUSTOME SETTING key LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT CALC SIMULATION 50 2 MAGNIFICATION INPUT 25 400 100 List of set values 1 Default Set range 0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray selection 1 5 COPY START Copy start Initial value 2 MAGNIFICATION Print magnification ratio 25 400 setup 3 L1 Document scan start 0 999 position adjustment 4 L2 Resist roller clutch ON 0 999 timing adjustment value 5 IMAGE LOSS Rear edge void quantity 15 0 99 LEAD adjustment value 6 IMAGE LOSS Lead edge image loss 20 0 99 SIDE quantity set value 7 DENB Side image loss quantity 35 0 99 set value 8 DENA Lead edge void quantity 35 0 99 set value 9 FR VOIDFR Void quantity adjustment 35 0 99 value List of display values 1 Normal display NOW COPYING ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN Jam JAM Paper empty PAPER EMPTY List of set values 2 gt 1 TRAY1 2 TRAY2 3 TRAY3 4 TRAY4 5 Manual feed List of set values 3 gt Set range 25 40096 AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 49 List of set values 1
118. B No expansion memory MB Expansion memory MB HD OMB Hard disk not installed MB Hard disk installed AR HD3 NIC NIC not installed AR NC5J NIC installed PS3 PS3 expansion kit not installed expansion kit AR PK1 PS3 expansion kit installed FAX FAX expansion kit installed AR FX5 FAX expansion kit not installed Network Network expansion kit not installed scanner AR NS2F Network expansion kit installed Expansion S Expansion memory for FAX not memory installed AR MM9 Expansion memory for FAX 8MB AR MM9 installed Handset handset not installed AR HN5 Handset installed Finish stamp S Finish stamp unit not installed AR SU1 Finish stamp unit installed AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 23 22 11 22 13 Purpose Adjustment setup operation data output check Purpose Adjustment setup operation data output check display display Function Content Used to check the use frequency of FAX Function Content Used to display the process cartridge data send receive Only when FAX is installed Section Section FAX Item Counter Item Data Operation Procedure The counter data below are displayed Operation Procedure The counter data below are displayed SIMULATION 22 13 SIMULATION 22 11 PROCESS CARTRIDGE DATA DISPLAY FAX COUNTER DATA DISPLAY DRUM counts
119. B and CCD ASIC Replace the LSU unit e Replace the PCU PWB Cause Abnormal installation of harness to CCD unit Replace the Controller PWB GE unit abnormality 03 Content HDD trouble canner RWE abnormality Check A Check CCD unit harness Detail HDD does not operate properly in the Remedy Check CCD unit machine with HDD installed Check scanner PWB Cause E is not installed properly to the Controller 50 Content LSU connection trouble HDD does not operate properly in the Detail An LSU which does not conform to the Controller PWB machine is installed Controller PWB trouble Cause PCU PWB trouble Checkand Check installation of HDD to the Controller LSU trouble remedy PWB Check and Check LSU PWB Check PCU PWB Check connection of the harness of HDD to remedy Check connection of the connector and the the Controller PWB Use DIAG SIM 62 2 3 to check read write of HDD Replace HDD Replace Controller PWB harness between PCU and LSU AR M350 TROUBLE CODES 11 3 MAIN SUB MAIN SUB E7 80 Content Communication trouble ICU detection F1 19 Content Finisher AR FN6 front alignment motor between ICU and scanner trouble Details Communication establishment error Fleming Detail Front alignment motor operation abnormality Par
120. B125 PHDSS 8 SOCD 2 26 SPWS 179228 3 1 VAREF 38V HE GEESS SPLS1 SPLS1 2 9 GND2 GY BL GND2 3 BER Gv 4 SPLSI 179228 3 12 GND2 5V 18b BL I7 sv SPLS2 j sPis2 2 pee PL I6 SPLS2 GY GY GND2 3 10 GND2 RD t4 24V PHNR 2 H BU2P TR P H PL gees SPFS EU Le 1 SPFS 2 SRA 21T 4 OA SRA21T 4 OY SYG re SRA 21T 4 8 7 6 5 4 AR M350 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 4 ClSun CN14 1 171825 2 24V 1 GND2 2 IcV COPY 3 ICV COUNT 4 ICV START 5 ICV CA 6 ICV STAPLE 7 ICV DUPLEX 8 ICV_SIZEO 9 CV_SIZE1 bo ICV SE bi CV_SIZE3 12 NO ASSEMBLY B12B PHK S 24V 1 GND2 2 5V 3 NC 4 IMIMDA 5 IMIMDA 6 MIMDB 7 MIMDB 8 CNC CN13
121. BIN NONE Model code PUNCH NONE Model code DESK LCC NONE Model code ADU NONE Model code SPEED Machine speed 35 45 CPM PROCESS TYPE Process control spec 1 2 AR machine 3 DM machine SYSTEM MEMORY Memory capacity MB HDD Hard disk capacity MB ICU PRINTER MFP NIC NONE Model code NSCN NONE Network scanner PS3 NONE PS3 expansion kit FAX NONE Model code FAX MEMORY FAX expansion memory capacity MB HAND SET NONE Model code STAMP Finisher stamp NONE Model code Item Display Content MACHINE AR P350 350LP AR P450 450LP AR M350 350M AR M450 450M SPF Document feed unit not installed AR EF2 Document feed unit SPF installed AR EF1 Duplex document feed unit installed FINISHER After work unit not installed AR FN6 Built in finisher installed AR FN7 Console finisher installed MAIL BIN Mail bin not installed AR MS1 Mail bin installed Punch unit Punch unit not installed AR PN1A Punch unit 2 holes AR PN1B Punch unit 3 holes AR PN1C Punch unit 4 holes AR PN1D Punch unit 4 holes wide hole ADU Duplex module not installed AR DUS Duplex module installed AR DU4 Duplex module manual feed unit installed DESK Paper feed desk not installed AR MU1 Multi purpose tray installed AR D14 Paper feed desk installed AR D13 Tandem desk installed ICU PRINTER Printer board AR M11 MFP board MEMORY OM
122. C read abnormality When the Fax ICU common with FAX board is on ICU PWB installed AR M350 TROUBLE CODES 11 2 MAIN SUB MAIN SUB E6 11 Content CSI shading trouble White correction E7 06 Content Decode error trouble Details The CIS white reference plate scan level is Detail A decode error occurs during making of an abnormal when the lamp is on image Cause Abnormal harness installation to CIS unit Cause Data error during input from PCI to PM Dirt on the white reference plate PM trouble CIS lighting error Data error during image compression CIS unit installation trouble transfer CIS unit abnormality Controller PWB abnormality Scanner PWB abnormality Check and Check insertion of the PWB PCI bus Check amp Clean the white reference plate remedy If the error occurred in a FAX job check Remedy Check CIS light quantity SIM 5 3 and installation of the FAX PWB lighting For the other cases check the Controller Check CIS unit harness PWB Check scanner PWB Replace the Controller PWB 14 Content CIS communication trouble 10 Content Shading trouble Black correction Details Communication trouble clock sync between Details CCD black scan level abnormality when the scanner PWB and CIS ASIC copy lamp is off Cause Abnormal harness installation to CIS unit Cause Abnormal installation of flat cable to CCD
123. CANNER CHECK EXECUTING 1 HIGH SPEED 2 MIDDLE SPEED 3 LOW SPEED 4 TOP SPEED List of set values 1 High speed operation 168mm sec 2 Middle speed operation 110mm sec 3 Low speed operation 55mm sec 4 Top speed operation 220mm sec 1 2 o Purpose Operation test check Function Content Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the scanner reading unit and their Press START key to get started Section Scanner reading Section DSPF Item Operation Item Operation Operation Procedure Select with 10 digit key pad Operation Procedure Select with 10 digit key pad SIMULATION 1 1 SIMULATION 2 1 SCANNER CHECK SELECT 1 4 AND PRESS START SPF AGING TEST SELECT 1 2 AND PRESS START 1 HIGH SPEED 1 HIGH SPEED 2 MIDDLE SPEED 2 LOW SPEED 3 LOW SPEED 4 TOP SPEED Press SIMULATION 2 1 1 HIGH SPEED 2 LOW SPEED SPF AGING TEST EXECUTING List of set values 1 High speed operation 2 Low speed operation 2 2 Purpose Operation test check Function Content Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the automatic document feeder unit and their control circuits Section DSPF Item Operation Operation Procedure The sensor display is highlighted when it is detected control circuits
124. CIS unit abnormality unit Scanner PWB abnormality CCD unit abnormality Check amp Check CIS unit harness Scanner PWB abnormality Remedy Check CIS unit Check amp Check installation of CCD unit flat cable Check scanner PWB Remedy Check CCD unit E7 02 Content Laser trouble Check scanner PWB Detail BD signal from LSU is kept OFF or ON 11 Content Shading trouble White correction Cause The connector of LSU or the harness in LSU Details CCD white reference plate scan level is disconnected or broken abnormality when the copy lamp is ON The polygon motor does not rotate normally Cause Abnormal installation of flat cable to CCD The laser home position sensor in LSU is unit shifted Dirt on mirror lens white reference plate The proper voltage is not supplied to the Copy lamp lighting abnormality power line for laser Abnormal installation of CCD unit Laser emitting diode trouble CCD unit abnormality PCU PWB trouble Scanner PWB abnormality Controller PWB trouble Check amp Clean mirror lens and white reference plate Check and Check for disconnection of the LSU Remedy Check copy lamp light quantity SIM 5 3 and remedy connector lighting Use DIAG SIM 61 1 to check LSU Check CCD unit operation Check scanner PWB Check that the polygon motor rotates 14 Content CCD communication trouble normally or not Details Communication trouble clock sync between NS D y Check light emission of laser emitting diode scanner PW
125. Check to see if the indicators on the operation panel of the scanner module are lit and key operation is available 2 Place an original in the scanner module and check to see if copying can be performed normally 3 For setting change of the printer drivers on the computer see the supplied operation manual Then execute printing from the computer to check for proper printing AR M350 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6 10 7 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY MAINTENANCE 1 Self print of set values Use of SIM 22 6 allows to print the set values and the jam history of the machine These values must be printed before execution of maintenance or disassembly procedures 2 Maintenance System Table A Scanner DSPF Maintenance cycle 50K X Check Clean replace or adjust as necessary O Clean A Replace A Adjust Y Lubricate Move position Unit name Part name Ge 50K 100K 150K 200K 250K 300K 350K 400K Remark Optical section Mirror Lens Reflector Sensors O O O O O O O O O Table glass OC O O O O O O O O O White reference glass O O O O O O O O O Rails wi kil xix xix ix Drive belt Drive wire Pulley x x x x x x x X DSPF Paper feed section Take up roller O O A O A O A O A Note 2 Separation pad O OA O A Ol A O A Note2 Paper feed roller O O AIO A O A O A Note Transport section PS roller O O O O O O O O O Ex n ion Came e je e e e je e e e Paper exit section Paper feed
126. D TPFD1 TPFD2 TPFD3 MCLUD TLUD1 TLUD2 MCSPD TSPD1 TSPD2 MCPED 2 TPED1 TPED2 MCSS1 MCSS2 Purpose Operation test check List of displav values Function Content Used to check the operations of the mail bin lt p ay i stacker loads 3 tray desk LCC Section Mail bin stacker DDRS Desk door sensor TDRS Tandem side door sensor Item Operation DSPD2 Desk cassette 2 TTSD Tandem tray sensor Operation Procedure Select with 10 digit key pad remaining paper quantity sensor SIMULATION 3 21 DSPD1 Desk cassette 1 TLUD2 Tandem tray 2 MAIL BOX LOAD TEST SELECT 1 8 AND PRESS START remaining paper quantity upper limit sensor 1 MM 2 GSOL1 sensor 3 GSOL2 DCSS24 Desk cassette 2 TLUD1 Tandem tray 1 ace paper rear edge sensor 4 upper limit sensor 6 GSOL5 DCSS23 Desk cassette 2 TSPD2 Tandem tray 2 7 GSOL6 paper rear edge sensor 3 remaining quantity sensor Ge DCSS22 Desk cassette 2 TSPD1 Tandem tray 1 paper rear edge sensor 2 remaining quantity sensor Press START key to get started Press CUSTOM SETTING key to stop DCSS21 Desk cassette 2 TPED2 Tandem tray 2 SC paper rear edge sensor 1 paper sensor MAIEBOXLOAD TEST EXECUTING DLUD2 Desk cassette 2 TPED1 Tandem tray 1 1 MM upper limit sensor paper sensors Sy DPED2 Deck cassette 2 TPFD3 Tandem paper transport 4 GSOL3 paper sensor sensor 3 5 GSOL4 DPFD3 Desk paper transport TPFD2 Tandem paper transport 6 GSOL5 SOLE sensor 3 sensor 2 8 GSOL7 DCSS14 Desk cassette 1 MCSS4 MP tray size
127. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY MAINTENANCE 1 Self print of set values n uanunaauaaana enun 2 Maintenance System Table 3 Disassembly and assembly Lise 8 MACHINE OPERATION 1 Acceptable originals ooooooooooooo 2 Standard original setting orientation 3 Automatic copy image rotation rotation copying sisse 4 Adjustment values 5 Key operator program 9 ADJUSTMENTS 1 Process section oo oooooommmomcrmm 2 Engine Section iet tr ARR CRUS HR on Ra 3 Scanner section ooooooomommomr omo 10 SIMULATIONS 1 Entering the simulation mode 2 Switching the simulation mode 3 Canceling the simulation mode 4 Simulation let 5 Details of simulations e 11 TROUBLE CODES 1 Trouble codes let 2 Details of trouble codes 3 Network communication error llle 4 Fatal Non Fatal Error Table 12 ELECTRICAL SECTION 1 Block Diaoram eese Nee E Le TT TEE 1 PRODUCT OUTLINE Forthe items which are not specified in this Service Manual refer to the AR P350 P450 Service Manual A Scanner unit with duplex SPF AR EF1 This unit is an option scanner unit for the laser printer AR P350 P450 M350 M450 By installing this unit to the above laser printer installation of the AR RK1 is also required the printer can work as a digi
128. DISPLAY SIMULATION 22 3 TOTAL seem DRUM seme TONER semen ea I O DEVE tee MAINTENANCE PEE eee rr rr A laor A denne E RE eene TOTAL OUTPUT COPIES ME j j j PRINTER mme FAX OUTPUT M RIGHT SIDE OTHERS Se lt List of display values ln 10 x 80 digits 800 characters TOTAL Total counter DRUM Drum cartridge counter lt Jam codes gt TONER Toner cartridge counter Code Description DEVE Developer cartridge counter TRAY Tay aa MPED hi MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter 2 ray 2 paper feed jam not reaching TOTAL OUTPUT Total output quantity MPFDND1 MPFD not reaching jam Desk tray 1 feed paper COPIES Copy effective paper counter MPFDND2 MPFD not reaching jam Desk tray 2 feed paper PRINTER Printer counter MPFDNTD MPFD not reaching jam Tandem desk feed paper FAX Fax print counter MPFDST2 MPFD remaining jam Machine tray 3 feed paper RIIGHT SIDE Right side paper exit counter OUTPUT MPFDSD1 MPFD remaining jam Desk tray 1 feed paper OTHERS Other print counter List print etc MPFDSD2 MPFD remaining jam Desk tray 2 feed paper MPFDSTD MPFD remaining jam Tandem desk feed paper PPD1NMF PPD1 not reaching jam Manual feed tray paper PPD1SD2 PPD1 remaining jam Desk tray 2 feed paper ee eee TRAY1 Tray 1 feed paper jam PPD1 not reaching Purpose Adjustment setup operation
129. E1 set value 3 SIDE1 EU 4 SIDE2 i Scie SDE m 10 REARLOSS Back rear edge image loss 0 0 20 6 IMAGE LOSS SIDE SIDE1 E SIDE2 set value 7 IMAGE LOSS LEAD SIDE2 MI 8 IMAGE LOSS SIDE SIDE2 EN List of display values 1 9 REAR LOSS SIDE1 10 REAR LOSS SIDE2 E A A Normal display NOW COPYING Select other than 0 2 i andpress START Ke Press CUSTOM SETTING Key ERROR display Door open D EDEN E E Paper empty PAPER EMPTY SIMULATION 50 6 LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT SPF INPUT VALUE 0 99 AND PRESS START lt List of set values 2 gt 3 SIDE1 TRAY1 11 TRAY1 with Duplex Select 1 and I Z Z 2 TRAY2 12 TRAY2 with Duplex press START key Press START KEY nC STOM SETTING Ksy E 3 TRAY3 13 TRAY3 with Duplex Or copying is terminated 4 TRAY4 14 TRAY4 with Duplex 5 Manual feed 15 Manual feed with Duplex SIMULATION 50 6 LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT SPF NOW COPYING lt List of set values 3 gt Select 0 and p Set range 25 200 press START key Press START key or y press CUSTOME SETTING ke i 5 BPT SIMULATION 50 6 LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT SPF SELECT 1 5 AND PRESS START FEED TRAY 1 TRAY1 2 TRAY2 3 TRAY3 4 TRAY4 ABOVE 10 DUPLEX MODE Select 2 and press START key Press START keyjor press CUSTOME SETTING key SA SIMULATION 50 6 LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT SPF MAGNIFICATION INPUT 25 200 100 AR M3
130. Exposure level 1 0 9 4 0 EE 10 4 5 EY 11 5 0 4 Exposure level 1 5 A A 5 Exposure level 2 0 Select other than 0 2 EEGEN a favela MORNES Z 8 Exposure level 3 5 EXP LEVEL SETUP CHAR 2 INPUT VALUE 0 99 AND PRESS START 9 Exposure eve 4 0 3 1 0 10 xposure level 4 5 11 Exposure level 5 0 Select 1 and press START key Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING ke Or copying is terminated SIMULATION 46 9 EXP LEVEL SETUP CHAR 2 NOW COPYING Select 0 and press START key Press START key or press CUSTOME SETTING kel ei SIMULATION 46 9 FEED TRAY 5 BPT EXP LEVEL SETUP CHAR 2 SELECT 1 5 AND PRESS START 1 TRAY1 2 TRAY2 3 TRAY3 4 TRAY4 Select 2 and press START key Press START keyjor press CUSTOME SETTING key SIMULATION 46 9 EXP LEVEL SETUP CHAR 2 SELECT 3 11 AND PRESS START EXP LEVEL SELECT 3 1 0 6 2 5 9 4 0 4 1 5 5 2 0 7 3 0 8 3 5 10 4 5 11 5 0 AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 37 46 1 0 Purpose Adjustment Function Content Used to adjust the print density for each density level display value in the copy mode binary Text Photo mode A desired reading density can be set for each density level display value Section Item Picture quality Operation Procedure The exposure mo
131. Horizontal Horizontal Yes vertical PPD Windows 95 98 Me Windows NT 4 0 Zoom N A N A Yes Yes Windows 2000 Fit to page Yes Yes N A N A Mac OS 8 5 1 Mac OS 9 A For Macintosh OS t 3 PDL emulation he AR PK1 is required PCL6 compatible PCL5e compatible PostScript Level 2 compatible PostScript 3 compatible AR M350 SPECIFICATIONS 3 2 e Font When an optional PS3 expansion kit is installed Function PCL5e PS PPD PPD PCL6 Windows Macintosh Resident font 45 fonts 136 fonts 136 35 fonts fonts 6 Download font Bitmap Bitmap Bitmap N A TrueType Type1 Type1 Graphic TrueType TrueType f Others When an optional PS3 expansion kit is installed Function PCL5e PS PPD PPD PCL6 Windows Macintosh Watermark 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Overlay Yes Yes N A N A Job retention 1 Yes Yes N A Yes Account control Yes Yes N A Yes Custom settings Yes Yes N A N A Automatic Yes Yes N A Yes configuration 2 Job end Yes Yes N A N A notification 1 In the models without a hard disk drive an optional hard disk drive must be installed 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 4 6 9 16 is This function PCL6 only Functions when peripheral devices are installed Not supported in the Windows NT 4 0 environment supported in the Windows 2000 environment Only one size is supported in the Windows 2000 environment Onl
132. I PURPOSE TRAY ADJUSTMENT MAX POSITION COMPLETE or ERROR When 2 is selected press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING Key SIMULATION 40 12 MULTI PURPOSE TRAY ADJUSTMENT MIN POSITION COMPLETE or ERROR Function Content Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the related circuit The operation of the document size sensor can be monitored on the LCD display Section Other Item Operation Operation Procedure The OC document sensor is checked SIMULATION 41 1 PD SENSOR CHECK ocsw EJ PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7 The detected sensor is highlighted lt List of display values gt OCSW Original cover state Open Normal display Close Highlighted PD1 7 Document sensor state No document Normal display Document loaded Highlighted 41 2 a a rr H n ccc Ic n Purpose Adjustment Function Content Used to adjust the detection level of the document size sensor Section Other Item Operation Operation Procedure The OC document sensor is adjusted 1 Open the original cover Press 1 without an original Press START and COMPLETE is displayed Press CUSTOM SETTING to return to the initial screen Place an A3 or WLT paper in the initial Screen Select 2 and press START When COMPLETE is displayed the adjustment is completed If ERROR is displayed in procedu
133. INCH 1 INCH 2 AB 1 AB 2 Disabling of document feeder Scan to Default sender set E mail initial Initial file format setting status settings Compression mode at broadcasting AR M350 MACHINE OPERATION 8 3 Set value Default KEY OPERATOR PROGRAM f Remark Engine section LCD Account Auditing mode ON OFF control Print per account Print per account display ON OFF Print per account print Reset account Account number control Enter new account number 5digits Delete account number Change account number Print account number No print if acc t invalid Yes No Energy save Auto power shut off timer 15min 30min 60min 120min 240min Auto power shut off Disable Enable Preheat mode 15min 30min 60min 120min 240min None Toner save ON OFF Operation Auto clear setting 15sec 30sec 60sec OFF panel settings Message display time 3sec 6sec 9sec 12sec Language setting American English English French Spanish Depend on the distination Device Disable duplex unit Yes No settings Disable stapler unit Yes No Disable paper desk Yes No drawers Disable finisher Yes No Disable mail bin stacker Yes No Saddle stitch adjust Paper size A4 3 0mm 0 0mm 3 0mm 0 1mm unit With the Paper size B4 3 0mm 0 0mm 3 0mm 0 1mm unit saddle finisher Paper size A4R 3 0mm 0 0mm 3 0mm 0 1mm unit installed Paper size Ledger 3 0mm 0 0
134. LEVEL SETUP FAX ULTRA FINE INPUT VALUE 0 99 AND PRESS START Select 1 and press START key Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key Or copying is terminated SIMULATION 46 16 8 Dark Half tone lt List of display values 1 gt Normal display NOW COPYING ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN Jam JAM Paper empty PAPER EMPTY lt List of set values 2 gt 1 TRAY1 2 TRAY2 3 TRAY3 4 TRAYA 5 Manual feed lt List of set values 3 gt 3 Auto Bright Dark Auto Half tone Bright half tone N oN A Dark Half tone 46 17 Purpose Adjustment setup operation data output check display Function Content Used to adjust the CCD CIS shading reference value Select 0 and press START key EXP LEVEL SETUP FAX ULTRA FINE NOW COPYING Section Scanner reading DSPF reading E E Item Operation Press START keier E Operation Procedure 1 Change the shading reference value of M press CUSTOME SETTING ke I SIMULATION 46 16 EXP LEVEL SETUP FAX ULTRA FINE SELECT 1 5 AND PRESS START FEED TRAY 1 TRAY1 2 TRAY2 3 TRAY3 4 TRAY4 5 BPT Select 2 and Press START keylo press START key press CUSTOME SETTING key SIMULATION 46 16 EXP LEVEL SETUP FAX ULTR
135. MIRMOO 9 KPHDSS B S26B PHDSS IMIRMOT ng BR BR MIRMO2 14 EL pL a MIRMOV 12 i Zeg pK 2 SPFA 100 3 BL S SPFMOO Aer elle CN15 Ze nos B8B PH 6 6 GND2 z 7RD RD 7 i24 GND2 1 g RD RD ig 24V RES SCN 2 GY GY DSP SCN 3 9 y 9 GND2 RD SCN Ta i 5 LB LB SENE TXD SCN Is 498 LB h2 S555 SCN DTR_SCN 6 PK PK 5V 7 t PA a SRC NC 8 ET me PL ig JSPFSET PWB 1 18 SPFS F Ire BL 17 VAREF CN12 CN2 CN1 788R BR 4g sPFC S28B PHDSS B26B PHDSS 9604S 35F FF3 35 R15 498R BRHg SPPD 12 DBL PR 11 2 DBL VLED 3 38 VLED j PL PL bd SOCD D DBL 2 5 12 2 DBL DGND 34 DGND S LB E E 21 LB 54 SPED 2 DATA1 Zeg 1312 DATA VAS 3 33 VAS i af PL PJ SPLSZ 2 DATAT 44 42 DATA1 DGND 3 32 DGND 7 273 LB LB 53 SCOV 2 DATAO 5154 715 2 DATAO VDS 31 31 VDS ALB BR 54 SPLST 2 DATAO 657 716 2 DATAO DGND 30 130 DGND PK PK 5H SPOD 2 CLK Zeg 1112 cu SCN 29 29 SCN i Els LB 5d SPWS 2 CLK Boy 1812 CLK DGND 2 28 DGND GND2 ale 9 GNDZDGND LGATE 27 27 LGATE FRM CCD2 105p 10 FRM CCD2 DGND 2 28 DGND CLK_CCD2 115 11 CLK CCD2 CLK 2 28 CLK PAGE2 1215 12 PAGE2 CIS DGND 2 24 DGND ADD_CCD2_ 135p 13 ADD CCD2 DATA 2 23 DATA TXD CCD2 ae 141XD_CCD2 cT D 2 22 DGND RES_CIS T18 RES CIS LD 21 121 LD RXD_CCD2_ D s 16 RXD CCD2 DGND 20 20 DGND 3 3V Ile 17 3 3V SCLK 1919 SCLK 33 3V 1855 18 3 3V DGND 1 18 DGND 24V 19 y 119 24V ILST 17 17 LST GND2 205 120 GND2 AGND DGND 1 18 DGND 12V 21 y 21
136. Main drive motor 9 FAM Bundle exit motor Press START key to get started Press CUSTOM SETTING key to stop 10 EVM Elevator motor 10 FPM Paddle motor SIMULATION 3 10 Meri porapledtonon TU FF LEE CONSOLE FINISHER SETTING INPUT VALUE AND PRESS START 12 JRM Jogger motor rear 1 FOLDING POSITION 13 JFM Jogger motor front 14 PSM Pusher motor List of set values Adjustment content Range Geet 1STEP value 1 Saddle binding position adjustment 0 400 200 0 0707mm 2 Saddle folding position adjustment 0 400 200 0 0525mm 3 Front alignment position adjustment 0 20 10 0 367mm 4 Rear alignment position adjustment 0 20 10 0 367mm 5 Staple rear one position binding position adjustment 0 200 100 0 04374mm 6 Staple front one position binding position adjustment 0 200 100 0 04374mm 7 Staple 2 position binding center adjustment 0 200 100 0 04374mm 8 Staple 2 position binding pitch adjustment 0 99 50 0 04374mm 9 Punch center adjustment Slide direction 47 53 50 imm 10 Punch hole position adjustment Paper feed direction 0 99 50 0 105mm Values stored in EEPROM AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 11 3 20 Main code 4 Purpose Operation test check 4 2 Function Content Used to check the mail bin stacker AR MS1 sensor Purpose Operation test check Section Mail bin stacker Item Operation Operation Procedure The display
137. N ADU motor 1 control signal 2 ADMEN2 ADU motor 2 control signal 3 DGS ADU gate solenoid 9 2 Purpose Operation test check Function Content Used to check the sensors and detectors in the duplex section and their control circuits Section Duplex Item Operation Operation Procedure The display is highlighted when detected SIMULATION 9 2 ADUSET ADU SENSOR CHECK DSW_D AINPD APOD APPD1 APPD2 lt List of display values gt ADUSET ADU installation detection DSW_D ADU cabinet open detection AINPD ADU paper entry detection APOD ADU paper exit detection APPD1 ADU paper detection 1 APPD2 ADU paper detection 2 Note Never execute this simulation with toner in the toner hopper If executed excessive toner will enter the developing section causing an overtoner trouble Be sure to remove the toner motor from the toner hopper before execution SIMULATION 10 ARE YOU SURE 1 YES 2 NO TONER MOTOR ACTIVATION Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key Or after 10sec execution SIMULATION 10 TONER MOTOR ACTIVATION EXECUTING List of set values 1 Toner motor rotation start 2 Cancel The display returns to the main code entry menu Main code 13 Purpose Cancel incase of a trouble Function Content Used to cancel the self diag
138. NAL COMPLETE or ERROR a TENE Specification Specification Adjustment Document size detection photo sensor adjustment COMPLETE SIM 41 2 I DSPF hinge height adjustment 1 2 Close the DSPF Check that the dove and the reference plate are in contact with the table glass If not adjust with the setscrew lt Specification gt Specification Adjustment position Distance between 3 point contact Hinge dove Reference plate Left front Left rear Right adjustment set and table glass front when viewed from the screw front J DSPF hinge diagonal adjustment Front Before executing this adjustment the following adjustments must have been completed LSU right angle adjustment DSPF height adjustment 1 Make a test chart as shown below Print a self print pattern 71 2 Make a copy with DSPF 3 Measure the rear side and check that the value is in the specified range 4 Ifthe value is not in the specified range loosen the nut which is fixing the hinge R adjustment screw and adjust the adjustment screw 5 Make a copy again and check again that the value is in the specified range 6 Tighten the nut to fix the adjustment screw Specification Specification Adjustment position Skew feed Within 3mm Hinge R adjustment screw A4 or less 1mm or less Greater than A4 1 5mm or less Lead ed
139. OC scan lead edge adjustment Before executing this adjustment the following adjustment must have been completed OC scan magnification ratio adjustment en Set an original on the original table 2 Enter SIM 50 1 3 Make a copy 4 Select the number to be set on the right of the LCD and perform the adjustment of each item 5 Select 3 RRC A and change the value with 10 key to perform the copy adjustment 6 Select 4 RRC B so that the distance between the paper lead edge and the copy image lead edge is within 3 0mm Change the value with 10 key and perform the copy adjustment 7 Check that the lead edge shift is within 3 0mm If not perform the Specifications Adjustment Adjustment position value SPF sub scan direction 0 5 SIM 48 1 Set value 1 fine adjustment of procedure 5 and 6 Select 5 DEN B so that the white spot in the latter half of copy magnification ratio DSPF main scan back direction magnification ratio 0 1 change lt Specification gt The SPF main scan direction magnification ratio is common with OC rear edge void is within 3 0mm Change the value with 10 key and perform the copy adjustment The rear void adjustment is changed by the step of 0 1mm When the rear edge void is too small increase the value When the rear edge void is too great decrease the value 9 Press CA key to cancel the simulation SIMULATION 50 1 LEAD EDGE ADJUS
140. OM Check the AC PWB and the lamp control 01 Content FAX expansion flash memory abnormality circuit in the control PWB ICU detection Use DIAG SIM14 to cancel the trouble Details Expansion flash memory with SRAM backup H4 00 Content Fusing section low temperature trouble data is installed HL1 Detail The set temperature is not reached within Cause SRAM backup data is detected in expansion RT the specified time normally 3 min when flash memory HD warming up or resetting from pre heating Expansion flash memory in which SRAM Under the ready state data are backed up with SIM 66 19 is us An input voltage of 1 21V or below is installed RT detected 5 times continuously Check amp Restore backup data to SRAM with SIM 66 H2 Cause thermistor trouble Remedy 20 and clear expansion flash memory with Heater lamp trouble SIM 66 10 If data are unnecessary Control PWB trouble clear expansion flash memory with SIM 66 Thermostat trouble 10 AC power trouble 04 Content FAX modem operation abnormality Interlock switch trouble Details FAX PWB modem chip operation Check and Use DIAG SIM5 2 to check the heater lamp abnormality remedy Blinking operation Cause The boot test pin in the FAX PWB is shorted If the heater lamp blinks normally and normal operation is tried Check the thermistor and its harness Modem chip operation abnormality in FAX Check the thermistor input circuit in the PWB control PWB Check amp Turn on the power agai
141. OPYING 1 The current set value is highlighted on the ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN right of each item In this screen be sure to Jam JAM select 1 COPY START Set value 1 Paper empty PAPER EMPTY 2 Enter the correction value with 10 digit key pad List of set values 2 gt Press P to store the set value 1 JTRAY1 Default 50 set range 0 99 2 TRAY2 3 The greater the set value is the greater the 3 TRAY3 correction is A TRAYA 1 step 0 1 adjustment 5 Manual feed 4 Press START to start copying and store the set value Display value 1 Above 10 becomes the duplex mode DD making duplex copy 5 Select the paper feed tray Set value 2 List of set values 3 6 Set the scan magnification ratio Set value 3 Set range 25 40096 SIMULATION 48 1 48 5 MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT SELECT 0 9 AND PRESS START A UM wC X X a ci CH rH TY 0 TRAY SELECT 1 COPY START Purpose Adjustment 2 MAGNIFICATION Ma A 7 3 CCD MAIN E sus 5 SPF SUB Function Content Used to adjust the exposure motor speed 6 CIS MAIN Section Scanner reading Item Picture quality Select other than 0 2 A Z Operation Procedure 1 The current set value is displayed on the right and press START key P ess CUSTOM SETTING key 3 E of each item H 2 Set the exposure level with 10 digit key
142. PCU communication trouble Finisher installed 33 Console finisher punch side With Console PCU register motor trouble Finisher installed 34 Console finisher punch motor With Console PCU trouble Finisher installed 35 Console finisher punch side With Console PCU register sensor trouble Finisher installed 36 Console finisher punch timing With Console PCU sensor trouble Finisher installed 37 Console finisher backup RAM With Console PCU trouble Finisher installed 38 Console finisher punch backup With Console PCU RAM trouble Finisher installed 81 Console finisher transport With Console PCU motor trouble Finisher installed F2 00 Toner concentration sensor PCU open 02 Toner supply abnormality PCU 04 Improper cartridge PCU Destination error life cycle error 05 CRUM error PCU 39 Process thermistor breakdown PCU F3 12 Tray 1 lift p trouble PCU 22 Tray 2 lift up trouble Multi purpose PCU Multi purpose tray tray AR M350 TROUBLE CODES 11 1 Trouble Contents Remark Trouble Trouble Contents Remark Trouble codes detection codes detection F6 00 FAX board communication When the Fax ICU U2 00 EEPROM read write error Controller trouble board is Controller installed 11 Counter check sum e
143. Photo sim46 11 SIMULATION 46 2 EXP LEVEL SETUP 2 SELECT 0 6 AND PRESS START 0 TRAY SELECT 1 COPY START 2 EXP LEVEL 3 AE 3 0 4 CH 3 0 5 MIX 3 0 6 PHOTO 3 0 Select other than 0 2 and press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key X mime SIMULATION 46 2 3 AE 3 0 EXP LEVEL SETUP 2 INPUT VALUE 0 99 AND PRESS START Select 1 and press START key Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key Or copying is terminated SIMULATION 46 2 EXP LEVEL SETUP 2 NOW COPYING Select 0 and Press START key press START key press CUSTOME SETTING key or SIMULATION 46 2 EXP LEVEL SETUP 2 SELECT 1 5 AND PRESS START FEED TRAY 1 TRAY1 2 TRAY2 3 TRAY3 4 TRAYA 5 MFT Select 2 and Press START key or E press START key press CUSTOME SETTING key SIMULATION 46 2 EXP LEVEL SETUP 2 SELECT 3 6 AND PRESS START EXP LEVEL SELECT 3 AE 3 0 4 CH 3 0 5 MIX 3 0 6 PHOTO 3 0 2 Press the COPY button to make a copy Check that the copy density is as shown in the table below If not change the adjustment value Adjustment spec Mode EXP Chart Adjustment Chart Adjustment No level No level Character 3 3 Copied 2 Not copied Character 3 3 Copied 2 N
144. Printable area pone A The print area of this product is shown below roguency Power cord 8 Power consumption A AR M350 AR M450 Max Power consump 1350W 1350W Average waiting mode 1200W 1200W 9 Energy Star benchmark AR M350 AR M450 B Low power mode 40W 75W Transition time to Low power mode 60min 60min 10 Noise AR M350 AR M450 At working less than 6 7B less than 6 7B At waiting mode less than 4 8B less than 4 8B Y Showing noise benchmark in each model as a whole system 11 Dimensions External dimensions 428x552x469 Only main unit mm WxDxH 16 9 x21 7 x18 5 Paper size Occupied space 963x685 mm 1 1 Printable area a Cum If a printer driver for Windows or Macintosh is used for printing the Weight Approx 39kg Only main unit printable area will be smaller The actual printable area depends on the Approx 99kg 1 printer driver to be used 1 with B W scanner module DSPF Scanner rack Large capacity paper feed desk Power supply unit and Upper exit tray extension AR M350 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1 B Document Feeding Equipment 4 Print Function
145. R W TEST ALL 1 PRINTER 45PPM 104 104 1 ARE YOU SURE S E neo 1 YES 35PPM 80 45PPM 2 NO 80 150 GOTEN Pres STARTS mime SIMULATION 62 3 HDD R W TEST EXECUTING After completion Press CUSTOM SETTING key to stop SIMULATION 62 3 HDD R W TEST OK or NG lt List of set values gt 1 Execution 2 Cancel AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 57 Main code 63 63 2 63 1 Purpose Adjustment setup operation data output check display print Purpose Adjustment setup operation data output check display print Function Content Used to execute shading Section Scanner exposure Function Content Used to check the shading correction result The shading correction result is displayed Item Operation Operation Procedure Execute shading During shading EXECUTING is displayed When shading is completed COMPLETED is displayed Section Scanner exposure Item Operation Operation Procedure The latest shading data are displayed SIMULATION 63 1 SHADING DATA DISPLAY CCD ODD GAIN EH ODD OFFSET ODD MAX 3 ODD MIN PE ODD AVE ODD DEV EVEN GAIN VE EVEN OFFSET EVEN MAX EVEN MIN PEE EVEN AVE EVEN DEV CIS GAIN Ef OFFSET DR OFFSET CH MIN 255 AVE 255 DEV lt Set values gt CCD data
146. RESS START ed Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key to stop Or stop after 2min SIMULATION 25 2 AUTOMATIC DV ADJUSTMENT EXECUTING sensor output can be monitored Section Auditor Section Drive Item Spec Item Operation Operation Procedure The auditor setting is performed Default 1 Operation Procedure the toner density control sensor value is SIMULATION 26 3 1 P10 2 VENDOR 3 OTHERS AUDITOR SETUP SELECT 1 3 AND PRESS START 26 5 Purpose Setup Function Content Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the maintenance counter Section Item Spec Operation Procedure 1 Setting of the count up number of AS WLT paper passing 1 or 2 is made The current set value is highlighted on the right side of the item 2 Setting of the count up number of the selected counter is made 1 1 count up 2 2 counts up Default 2 SIMULATION 26 5 A3 LEDGER COUNT START 1 TOTAL COUNTER I UP MODE SETTING SELECT 1 3 AND PRESS 2 MAINTENANCE D 3 DV CARTRIDGE COUNTER RUM COUNTER Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 26 5 START 1 TOTAL COUNTER 1 1COUNT UP 2 A3 LEDGER COUNT UP MODE SETTING SELECT 1 2 AND PRESS 2COUNT UP lt List of target counters gt 1 Total counter 2 Maintenance counter drum cartridge counter
147. S B PL BL BL BL SCOV SCOV Ze sell Tree BR 15 5V GND2 3 ev 2 SPED D Gv 16 SPED 179228 3 BLLS GND2 ae BL 11 GND2 75V 7L PLA 5V Be PLL NO ASSEM SPPD sPPD 7 BR GviS SCOV ke Gy 118 SCOV GND2 GY 8 GND2 6 2 GND2 3 BL z BL BL 7 5V DECH BRIS TSPPD q BR BR a SPPD SMP 02V NC SMR 02V N GY GY GY at RDDP OND2 3h ep Ro 3 GND2 SDSS HES THR BRIO 20 ZER BR EAV 2 SDSS 2 11 SDSS 1 pL 113 SDSS SRA 21T 4 9 SV POD SRAZ21T SY SY FS ev 4 GND2 aus ENT PHR 3 PHNR 6 H BU6P TR P H E 20SPOD BL BL 15 71 BL 10 5V B26B PHDSS B BR S26B PHDSS 8WPOD 1 5V POD PL SPFA 7 BRI SPFA SPOD eu SE GY SlGND2 2 8 Gy P2 SOCD JSPFA PL PL OT SPFA SPOD gj PL PLA sPOD f3 EL 6 GND2 PK PK BL tv 7 BL RD Fa AV ISPEMOD 3s PK 3 SPFMOO 179228 3 y PL 5 PL BR 48 SPEC 5V De SEKR 5V HE lat eae E 4d 24V GND2 Soy 41 5 GND2 SOCD soco 2 Gy DL Lage GND2 6 a5 6 GND2 GND2 3 Z1 NC 24V TED RD 7 24V PHNR 2 H BU2P TR P H 24V 8 Y ED 8 s24V RD SPF GND2 oy 9 GND2 SPFC BR GND2 1075 1d GND2 1j SPFC 2 SPFB Ur LB 14 SPFB SCN PHNR 3 H BU3P TR P H SDSS 125 Ex 12 SDSS EE 1 8D PWB edad 135K EE SRRC 2 NC 2 d 14 CAE ix SPFSET haer PL 18 SPFSET PWB SPFS 1881 PL 48 SPFS VAREF Mer BL 17 VAREF SPFC 1855 BR 48 SPFC SPPD 195 BR 1g SPPD SPLS2 20s PL ag SOCD SPED les i 21 SPED SMR 03V NC SMP 03V N SPLS1 2275 Lg 24 SPLS2 B BL SCON 2 23 SCOV BRI VAREF Tree SPWS 24B BR 24 SPLS1 SPFVR Biz sews ary m SPOD zech PK 28 SPOD 3 aL
148. SHARP SERVICE MANUAL CODE 00ZARM350 A1E LASER PRINTER AR M350 MODEL AR M450 OPTIONS AR EF1 AR M11 AR RK1 1 PRODUCT OUTLINE 2 CONFIGURATION 3 SPECIFICATIONS 4 CONSUMABLE PARTS 5 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 6 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 7 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY MAINTENANCE 8 MACHINE OPERATION 9 ADJUSTMENTS 10 SIMULATIONS 11 TROUBLE CODES 12 ELECTRICAL SECTION Parts marked with NC are important for maintaining the safety of the set Be sure to replace these parts with specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set This document has been published to be used for SHARP COR PO RATION after sales service only The contents are subject to change without notice CAUTION This product is a class 1 laser product that complies with 24 CFR 1040 10 and 1040 11 of the CDRH standard and IEC825 This means that this machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation The use of controls adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure This laser radiation is not a danger to the skin but when an exact focusing of the laser beam is achieved on the eye s retina there is the danger of spot damage to the retina The following cautions must be observed to avoid exposure of the laser beam to your eyes at the time of servicing 1 When a problem in the laser o
149. SIMULATION 26 10 NETWORK SCANNER TRIAL SETTING SELECT 0 1 AND PRESS START 0 END 1 START List of set values 0 Trial mode cancel 1 Trial mode start allows to make the similar setup Section Item Spec Operation Procedure The toner mode setup is made Default 1 SIMULATION 26 18 TONER SAVE MODE SETTING SELECT 0 1 AND PRESS START 0 YES List of set values 0 Toner save mode is enabled 1 Toner save mode is disabled 26 30 Purpose Setup Function Content Used to set the operation mode conforming to the CE mark Europe standards For flickers when driving the fusing heater lamp Section Item Spec Operation Procedure SIMULATION 26 30 CE MARK CONTROL SETTING SELECT 0 1 AND PRESS START 0 NO List of set values 0 No control of CE mark 1 Control of CE mark 26 35 Purpose Setup Function Content Used to set whether the trouble history of SIM 22 4 is displayed as one time trouble or continuous troubles when two or more number of a same trouble occurred Section Item Spec Operation Procedure The trouble memory storing method is set Default 0 SIMULATION 26 35 TROUBLE MEMORY MODE SETTING SELECT 0 1 AND PRESS START 0 ONCE 1 ANY List of
150. T NL 4 1 YL XH 3 2 XH TOUCH YH 2 3 YH IXL 1 4 XL CN3 S3B PH K S B3B PH K S 24V 1 1 24V CCFT NO 2 2 NC ICCFT 3 3 CCFT CN2 PHR 6 B B6B PH SM3 TB PDSELO 1 L 1 PDSELO PDSEL1 2 PL 2 PDSEL1 PDSEL2 3 3 PDSEL2 ORS PD 5V 4 5V PD 5 G 5 PD GND2 6 6 GND2 MFP OPE PWB AR M350 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 6 CN4 20FLS SM1 TB GND2 2017 GND2 Vss CN2 m NC 19 12 NO 9604S 05C 9604S 05C NC 1 3 NC 3 3V 5 11 3 3V NC 17 4 NC 3 3V 4 2 3 3V NC d 5 NC LCD VEE 3 3 LCD VEE GND2 Vss 6 GND2 Vss GND2 2 4 GND2 LCD D3 1 7 LCD D3 GND2 A 5 GND2 LCD D2 1 8 LCD D2 LCD D1 1 9 LCD D1 LCD DO 11 19 LCD DO GND2 Vss 10 111 GND2 Vss LCD VEE 9 12 LCD VEE LCD VCC 8 13 LCD VCC lcd DIS 7 4 Ic
151. TE SIMULATION 66 16 DIAL TEST DTMF SELECT 0 2 AND PRESS START 1 HIGH dB 2 HIGH LOW Select 1 or 2 and press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key When 1 is selected or START key nine 1 HIGH dB SIMULATION 66 16 DIAL TEST DTMF SELECT 0 15 AND PRESS START N When 2 is selected SIMULATION 66 16 DIAL TEST DTMF SELECT 0 15 AND PRESS START 2 HIGH LOW Select 0 and press START key When 0 is selected SIMULATION 66 16 DIAL TEST DTMF EXECUTING Section FAX Only when FAX is installed Item Operation Section FAX Operation Procedure The dial test is performed DTMF signal output Item Operation Used to test the dial signal DTMF output in the Operation Procedure The DTMF signal output is checked Output level is set with soft SW When CUSTOM SETTING is pressed the execution is terminated SIMULATION 66 18 DTMF SIGNAL OUTPUT SOFT SW INPUT 0 9 AND PRESS START Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 66 18 DTMF SIGNAL OUTPUT SOFT SW EXCUTING DTMF signal gt 1 90 4 66 19 Purpose Setup Press CUSTOM SETTING key Function Content Used to backup the FAX SRAM data Memory AR MM9 When FAX is installed and FAX expansion Set values of rapid key dialing into the flash
152. TMENT SELECT 0 9 AND PRESS START 0 TRAY SELECT 1 COPY START 2 MAGNIFICATION 3 RRCA EJ 4 RRc E 5 DENB 6 IMAGE LOSS LEAD 7 IMAGE LOSS SIDE 8 DENA 9 FR VOID Specifi cation Set value Default Range RRCA Original scan start position 50 0 99 Set value 1 0 2mm shift RRCB Image and paper position adjustment on the OPC drum 50 0 99 Set value 1 0 1mm shift DENA Lead edge void adjustment sol anmarisss 35 0 99 Set value 1 0 1mm shift DENB Rear edge void adjustment 35 0 99 Set value 1 0 1mm shift IMAGE LOSS LEAD Both sides image loss 4 0mm or less 15 0 99 Set value 1 0 1mm shift IMAGE LOSS SIDE F R void quantity Total 8mm or less 20 0 99 Set value 1 0 1mm shift FR VOID Total 8mm or less 35 0 99 Set value 1 0 1mm shift AR M350 ADJUSTMENTS 9 7 M Original off center adjustment Before execution of this adjustment the following adjustment must have been completed LSU right angle adjustment Print off center adjustment Print magnification ratio adjustment 1 Setan original on the original table O Nm started Execute SIM 50 12 Select the paper feed tray and the magnification ratio After entering the adjustment value pres START key and printing is 5 Check the off center distance from the paper lead edge of the printed copy Repeat procedure 2 until the printed copy satisfies the specifications 3 Print lead edge
153. The LCD contrast changes Max Min every 2sec 4 3 Purpose Operation test check Function Content Used to check the operation under load in the paper feed section desk paper feed large capacity trays and their control circuits Afier8 0is c Press CUSTOM SETTING key to stop Section Paper feed Item Operation Operation Procedure Select with 10 digit key pad SIMULATION 57 SIMULATION 4 3 DESK LCC LOAD TEST SELECT 1 AND PRESS START 2 5 2 Press START key to get started Press CUSTOM SETTING ke to sto p DESK 1 2 SIMULATION 4 3 LCC LOAD TEST EXECUTING List of set values 3 tray desk LCC 1 DLUM2 Desk lift up motor 2 1 TLUM2 LCC lift up motor 2 2 DLUMt1 Desk lift up motor 1 2 TLUM1 LCC lift up motor 1 3 MCLUM Desk multi lift up 3 MCLUM LCC multi lift up motor motor 4 DPFCL Desk paper transport 4 TPFCL LCC transport clutch clutch 5 DPCL2 Desk paper feed 5 TPCL2 LCC paper feed clutch 2 clutch 2 6 DPCL1 Desk paper feed 6 TPCL1 LCC paper feed clutch 1 clutch 1 7 MCPCL Desk multi paper feed 7 MCPCL LCC multi paper feed clutch clutch 8 DMM Desk transport motor 8 TMM LCC transport motor Purpose Operation test check Function Content Used to check the operations of the heater lamp and its control circuit Section Fusing Item Operation Operation Proce
154. USTOME SETTING ke T SIMULATION 46 9 EXP LEVEL SETUP CHAR 2 SELECT 3 11 AND PRESS START EXP LEVEL SELECT 3 1 0 4 1 5 5 2 0 6 2 5 7 3 0 8 3 5 9 4 0 10 4 5 11 5 0 2 Press the COPY button to make a copy Check that the copy density is as shown in the table below If not change the adjustment value For the auto mode there is only one adjustment value For the other modes the adjustment value for each density level must be adjusted c Gain adjustment in DSPF back CIS scan When images are too dark or too bright in scanning the back CIS of DSPF perform the following procedures 1 Make a duplex copy of a sample and check the density of canning the back 2 Execute SIM 46 17 SIMULATION 46 17 CCD CIS SHADING GAIN DATA SETUP SELECT 1 3 AND PRESS START 1 CCD ODD 2 CCD EVEN 3 cis E Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 46 17 CCD SHADING GAIN DATA SETUP INPUT VALUE 0 255 AND PRESS START 1 CCD ODD 3 Select 3 CIS and adjust the gain of CIS When the CIS gain setup value is increased the image becomes brighter When the CIS gain setup value is decreased the image becomes darker O DSPF width detection adjustment 1 When replacing DSPF unit 1 Use SIM53 7 to enter the value indicated on the side of the right hinge of the DSPF unit SIMULATION 53 7 SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT MANUAL SELECT
155. Used to register the FAX number for MODEM dial in Only when FAX is installed MM9 installing section are copied as FAX Section FAX Section FAX Item Operation Item Operation Operation Procedure The contents of ROM in the option memory AR Operation Procedure This mode is for development and inhibited in the market program This mode is for development and inhibited in the market SIMULATION 66 25 SIMULATION 66 23 FAX PROGRAM DOWNLOAD EJECT PROTECT PIN AND PRESS START M D IN FAX NUMBER SETTING 0 9 0 9 4 INPUT NUMBER AND PRESS START 0123456789 01234567 66 24 66 26 Purpose Setup Purpose Operation test check Function Content Used to register the external telephone number for MODEM dial in Only when FAX is installed Function Content Used clear the FAST memory data Only when FAX is installed Section FAX Section FAX Item Operation Item Operation Operation Procedure execute the following 1 Fast memory data clear 2 Not clear 2 After completion of memory clear reset is made Operation Procedure 1 Select with 10 digit key pad press START to SIMULATION 66 24 FAST MEMORY DATA CLEAR ARE YOU SURE 1 YES 2 NO This mode is for development and inhibited in the market SIMULATION 66 26 M D IN EXTEL NUMBER SETTING 0 9 0 9
156. When COMPLETE is displayed press CUSTOM SETTING to return to the initial screen 3 Move the guide to A5R position select 3 and press START When COMPLETE is displayed press CUSTOM SETTING to return to the initial screen Move the guide to MIN position select 4 and press START When COMPLETE is displayed the adjustment is completed If ERROR is displayed in procedures 1 4 repeat the adjustment again n 4 is replaced This adjustment is performed only when the width detection volume Normally use SIM 53 7 for input 2 POSITION 1 3 POSITION 2 SIMULATION 53 6 SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT SELECT 1 4 AND PRESS START 1 MAX POSITION 4 POSITION Sel A and press START key key Press CUSTOME ep key CTO minime 8 mum SIMULATION 53 6 SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT MAX POSITION COMPLETE or ERROR Select 2 and press START key Press CUSTOME SETTING key POSITION 1 SIMULATION 53 6 SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT COMPLETE or ERROR Select 3 and press START key Press CUSTOME SETTING key POSITION 2 SIMULATION 53 6 SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT COMPLETE or ERROR Select 4 and press START key e pni Press CUSTOME SETTING k y SIMULATION 53 6 SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT MIN POSITION COMPLETE or ERROR Section SPF DSPF Section DSPF
157. When the value of UNIT 0 1mm STEP is increased the image is shifted toward the front side Press START to start copying and store the set value Display value 1 5 Select a paper feed tray Set value 2 6 Set the scan magnification ratio Set value 3 n 4 SIMULATION 50 12 ORIGINAL OFF CENTER ADJUSTMENT SELECT 0 5 AND PRESS START 0 TRAY SELECT 1 COPY START 2 MAGNIFICATION 5 SPF SIDE2 Select other than 0 2 and press START key 3 PLATEN 4 SPF SIDE1 Press CUSTOM SETTING key mime mune START 3 PLATEN Select 1 and SIMULATION 50 12 ORIGINAL OFF CENTER ADJUSTMENT INPUT VALUE 0 99 AND PRESS press START key Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key Or copying is terminated SIMULATION 50 12 ORIGINAL OFF CENTER ADJUSTMENT NOW COPYING Select 0 and press START key Press START key or press CUSTOME SETTING key SIMULATION 50 12 ORIGINAL OFF CENTER ADJUSTMENT SELECT 1 15 AND PRESS START FEED TRAY Select 2 and press START key 1 TRAY1 2 TRAY2 3 TRAY3 4 TRAYA 5 BPT ABOVE 10 DUPLEX MODE Press START key or Z press CUSTOME SETTING key SIMULATION 50 12 ORIGINAL OFF CENTER ADJUSTMENT MAGNIFICATION INPUT 25 400
158. Y1 2 TRAY2 3 TRAY3 4 TRAY4 5 BPT ABOVE 10 DUPLEX MODE Select 2 and Press START keylor press START key press CUSTOME SETTING key SIMULATION 50 7 LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT SPF CALC MAGNIFICATION INPUT 25 200 100 AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 51 50 10 Purpose Adjustment Function Content Used to adjust the copy image center position Adjusted for each paper feed section Section Image process ICU Item Picture quality Operation Procedure Perform the print off center adjustment 1 The current set value is highlighted on the right of each item In this screen be sure to select 1 COPY START Set value 1 2 Enter the correction value with 10 digit key pad Press P to store the set value 3 When the value of UNIT 0 1mm STEP is increased the image is shifted toward the rear side 4 Press START to start copying and store the set value Display value 1 5 Select a paper feed tray Set value 2 6 Set the scan magnification ratio Set value 3 List of set values 1 SIMULATION 50 10 PRINT OFF CENTER ADJUSTMENT SELECT 0 8 AND PRESS START 0 TRAY SELECT 1 COPY START 2 MAGNIFICATION 5 TRAY3 LCC1 6 TRAY4 LCC2 7 BPT 8 ADU Select other than 0 2 and press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key
159. Yes Yes Yes Output paper size Du E e SE E Sen Different first page Yes Yes N A Yes 8 5 x 11 R 55 x D 5 R TY Transparency inserts Yes Yes N A Yes Executive postal card Monarch 98 x 191 c Paper output Com 10 105 x 241 DL 110 x 220 E MER C5 162 x 229 ISO B5 176 x 250 When an optional PS3 expansion kit is Spec of media for Tracing paper 52 59g m 14 15lbs installed paper output Plain paper 60 128g m 16 34lbs Function PCL5e PS PPD PPD Index paper 176g m 47lbs PCL6 Windows Macintosh Cover paper 205g m 54 55lbs Output tray selection Yes Yes Yes Yes Romani wransparency firm Mail bin Yes Yes Yes Yes Gen paper ot provis Staple Yes Yes Yes Yes Exit tray full detection Provided Offset Yes Yes Yes Yes Punch Yes Yes Yes Yes 2 Specific Function d Graphic 3 When an optional PS3 expansion kit A Printer Function is installed 1 Platform Function PCL5e PS PPD PPD IBM PC AT Include compatible machine l FOLS gt lowe Macintosh Macintosh 680x0 Power Macintosh iMac G3Macintosh Resolution SECH 600 dpi 600 dpi 600 dpi p For Macintosh OS the AR PK1 is required l SC Halftone N A Yes Yes N A 2 Support OS Custom PS Windows 95 98 Me Grapnic mode s Me NA NA Windows NT 4 0 Smoothing Yes Yes Yes Yes Windows 2000 Toner save Yes Yes Yes Yes Mac OS 7 6 to Mac OS 9 Photo enhancement Yes 8 Yes N A N A Custom Windows 95 98 Me Negative image N A Yes Yes Yes eee M b Mirror image N A
160. ac tN 2 L 2 FAX BK L POWER WR FAX sw DCPS N BK DCPR vu WA AR M350 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 9 CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT Danish ADVARSEL Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig h ndtering Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type Lev r det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren English Caution Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer s instructions Finnish VAROITUS Paristo voi r j ht jos se on virheellisesti asennettu Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin H vit k ytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti French ATTENTION Il y a danger d explosion s il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du m me type ou d un type quivalent recommand par le constructeur Mettre au rebut les batteries usag es conform ment aux instructions du fabricant Swedish VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte Anv nd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren Kassera anv nt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion German Achtung Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien Als Ersatzbatterien d rfen nur Batterien vom gl
161. acity trays and their control circuits 5 1 Used to check the operations of the lamps and LCD on the Operation test check Operation Operation operation panel and their control circuits display operation 2 Used to check the operations of the heater lamp and its control Operation test check Fusing Operation circuit 3 Used to check the operations of the copy lamp and its control Operation test check Scanner reading Operation circuit 6 1 Used to check the operation under load clutches and Operation test check Paper transport Operation solenoids in the paper transport system and their control paper exit circuits Switchback transport 2 Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control Operation test check Others Operation circuit 7 1 Used to set the aging conditions Setup Operation 6 Used to set the intermittent aging cycle Setup Operation 8 Used to set Enable Disable of warm up time display Setup Operation AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 1 Code Main Sub Function Content Purpose Section Item 8 1 Used to check and adjust the developing bias voltage in each Adjustment Process OPC drum print mode and its control circuit operation test check developing transfer cleaning 2 Used to check and adjust the main charger grid voltage in each Adjustment Process OPC drum print mode and its contro
162. and detectors in Operation test check DSPF Operation the automatic document feeder unit and their control circuits 3 Used to check the operation under load in the automatic Operation test check DSPF Operation document feeder unit and their control circuits 3 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in Operation test check Finisher Operation the finisher and their control circuits 3 Usedto check the operation under load in the finisher and their Operation test check Finisher Operation control circuits 6 Used to adjust the stacking capacity of the finisher Adjustment Finisher Operation Used to adjust the alignment plate jogger stop position in the finisher paper width direction The adjustment is made by changing the alignment plate home position in the paper width direction by software 10 Used to adjust the console finisher AR FN7 Adjustment Finisher Operation 20 Used to check the mail bin stacker AR MS1 sensor Operation test check Mail bin stacker Operation 21 Used to check the operations of the mail bin stacker loads Operation test check Mail bin stacker Operation 4 2 Usedto check the operations of the sensors and detectors in Operation test check Paper feed Operation the paper feed section desk paper feed large capacity trays and their control circuits 3 Used to check the operation under load in the paper feed Operation test check Paper feed Operation section desk paper feed large cap
163. ansfer cleaning Item SIMULATION 7 8 WARM UP TIME DISPLAY ARE YOU SURE 1 YES 2 NO Press START key to start measuring Press SIMULATION 7 8 WARM UP TIME DISPLAY WARMING UP PLEASE WAIT UNIT sec Warm up ends CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 7 8 WARM UP TIME DISPLAY WARM UP COMPLETED UNIT sec GO Operation Procedure Enter the output value to be adjusted with the 10 digit key pad The current set value is highlighted at the right of each item After entering the value with the 10 digit key pad press the START key The output is made for 30 sec at the set value Then the output is stopped SIMULATION 8 1 DV BIAS SETTING SELECT 1 7 AND PRESS START 1 AUTO 2 CHARACTER 3 MIX 34 PHOTO 6 FAX 7 PLUS 5 PRINTER Press Press CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 8 1 1 AUTO 0 745 DV BIAS SETTING INPUT VALUE AND PRESS START Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key Or after 30sec output SIMULATION 8 1 1 AUTO DV BIAS SETTING EXECUTING lt List of set values gt Default Set range Auto mode 485 0 745 Text mode Text Photo mode Photo mode Printer mode Fax mode jojo A Ol N Reverse developing bias voltage 150 0 255 AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 16 8 2 Purpose Adjustment F
164. arth line to the connector 1 Remove the original paper feed unit side when attaching 2 Remove the paper exit roller gear Note The CIS unit is factory adjusted before shipping Since these adjustments cannot be performed in the market never touch the following screws of the CIS unit j Open sensor 3 1 Remove the open sensor AR M350 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY MAINTENANCE 7 11 m SPF motor o SPF paper feed unit original paper feed solenoid 1 Remove the original paper feed unit SPF original paper feed clutch 2 Remove the SPF drive unit 1 Remove the SPF paper feed unit 2 Remove the SPF paper guide 3 Remove the SPF motor 3 n SPF resist roller SPF resist roller clutch 1 Remove the SPF resist roller unit 4 Remove the original paper feed solenoid and the SPF original paper feed clutch 2 Remove the SPF resist roller and the SPF resist roller clutch 1 9 eo AR M350 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY MAINTENANCE 7 12 8 MACHINE OPERATION 1 Acceptable originals A stack of up to 50 original sheets of the same size paper can be set in the document feeder tray provided the stack height is within the limit shown below A stack of up to 30 mixed size originals can be set if the width of the originals is the same and the sta
165. ble Operation Procedure Select with 10 digit key pad SIMULATION 16 ARE YOU SURE 1 YES 2 NO U2 TROUBLE CANCELLATION List of set values entry menu 1 After canceling U2 trouble the display returns to the main code 2 Without canceling a trouble the display returns to the main code entry menu Maintenance display at 80K Maintenance display at 100K Maintenance display at 120K OO A N No maintenance display AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 19 22 1 Purpose Adjustment setup operation data output check A O DoAAA RESI display Purpose Adjustment setup operation data output check Function Content Used to check the misfeed position and the display number of misfeed at that position Function Content Used to check the print count in each section If the number of misfeed is considerably great and in each operation mode the machine must be repaired Used to check the maintenance timing Sections other than DSPF sections Section Section Item Counter Item Trouble Operation Procedure Data of each counter are displayed Operation Procedure The history of the latest 50 paper jams is displayed Refer to the jam codes below SIMULATION 22 1 COUNTER DATA
166. check the result main charger grid voltage developing bias voltage laser power etc of correction process correction in the image forming section By this simulation the correction operation can be checked Function Content Section Process OPC drum developing transfer cleaning Item Data Operation Procedure The process correction value is checked SIMULATION 44 9 PROCESS CONTROL DATA DISPLAY DRUM ROTATION TIME BEER sec Va BIO Vg2 EM V m Vb2 Kf V LD1 WE mW LD2 SE mW CONTROL DESTINATION EM PTH EN deg TO T4 32 Vb1 1 EW V Vb1 2 EN V List of display values gt DRUM ROTATION TIME Drum rotation time Vg1 Vg2 Grid voltage correction value Vb1 1 1 Vb Developing bias correction value correction value first rotation Vb1 2 1 Vb Developing bias correction value correction value second rotation Vb2 Developing bias correction value Vb3 Developing bias correction value LD1 Laser power correction value LD2 Laser power correction value CONTROL CRUM control spec 1 3 DESTINATION CRUM destination A J PTH 2 Process Thermistor temperature value TO Toner control correction value Rotation time correction 100 T1 Toner control correction value T1 Temperature correction 100 T2 Toner control correction value T2 Temperature correction 100 1 Vb1 1 and Vb1 2 are enable
167. ck height is within the limit shown below In this case however stapling and duplex will not function and some special functions may not give the expected result A Size and weight of acceptable originals 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 or A5 Original size 4 P 11 x 17 or A3 148 x 210 mm 297 x 420 mm et J 14 Ibs or 50g m 34 Ibs or 128g m Weight thickness g m Weight of a sheet of paper of 1 mg B Total amount of originals that can be set in the document feeder tray Total aggregate thickness must not exceed 1 4 or 6 5 mm for 14 to 21 Ibs or 50 to 80 g n paper 1 4 or 6 5 mm or less Total aggregate thickness must not exceed 3 16 or 5 0 mm for 21 to 34 Ibs or 80 to 128 g m paper 3 16 or 5 0 mm or less Notes on use of the automatic document feeder gt Use originals within the specified size and weight ranges Use of originals out of the specified range may cause an original misfeed Before loading originals into the document feeder tray be sure to remove any staples or paper clips elf originals have damp spots from correction fluid ink or glue from pasteups be sure they are dried before they are fed If not the interior of the document feeder or the document glass may be soiled To prevent incorrect original size detection original misfeeds or smudges on copies use the following as a guide for feeding originals Transparen
168. cker AR MS1 Console finisher control PWB trouble power abnormality Check and Use DIAG SIM3 3 to check the motor Detail The 24V power is not supplied to the Mail bin remedy operation stacker PWB 20 Content Console finisher AR FN7 Cause Improper connection or disconnection of rear alignment motor trouble connector and harness Detail Rear alignment motor operation abnormality Mail bin stacker control PWB trouble Cause Motor lock Power unit AR DC1 trouble Motor rpm abnormality Check and Use DIAG SIM3 20 to check the sensor Overcurrent to the motor remedy operation Console finisher control PWB trouble F1 03 Content Console finisher AR FN7 Check and Use DIAG SIM3 3 to check the motor paddle motor trouble remedy operation Detail Paddle motor operation abnormality 30 Content Console finisher AR FN7 Cause Motor lock communication trouble Motor rpm abnormality Detail Communication cable test error after turning Overcurrent to the motor on the power or exiting from DIAG Console finisher control PWB trouble Communication error with the console Check and Use DIAG SIM3 3 to check the motor E remedy operation Cause Improper connection or disconnection of 06 Content Console finisher AR FN7 connector and harness between the machine slide motor trouble and the console finisher Detail Slid i ii b it Console finisher control PWB trouble etai ide motor operation abnormality Control PWB PCU trouble Cause Motor lock Malfunction by
169. control PWB 1 Remove the operation panel unit 2 Remove the operation control PWB 3 Remove the CCD lens unit Note The CCD lens unit is factory adjusted before shipping Since these adjustments cannot be performed in the market Never touch the screws other than screw 2 of the CCD lens unit AR M350 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY MAINTENANCE 7 7 Note for CCD lens unit installation lt 1 gt Adjust the CCD unit adjustment value listed in the table below with the scribed line on the lens base CCD unit adjustment value direction Reference line direction 1 scale 1 4mm CCD adjustment value 4 scales 5 0 3 scales 3 6 4 9 2 scales 2 2 3 5 1 scale 0 8 2 1 Reference 0 6 0 7 1 scale 2 0 0 7 2 scales 3 4 2 1 3 scales 4 8 3 5 4 scales 4 9 lt 2 gt Make a sample copy at the above position and measure the magnification ratio lt 3 gt Change the installing position in the horizontal direction to adjust the magnification ratio When the copy image is longer than the original shift to the positive direction When the copy image is shorter than the original shift to the negative direction 1 scale of the scribed line corresponds to 0 396 of magnification ratio If this adjustment is not satisfactory make a fine
170. ction PID Paper entry detection FTCS Upper cover sensor T2PD __ Tray 2 paper empty detection FFDS Front door sensor T2DN Tray 2 lower limit detection FSPS Self prime sensor T2UP Tray 2 upper limit detection FSUC Stapler connection detection JRHP Jogger RHP FSS Staple sensor JFHP Jogger F HP FSTHPS Stapler HP sensor SCID2 Staple compiler paper entry FSHPS Slide HP sensor detection 2 STTHP2 Staple rotation HP detection2 FLE Lift lock sensor STTHP1 Staple rotation HP detection1 FLLLS Lift lower limit sensor STUHP Staple shift HP detection FULS Liftupper limit sensor PSHP Pusher HP detection FFE Bookbinding clock sensor PPD Paper hold return detection FFES Bookbinding paper sensor DSW2 Staple replacement door open FFRHPS Bookbinding roller HP sensor detection DSW1 Compilerjam cancel door open FFHPS Bookbinding HP sensor detection 24VM 24V power supply FFPS Bookbinding position sensor T1PF Tray 1 full detection FSLS Paper surface sensor STSP Stapling ready detection FBES Tray paper sensor STLS Cartridge inside spare staple FOBHPS Paper exit belt HP sensor empty detection GING Cartridge empty detection FAS Alignment tray sensor DOPD Interface unit door open FRJHPS Alignment HP sensor R detection MMLK Main drive motor lock detection FFJHPS Alignment HP sensor F SCPD Staple compiler paper empty FARHPS Bundle roller HP sensor detection FPHPS Paddle HP sensor FES Entry port se
171. cution is 13 72 V34 29 10 3 V21 stopped 14 4 8 V34 30 ANSam Enter a number and press START to change the 15 24 V34 31 RINGER signal 16 14 4 V33 32 No RBT SIMULATION 66 4 SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK LEVEL MAX SELECT 1 32 AND PRESS START 1 NOSIGNAL 2 33 6 V34 3 31 2 V34 4 28 8 V34 5 26 4 V34 6 24 0 V34 7 21 6 V34 8 19 2 V34 9 16 8 V34 10 14 4 V34 11 12 0 V34 12 9 6 V34 13 7 2 V34 14 4 8 V34 15 2 4 V34 16 14 4 V33 17 12 0 V33 18 14 4 V17 19 12 0V17 20 9 6 V17 21 7 2V17 22 9 6 V29 23 7 2V29 24 4 8 V27t 25 2 4 V27t 26 0 3 FLG 27 CED 2100 28 CNG 1100 Y 29 0 3 V21 30 ANSam 31 RINGER 32 No RBT Press START key CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 66 4 SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK LEVEL MAX SELECT 1 32 AND PRESS START EXECUTING 1 NOSIGNAL 2 33 6 V34 3 31 2 V34 4 28 8 V34 5 26 4 V34 6 24 0 V34 7 21 6 V34 8 19 2 V34 Same 9 16 8V34 10 14 4 V34 11 12 0 V34 12 9 6 V34 display 13 7 2 V34 14 4 8V34 15 244 V34 16 14 4 V33 17 12 0 V33 18 14 4 V17 19 12 0 V17 20 9 6 V17 21 7 20V17 22 9 6V29 23 7 2V29 244 8 V27t 25 24 V27t 26 0 3 FLG 27 CED 2100 28 CNG 1100 29 0 3 V21 30 ANSam 31 RINGER 32 No RBT posvet EE Select 2 and press START key SIMULATION 66 4 SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK LEVEL MAX SELECT 1 32 AND PRESS START EXECUTING 1 NOSIGNAL 2 33 6 V34 3 31 2 V34 4 28 8 V34 5 26 4 V34 6 24 0 V34 7 21 6 V34 8 19 2 V34 9 16 8 V34 10 14 4 V34
172. cy film tracing paper carbon paper thermal paper or originals printed with thermal transfer ink ribbon should not be fed through the document feeder Originals to be fed through the feeder should not be damaged crumpled or folded or have loosely pasted paper on them or cutouts in them Originals with multiple punched holes other than two hole or three hole punched paper may not feed correctly When using originals with two or three holes place them so that the punched edge is at a position other than the feed slot Hole positions Hole positions o ens v 2 Standard original setting orientation Descriptions of functions that follow in this manual assume that originals are oriented as shown Place originals in the document feeder tray or on the document glass so that the top of the original is positioned to the rear side of the machine If not staples will be incorrectly positioned and some special features may not give the expected result Top Bottom 3 Automatic copy image rotation rotation copying If the orientation of the originals and copy paper are different the original image will be automatically rotated 90 and copied When an image is rotated a message will be displayed When enlargement of originals larger than 8 1 2 x 11 or A4 is selected rotation cannot be done Example Orientation of original Orientation of paper Copy after rotatior
173. d 2 Not cleared SIMULATION 24 11 TIMER DATA CLEAR 1 DRUM ROTATION 2 DV ROTATION CARTRIDGE 3 TONER SUPPLY CARTRIDGE SELECT 1 3 AND PRESS START CARTRIDGE Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key r START key o SIMULATION 24 11 ARE YOU SURE 1 YES 2 NO DRUM ROTATION COUNTER DATA CLEAR List of set values SEND TIME Time for sending 1 Drum rotating time cartridge OO A Po RECEIVE TIME Time for reception 2 Developing unit rotating time cartridge 3 Toner supply time cartridge 24 15 Purpose Data clear Function Content Used to clear each counter in the scanner mode Section Item Counter Operation Procedure Select with 10 digit key pad and press START key The procedure below is executed and the display returns to the original state 1 Counter is cleared 2 Not cleared SIMULATION 24 15 NETWORK SCANNE 1 NETWORK SCANN 2 MAIL COUNTER 3 FTP COUNTER R COUNTER CLEAR SELECT 1 3 AND PRESS START ER ORIGINAL COUNTER Al Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key r START key o SIMULATION 24 15 ARE YOU SURE 1 YES 2 NO NETWORK SCANNER ORIGINAL COUNTER DATA CLEAR lt List of set values gt 1 Document scan counter in the network scanner mode 2 Number of times of
174. d DIS mE oe GND2 Vss 6 15 GND2 Vss SOFMZ BT 30FMN BTK CP2 5 18 CP2 XH 4 XH GND2 Vss 4 17 GND2 Vss NL 29 2 NL CP1 3 8 CP1 XL 2 3 XL LCD M 2 19 LCD M Ve 27 SS ICDS 20LCDS CCFT 2 5 CCFT 324V 2 6 24V GND2 2 7 GND2 TH 2 SIT LVDS GND2 2 9 GND2 LcdD3 21 10 LcdD3 PWB LedD3 E hfis LcdD2 49 LeaD2 CNS LcdD2 48 13 LedD2 FEC 4PIN O4FM 1 0ST LcdD1 17 14 LodD1 NL 4 Tt LcdD1 1 18 LcdD1 XH 3 2 XH LcdDO 1 18 LodDo YH 2 3 YH LcdD0 1 17 LedDO IXL 1 4 IXL LVDVEE f 18 LVD VEE LCD VCC f 19 LCD VCC LcdDIS 1 20 LcdDIS GND2 4 ET GND2 LcdCP2 9 22 LcdCP2 LcdCP2 8 23 LcdCP2 CN3 GND2 7 24 GND2 S3B PH K S B3B PH K S oer 5 25 Led CPT 24V 1 1 24V LcdCP1 5 28 LcdCP1 NC 2 2 NC LcdM 4 27 LcdM ICCFT 3 3 CCFT LedMr 3 28 Lcd LcdS 2 2d LcdS LcdS 1 3d LedS ON CNS T24FAZ SM TF 24FMN BTK T NC 2 1 NO HR 6 B68 PH SM3 TB NC 2 2 NC y BR TPDSELO BZR 2 3 BZR 2 LB gt PDSEL1 NC 21 4 NC 3 PLUS PDSEL2 FRDY 29 SI FRDY A BLH sy GND2 19 16 GND2 5 BR PD GND2 1 7 GND2 6 S 6 GND2 GND2 17 8 GND2 TF3 1 IS MEP Fi ri OPE IFO 1 12 IFO SEG2 1 13 SEG2 PWB SEG1 11 14 SEG1 SEGO 40 118 SEGO IKEYIN 9 18 KEYIN 5V 8 17 5V 35V 7 18 55V GND2 6 19 GND2 PD 5 2d PD 5V 4 21 5V PDSEL2 3 22 PDSEL2 PDSEL1 2 23 PDSEL1 PDSELO 1 24 PDSELO
175. d clutch signal 21 2 MSS Manual paper feed gate solenoid 1 Displayed when OPTION of multi purpose only 2 Displayed when manual feed OPTION is added AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 14 6 2 Main code 7 Purpose Operation test check 7 1 Function Content Used to check the operations of each fan motor Een and its control circuit Purpose Setup Section Others Function Content Used to set the aging conditions Item Operation Section Operation Procedure Select with 10 digit key pad Item Operation SIMULATION 6 2 FAN MOTOR CHECK SELECT 1 2 AND PRESS START 1 FMHi 2 FMLo Press START key to get started Press SIMULATION 6 2 FAN MOTOR CHECK SELECT 1 2 AND PRESS START 1 FMHi 2 FMLo lt List of set values gt Fan motor high speed Fan motor low speed Operation Procedure Select with 10 digit key pad SIMULATION 7 1 AGING TEST SETTING SELECT 0 36 AND PRESS START 0 NO MISS FEED DETECTION AGING NO MISS FEED DETECTION AGING NO MISS FEED DETECTION NO WARM UP NO TEMPERATURE CONTROL 4 NO WARM UP AGING INTERVAL AGING INTERVAL NO MISS FEED DETECTION 10 NO PROCESS UNIT CHECK 20 NO SHADING 30 NO PROCESS UNIT CHECK NO SHADING GUI Oa Press START key to register The operation mode is kep
176. d or disabled by SIM 44 1 Vb1 setup 2 When PTH is set to 0 with SIM 44 4 the detected value in this adjustment is displayed If PTH is set to other than 0 the value set with SIM 44 4 is displayed AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 35 List of set values 1 0 TRAY SELECT 1 COPY START 2 EXP LEVEL 3 AE 3 0 m 4 CH 3 0 5 MIX 3 0 6 PHOTO 3 0 Select other than 0 2 and press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key mine L mine SIMULATION 46 2 EXP LEVEL SETUP 2 INPUT VALUE 0 99 AND PRESS START 3 AE 3 0 Select 1 and I Press START key press STARTIKSY l It 5 ess CUSTOM SETTING Key Or copying is terminated SIMULATION 46 2 EXP LEVEL SETUP 2 NOW COPYING Select 0 and Press START key or press START IKOy press CUSTOME SETTING key SIMULATION 46 2 EXP LEVEL SETUP 2 SELECT 1 5 AND PRESS START FEED TRAY 1 TRAY1 2 TRAY2 3 TRAY3 4 TRAY4 5 BPT Select 2 and Press START key or press START key press CUSTOME SETTING key SIMULATION 46 2 EXP LEVEL SETUP 2 SELECT 3 6 AND PRESS START EXP LEVEL SELECT 3 AE3 0 4 CH 3 0 5 MIX 3 0 6 PHOTO 3 0 Main code 46 O Paper feed tray selection 1 Copy sta
177. d paper drawer N AC inlet cover Screw 8 Connect the AC cord of the power supply unit to the main unit of the printer Connect the AC cord of the power supply unit to the outlet connector of the main unit of the printer at the location shown in the illustration AR M350 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6 4 C Setting related to process D Toner cartridge settings 1 Open the left door and the front door 1 Remove a new toner cartridge from the package and shake it horizontally five or six times 2 2 Insert a new toner cartridge Push the cartridge in until it locks securely into place 3 3 4 4 While rotating the MG roller supply developer into the developer cartridge evenly B Note Before opening the developer seal shake it 4 or 5 times 5 Attach the top cover to the developer cartridge and install the cartridge to the machine AR M350 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6 5 E Setting related to fusing 5 AR EF1 AR RK1 1 Put down the right and the left levers of the fusing unit in the arrow Before installation direction For installation an MFP control board AR M11 is needed Parts included for the rack Cam A securing screw rr Es M3 x 12 1 pc Racks A Shaft 2 pcs 1 pc Parts included in the scanner unit me x 999 Screws M4 x 8 8 pcs 9 9 Rack sheet 1 sheet Racks B Screws M3 x 6 Scr
178. data output check PPD1NT2 PPD1 not reaching jam Machine tray 2 feed paper Fun display ber orgia mistesd and PPDIND1 PPD1 not reaching jam Desk tray 1 feed paper unction Content Used to check the num er of tota misfeed an PPDiND2 PPDi notreaching jam Desk tray 2 feed paper troubles If the number of misfeed is m considerably great the machine must be PPD1NTD PPD1 not reaching jam Tandem desk feed paper repaired The misfeed rate is obtained by PPD1NAD PPD1 notreaching jam ADU refeed paper dividing this count by the total counter value PPD1SMF PPD 1 remaining jam Manual feed tray feed paper Section Tubi PPD1ST1 PPD1 remaining jam Machine tray 1 feed paper em rouble Operation Procedure The numbers of times of paper jam SPF jam idi iis PEDI romamng jam Machine tray 2 Teed papan and troubles are displayed PPD1SD1 PPD1 remaining jam Desk tray 1 feed paper SIMULATION 22 2 PPD1STD PPD1 remaining jam Tandem desk feed paper Eu ue nM PPD1SAD PPD1 remaining jam ADU refeed paper TROUBLE PPD1PRI PPD1 jam Image ready is not supplied from ICU POD1N POD1 not reaching jam POD1S POD1 remaining jam POD2N POD2 not reaching jam aid ot display valdes POD2SR POD remaining jam PAPER JAM Number of times of paper jam When discharging to the right side of machine SPF JAM Number of times of SPF jam POD2SL POD2 remaining jam TROUBLE Number of times
179. de to be set is selected Text Photo mode 1 The current set value is highlighted on the right side of each item In this screen be sure to select 1 COPY START Set value 1 2 Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad Press P to store the set value Default 50 set range 0 99 3 Press START and copying is started and the set value is stored Display value 1 4 Select a paper feed tray Set value 2 5 Select an exposure level Set value 3 Select 1 and press START key Select 0 and press START key Selec press SIMULATION 46 10 EXP LEVEL SETUP a 2 SELECT 0 11 AND PRESS START 2 EXP LEVEL af 3 1 0 BU 4 15 EE 5 20 EN 6 2 5 EU 7 30 Eu 8 35 50 50 9 4 0 10 45 EM 11 5 0 Select other ad 0 2 and press START Key P ess CUSTOM SETTING key 0 TRAY SELECT 1 COPY START mme SIMULATION 46 10 EXP LEVEL SETUP MIX 2 INPUT VALUE 0 99 AND PRESS START Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key Or copying is terminated SIMULATION 46 10 EXP LEVEL SETUP MIX 2 NOW COPYING Press START key press CUSTOME SETTING ke d m e TEE SIMULATION 46 10 EXP LEVEL SETUP MIX 2 SELECT 1 5 AND PRESS START FEED TRAY 1 TRAY1 2 TRAY2 3 TRAY3 4 TRAY4 5 BPT 2 and Press START key or E START key p
180. detection 4 paper rear edge sensor 4 DCSS13 Desk cassette 1 MCSS3 MP tray size detection 3 lt List of set values gt paper rear edge sensor 3 1 Main motor DCSS12 Desk cassette 1 MCSS2 MP tray size detection 23 2 Gate solenoid 1 paper rear edge sensor 2 3 Gate solenoid 2 DCSS11 Desk cassette 1 MCSS1 MP tray size detection 1 4 Gate solenoid 3 paper rear edge sensor 1 5 Gate solenoid 4 DLUD1 Desk cassette 1 MCSPD MP tray remaining quantity 6 Gate solenoid 5 upper limit sensor detection EE DPED1 Desk cassette 1 MCLUD MP tray upper limit 8 Gate solenoid 7 paper sensor detection DPFD2 Desk paper transport MCPED MP tray paper empty sensor 2 detection MCSS4 MP tray size detection 4 TPFD1 MP tray transport detection AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 12 3 tray desk LCC MCSS3 MP tray size detection 3 Main code 5 MCSS2 MP tray size detection 2 MCSS1 MP tray size detection 1 D MCSPD MP tray remaining quantity Purpose Operation test check detection Function Content Used to check the operations of the lamps and MCLUD MP tray upper limit LCD on the operation panel and their control detection circuits MCPED MP tray paper empty Section Operation display operation detection Item Operation DPFDi MP tray transport detection Operation Procedure All LEDs are ON
181. dual adjustment The current set value is highlighted on the right of each item Set value 2 Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad Press P to store the set value Default 50 set range 0 99 The set value is changed only and printing is not performed SIMULATION 46 22 START 0 AUTO BJ 1 LIGH EXP LEVEL SETUP SCANNER NORMAL SELECT 0 2 AND PRESS T EN 2 DARK Select 0 2 and press START key Press START keyjor CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 46 22 0 AUTO EXP LEVEL SETUP SCANNER NORMAL INPUT VALUE 0 99 AND PRESS START Set value O Auto 1 Bright 2 Dark The set value is ch anged only and printing is not performed SIMULATION 46 23 0 AUTO 50 3 AUTO H E EXP LEVEL SETUP SCANNER FINE SELECT 0 5 AND PRESS START 50 2 DARK Ef 5 DARK H El 1 LIGHT 4 LIGHT H Bl W Select 0 5 and press START key Press START key o CUSTOM SETTING key 2 SIMULATION 46 23 AND PRESS START EXP LEVEL SETUP SCANNER FINE INPUT VALUE 0 99 0 AUTO lt Set value gt 0 Auto 3 Auto half tone 1 Bright 4 Bright Half tone 2 Dark 5 Dark Half tone 46 24 Purpose Adjustment setup operation data output check display print Function Content Used to adjust the scanner exposure level and
182. dure Select with 10 digit key pad The lamp repeat ON OFF every 500ms 5 times SIMULATION 5 2 1 HL1 LOWER 2 HL2 UPPER HEATER LAMP TEST SELECT 1 2 AND PRESS START H Press START key to get started Press CUSTOM SETTING key to stop Repeats specified times and stops SIMULATION 5 2 1 HL1 LOWER 2 HL2 UPPER HEATER LAMP TEST EXECUTING a lt List of set values gt 1 Heater lamp 1 Lower 2 Heater lamp 2 Upper AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 13 5 3 Main code 6 Purpose Operation test check 6 1 Function Content Used to check the operations of the copy lamp and its control circuit ooo AA AQ a Q eiASOL eIwLLAAG APUSERQQCEOEALEAEZZZIAZOLVLCOAII Purpose Operation test check Section Scanner reading DSPF reading Item Operation Operation Procedure The copy lamp or CIS is lighted for 10sec and turned off CIS is displayed only when DSPF is installed SIMULATION 5 3 1 COPY LAMP 2 CIS COPY LAMP TEST SELECT 1 2 AND PRESS START Press START key to get started Press CUSTOM SETTING key to stop Stops after 10sec SIMULATION 5 3 1 COPY LAMP 2 CIS COPY LAMP TEST EXECUTING Function Content Used to check the operation under load clutches and solenoids in the paper transport System and their control circuits Sec
183. dy sensor detection remedy motor operation Use DIAG SIM4 3 to check the lift up motor Check connector and harness connection operation Replace LSU 10 Content Desk CC transport motor trouble L8 01 Content No fullwave signal Detail Desk LCC transport motor operation trouble Detail Full wave signal is not detected Cause Motor lock Cause The PCU PWB connector or the power unit Motor rpm abnormality harness is disconnected or broken Overcurrent to the motor PCU PWB trouble Desk control PWB trouble Power unit trouble Check and Use DIAG SIM4 3 to check the transport Check and Check connection of the harness and remedy motor operation remedy connector Replace PCU PWB Replace the power unit 02 Content Full wave signal width abnormality Detail It is judged as full wave signal frequency abnormality When the detection cycle is judged as 69Hz or above or 42 5Hz or below Cause The connector or harness of the PCU PWB and the power PWB is disconnected PCU PWB trouble Power unit trouble Check and Check connection of the harness and remedy connector Replace the PCU PWB Replace the power unit AR M350 TROUBLE CODES 11 8 MAIN SUB MAIN SUB EE EL Content Auto developer adjustment trouble U2 00 Content EEPROM read write error Controller Over toner Detail EEPROM
184. e anti curling Machine right side paper exit counter Toner concentration temperature correction high temperature side toner control delay time CE mark conforming operation mode Multi purpose width adjustment value Maintenance cycle Manual feed width adjustment value Print stop setup at developer life over Heater lamp temperature center normal control Saddle alignment operation priority mode Lead edge adjustment Lead edge void set value Rear edge void set value Side edge setup Print off center adjustment value Resist quantity adjustment value Laser power adjustment value PPD1 sensor adjustment Process correction inhibit allow setup value Developing bias rising correction wait time Developing bias rising correction adjustment value Built in finisher jogger position adjustment Saddle adjustment value AR M350 MACHINE OPERATION 8 2 2 Adjustment values saved in SCANNER Counters Adjustment values Others Scan counter Original lead edge adjustment value Exposure mode setup value SPF paper pass counter Original off center adjustment value Serial number SPF stamp counter Original image loss quantity adjustment value Magnification ratio adjustment value SPF resist quantity adjustment value Exposure motor speed adjustment value Platen original detection adjustment value
185. e Process Half tone reproduction Equivalent to 256 levels Exposure adjustment Light Auto Dark D Copy function Quality selection Half tone ON OFF Resolution Normal 200x200dpi Fine 300x300dpi Super fine 400x400dpi Ultra fine 600x600dpi Varies with the file type transmission method 6 Original Memory Standard Commonly use ERDH area of memory Memory expansion Special As per ERDH memory 7 Specified Destination Specified destination Specifying by one touch or group One touch Max 500 destinations in conjunction with the one touch dial of FAX Max 100 destinations can be registered for FTP and Desktop Group To be registered in one touch Program O 8 Specified Multiple Destinations Specified destination Specifying by one touch or group No of registration Max 300 items in conjunction with those of FAX 1 Copy Speed AR M350 AR M450 Actual Reduction Enlargement Actual Reduction Enlargement A4 35 35 35 45 45 45 8 5 x11 A4R 25 25 25 30 30 30 8 5 x11 R ABR 35 35 35 45 45 45 5 5 x8 5 R Invoice R B5 35 35 35 45 45 45 B5R 25 25 25 30 30 30 Exective R B4 20 20 20 22 22 22 8 5 x14 A3 17 17 17 20 20 20 11 x17 Extra 17 17 17 20 20 20 Envelope Japan P C In case of printing on post card engine speed can vary with system configurat
186. e adjustment value is stored in the machine Check that the mode was normally completed Normal end The data LED goes off Abnormal end The error LED lights up Remove the cause of the error and execute the automatic developer adjustment again 8 Turn off on the power and the machine returns to the normal mode and enters the warm up mode 7 Adjustment of distortion Since adjustment was made at the shipment any additional adjustment is not needed basically If distortion occurs as shown in the illustration however perform the adjustment by following the procedure below 1 Use a level meter to check that the scanner unit is installed on a horizontal surface Make a copy If distortion occurs as shown in Fig 1 or Fig 2 loosen the cam A securing screw M3 x 12 to perform the adjustment Fig 1 First copy image Copy paper Difference In case of Fig 1 Move cam A in the direction of A by the difference of the image As a guide for the amount of movement the image moves 0 5 mm by one division one groove of cam movement After the movement tighten the cam A securing screw M3 x 12 and make a copy again to check that the copy image is not distorted Fig 2 First copy image In case of Fig 2 Move cam A in the direction of B by the difference of the image As a guide for the amount of movement the image moves 0 5 mm by one division one groove of cam movement After the movement tight
187. e detection 3 Z E MCSS4 Multi purpose tray size detection 4 SIMULATION 40 2 Multi Purpose The detected size of MPT width is displayed BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT Tray width size A4 A3 11x B5 B4 8 5x A4R B5R A5R 5 5x 7 25x POSITION 2 COMPLETE or ERROR EXTRA When 4 is selected E press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 40 2 BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT MIN POSITION COMPLETE or ERROR AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 32 40 12 Main code 41 Purpose Operation test check 41 1 Function Content Used to adjust the width detection level of the multi purpose tray paper width detector ss AALAAG OGAEORSLLSSSOBLCALGLESALLLLLLSSGLLLLLSSLEB CALELRILLAELLLLDRSQIGLLNUPECOL MBBR Purpose Operation test check Section Paper feed Item Operation Operation Procedure The multi purpose tray size is adjusted 1 Extend the guide to the MAX position Select 1 and press START When COMPLETE is displayed press CUSTOM SETTING to return to the initial screen 2 Move the guide to MIN position Select 2 and press START When COMPLETE is displayed the adjustment is completed If ERROR is displayed in procedures 1 2 repeat the adjustment again SIMULATION 40 12 MULTI PURPOSE TRAY ADJUSTMENT SELECT 1 2 AND PRESS ac 73 When 1 is selected 1 MAX POSITION press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key 2 MIN POSITION O SIMULATION 40 12 MULT
188. e list of adjustments and setup data simulations FAX soft switches counters Function Content Used to check the number of times the staple and scanner reading unit were used Section Section Item Data Item Counter Operation Procedure the selected data is displayed on the menu box Operation Procedure The counter data below are displayed SIMULATION 22 6 DATA PRINT MODE SELECT SETTING AND PRESS START 0 TRAY SELECT AUTO ONLY 1 PRINT START When 1 is selected press START key SIMULATION 22 8 ORG STAPLE COUNTER DATA DISPLAY SCAN STAPLER STAMP List of display value List of display values 1 PRINT START SIMULATION 22 6 SPF Number of times of document feed DATA PRINT MODE EXECUTING SCAN Number of times of scan OTRAV BELEGT i EH STAPLER Number of times of stapling PUNCH Number of times of punching STAMP Number of times of SPF finish stamp O TRAY SELECT auto only no selection 22 9 pr Purpose Adjustment setup operation data output check 22 7 display e Function Content Used to check the number of times Purpose User data output check display print quantity of each paper feed section Function Content Used to display the key operator code Section Paper feed Used when the cu
189. e original menu 3 Measure the black distance at the lead edge and the rear edge of the 4 Place an A3 or WLT original on the table glass and select 2 and press START key copy paper When COMPLETE is displayed on the LCD the adjustment has been completed SIMULATION 41 3 PD SENSOR DATA DISPLAY OCSW PD1 128 200 PD2 128 200 PD3 128 50 PD4 128 52 PD5 128 51 PD6 128 50 Lb PD7 128 52 La Paper exit direction q ERRE AA La Lead edge black background section Lb Rear edge black background section If La Lb the procedures 4 through 7 are not required After completion of adjustment press the document detection light emitting unit down with your fingers completely to the bottom and release it Check that the document detection light emitting unit a moves up smoothly lt Specification gt 4 Loosen the fixing screw of the front or the rear frame mirror base drive pulley elf La lt Lb turn the rear frame mirror base drive pulley in direction B Do not move the mirror base drive pulley shaft elf La gt Lb turn the rear frame mirror base drive pulley in direction A Do not move the mirror base drive pulley shaft Rear side Adjust screw Front side ZA Specification Adjustment position Original size detection photo sensor COMPLETE SIM 41 2 adjustment G Orignal size detection photo sensor check 1 Execute SIM 41 1 2 Put A
190. ecting cable 9 Attach the output tray Attach the output tray to the scanner unit as shown in the illustration Output tray AR M350 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6 7 If another peripheral device must be installed carry out the following step at the end of the installation work 6 Automatic developer adjustment 1 Attach the cabinets which were removed 2 Close the left door At that time keep the front door open Note The automatic developer adjustment must be performed by entering the simulation mode with the front door open If the power is turned off with the front door closed warm up is performed to supply toner to the developing unit As a result the reference toner density cannot be obtained 3 Insert the power plug into the power outlet 4 Switch to the copy mode and press P C 2 5 gt START gt 2 gt START and the machine will enter the simulation mode AUTOMATIC DV AD 5 Close the front door LCD Display SIMULATION 25 2 AUTOMATIC DV ADJUSTMENT PRESS START Press CUSTOM SETTING kel to stop Or stop after 2min Press START key SIMULATION 25 2 AUTOMATIC DV ADJUSTMENT EXECUTING 6 Press the START key and the automatic developer adjustment will be performed During execution of the automatic developer adjustment the data LED blinks and the LCD indicates the toner sensor value 7 After about 2 min th
191. ed Section Fax Item Operation Operation Procedure Read write from Flash Memory AR MM9 to SRAM is performed SIMULATION 66 20 ARE YOU SURE SRAM BACK UP READ FROM FLASH ROM 1 YES 2 NO Press START key SIMULATION 66 20 SRAM BACK UP READ FROM FLASH ROM EXCUTING E After completion of reading lt Set value gt 1 Read Write executed 2 Read write not executed 66 21 Purpose Adjustment setup operation data output check display print Function Content Used to print the FAX information registrations communication management file management system errors Only when FAX is installed Section Fax ltem Data Operation Procedure Information related to FAX is printed 1 Select information to be printed 2 The selected information is printed 3 The paper size is automatically selected by the size stored in the image memory SIMULATION 66 21 FAX INFORMATION 1 REGISTERED 5 PROTOCOL 3 FILE MANAGEMENT PRINT OUT SELECT 1 5 AND PRESS START 4 SYSTEM ERROR E Select 0 and press START key If there is no data to be printed the display returns to the initial state 2 MANAGEMENT EN SIMULATION 66 21 FAX INFORMATION 1 REGISTERED PRINT OUT EXECUTING L After completion of printing lt List of set values gt
192. eichen Typ oder vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL For USA CANADA Contains lithium ion battery Must be disposed of properly Remove the battery from the product and contact federal or state environmental agencies for information on recycling and disposal options SHARP COPYRIGHT O 2001 BY SHARP CORPORATION All rights reserved Printed in Japan No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without prior written permission of the publisher Trademark acknowledgments Windows and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S A and other countries IBM and PC AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation PCL is a trademark of Hewlett Packard Company Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners SHARP CORPORATION Digital Document System Group Quality amp Reliability Control Center Yamatokoriyama Nara 639 1186 Japan 2001 May Printed in Japan N
193. en all four marks are pressed the adjustment is completed SIMULATION 65 1 65 2 Purpose Adjustment setup operation data output check display print Function Content Used to check the result of the touch panel LCD display section detecting position adjustment The coordinates are displayed Section Operation display operation Item Operation Procedure Check the touch panel When the touch panel is pressed the coordinates dot conversion values in X Y directions are displayed SIMULATION 65 2 100 200 E wi 180 401 500 600 LES Section Operation display operation Section Fax Item Item Operation Procedure Adjust the coordinates of the touch panel Operation Procedure Set the Fax soft switch For details of the soft SW refer to the AR FX5 Service Manual Entry of 1 8 only is effective 1 Specify the bit to be changed highlighted with a number 2 Press START to rewrite the setting SIM 1 cannot be changed with this simulation SIMULATION 66 1 FAX SOFT SW SELECT 2 80 AND PRESS START Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key r START key o SIMULATION 66 1 SOFT SW 2 FAX SOFT SW SETTING INPUT DATA No 1 8 AND PRESS START 12345678 00001001 AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 60 66 2 66 3 Pur
194. en factored into calculation resulting in reduced CPM 4 Continuous Copy Max multiple number 999 pages 5 Copy Ratio Copy ratio AB series 25 70 81 86 100 115 122 141 400 Inch series 25 64 77 100 121 129 400 Zoom 25 400 25 200 Copy from DSPF Independent Not provided scaling 6 Exposure Copy Quality Process Exposure mode Binary Text auto manual Text photo Photo 256 levels Not provided Manual steps 9 steps Smoothing Standard Toner save mode Standard AR M350 SPECIFICATIONS 3 4 7 Copy Function Function APS O AMS O Paper type select O By type setting Auto tray switching O Rotation copy O Electronic sort O Rotation sort X Reserved copy O Prior tray setting X Recall register of program O Proof copy X Preheat function O To be set up by key operator Auto power shut off function O To be set up by the key operator program Account control O 100 accounts Communication support RIC O Card counter support Only provided the connector Coin vendor support Only provided the connector Special function Margin shift Edge erase Center erase Dual page copying Covers Transparency insert Centering Multi shot N in 1 2 in 1 4 in 1 Pamphlet copy 2 sided copy orientation change Large capacity
195. en it is detected SIMULATION 30 1 SENSOR CHECK PPD1 POD1 POD2 Eis DvcrRUin PRCRUin PSA DSWF List of display values PPD1 Resist roller front paper detection POD1 Fusing rear transport detection 1 POD2 Fusing rear transport detection 2 PODS Paper full detection DVCRUin DV unit version detection PRCRUin Process unit version detection DSWL Cabinet open detection DSWF Machine front door 30 2 Purpose Operation test check Function Content Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed section and their control circuits The operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed section can be monitored on the LCD display Section Paper feed Item Operation Operation Procedure Then sensors of the machine paper feed tray are checked The sensor name is highlighted when it is detected SIMULATION 30 2 TRAY SENSOR CHECK CSS1 PEDLUD Wes MCDRS MCPPD MCLUD MCPED MCSPD MCSS1 MCSS2 MCSS3 MCSS4 MP Tray size BEI MaS MPED MPLD MPLS1 MPLS2 Bypass Tray size E lt List of display values gt Section Paper feed Item Operation Operation Procedure The sensors of the manual feed tray are checked The sensor name is highlighted when it is detected SIMULATION 40 1 BYPASS TRAY SENSOR CHECK MAE MPLS1 MPLS2 Bypass Tray width size RW List of display va
196. en the cam A securing screw M3 x 12 and make a copy again to check that the copy image is not distorted AR M350 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6 8 8 AR M11 Before installation For installation of AR M11 a scanner module is needed Start installation after checking that the DATA and COMMUNICATION indicators on the operation panel are neither lit nor blinking 1 Turn off the main switch of the main unit of the printer Turn the main switch located on the front side of the main unit to the OFF position Then remove the power plug from the outlet pe 2 Remove the cables connected to the printer control PWB unit Remove all the cables connected to the printer control PWB unit from the computer Se Centronics cable 3 Remove the printer control PWB unit Remove the five screws that fix the printer control PWB unit to the main unit of the printer Then hold the two grips and pull out the printer control PWB to remove it from the main unit Screws Screws 4 Move the optional boards to the MFP control PWB Remove the print server card the HDD PWB the expansion memory the PS Kanji font ROM and the E2PROM from the removed printer control PWB unit and mount them to the positions of the MFP control PWB unit shown in the illustration MFP control PWB unit Extended memory PS Kanji font ROM HDD PWB Print server card PWB d fixing screw q S9 Y e Installation of print server
197. er paper drawer not allowed AR D13 AR Did TIT 2 Standard Category Model Other options required for the installation mounting Remarks Name Options must be ordered separately Printer model 35ppm AR P350 Multi Purpose Drawer AR MU1 or Stand MPD amp 2000 Sheet Paper Drawer AR D13 or Three Printer model 45ppm AR P450 paper drawer stand AR D14 Power Supply Unit AR DC1 is required for Stand MPD amp 2000 Sheet Paper Drawer AR D13 and Three paper drawer stand AR D14 MFP model 35ppm AR M350 MFP model 45ppm AR M450 B W Scanner module DSPF AR EF1 Standard Scanner Rack AR RK1 Standard Stand MPD amp 2000 sheet paper drawer AR D13 or Three paper drawer stand AR D14 Power supply unit AR DC1 AR M350 CONFIGURATION 2 1 3 List of combination of peripheral devices As shown in the table below some other peripheral devices B may be needed for installation of a peripheral device A and some peripheral devices cannot be installed together B W scanner module DSPF Duplex module bypass tray Duplex module Saddle stitch finisher Finisher Mail bin stacker Upper exit tray extension Print server card PS3 expansion kit Network scanner expansion kit Facsimile expansion kit Fax memory 8 MB Hard disk drive Punch unit O O Multi function controller board Exit tray Related for scanner feature B W scanner module DSPF 3 AR EF
198. ertical image distortion balance adjustment Vertical image distortion balance adjustment Vertical sub scanning direction distortion adjustment Original detection light emitting unit height adjustment Original size detection photo sensor check Original size detection photo sensor adjustment 1 Process section A High voltage output adjustment 1 Developing bias output check and setup 1 Remove the rear cabinet to allow checking of the high voltage monitor output pin 2 Execute the simulation of the target high voltage See the table below 3 Select the mode to be set with 10 key and press START key 4 Enter the set value with 10 key and press START key The set value is outputted for 30 sec 5 Apply a high voltage tester between the measurement pin and the frame Note Take care not to short the measuring pin and the frame D SPF hinge height adjustment D SPF hinge diagonal adjustment Front Scan magnification ratio adjustment OC scan lead edge adjustment Original off center adjustment Image density adjustment o z zim x e Ir o nmn m o o w gt o w gt DSPF width detection adjustment Default Set range Measurement High voltage Monitor output Set value pin probe voltage impedance MC grid MAIN GRID SIM 8 2 AUTO AE mode 650V 5V 645 200 9
199. essage 14 MESSAGE12 MESSAGE12 Press CUSTOMSETTING to terminate 15 MESSAGE13 MESSAGE13 16 MESSAGE14 MESSAGE 14 SIMULATION 66 9 17 MESSAGE15 MESSAGE15 11 gt MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK SOFT SW SELECT 1 20 AND PRESS 18 ALARM ALARM S START a 19 RINGER RINGER S 1 NONE 2 PAUSE 3 MESSAGE1 EE 4 MESSAGE2 5 MESSAGE3 6 MESSAGE4 20 EXTTEL RINGER EXT TEL RINGER 7 MESSAGE5 8 MESSAGE6 9 MESSAGE7 10 MESSAGE8 11 MESSAGE9 12 MESSAGE10 13 MESSAGE11 14 MESSAGE12 15 MESSAGE13 66 10 16 MESSAGE14 17 MESSAGE15 18 ALARM e M M TS RINGER 20 ERTTEBRINGER Purpose User data output check display print z Select and press START key Function Content Used to clear all data of image memory Press CUSTOM SETTING key memory send receive Confidential data is also cleared Only when FAX is installed SIMULATION 66 9 Section Fax MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK SOFT SW SELECT 1 20 AND PRESS START EXECUTING Item Data 1 NONE 2 PAUSE 3 MESSAGE1 Operation Procedure The FAX image memory is cleared Same a Ea E o 1 Select an item with 10 digit key pad and press isplay d 3 d h 10 MESSAGE8 11 MESSAGE9 12 MESSAGE10 START The following Ns executed and the 13 MESSAGE11 14 MESSAGE12 15 MESSAGE13 display returns to the initial state 16 MESSAGE 14 17 MESSAGE15 18 ALARM 1 Image memory clear 2 Not clear GER SOERETEERINOER 2 After completion of memory clear reset
200. est check Paper feed Operation the paper feed section and their control circuits The operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed section can be monitored on the LCD display 40 1 Used to check the operations of the manual paper feed tray Operation test check Paper feed Operation paper size detectors and their control circuit The operations of the manual paper feed tray paper size detectors can be monitored on the LCD display 2 Used to adjust the detection level of the manual paper feed tray Adjustment Paper feed Operation paper width detector 7 Used to enter the adjustment value of the manual paper feed Adjustment setup Paper feed Operation tray width detection level 11 Used to check the width detection level of the multi purpose Operation test check Paper feed Operation tray paper width detector 12 Used to adjust the width detection level of the multi purpose Adjustment setup Paper feed Operation tray paper width detector 41 1 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and Operation test check Other Operation the related circuit The operation of the document size sensor can be monitored on the LCD display 2 Used to adjust the detection level of the document size sensor Adjustment Other Operation 3 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and Operation test check Other Operation the related circuit The output level of the document size sensor can be monitored on t
201. ews M5 x 70 2 pcs 2 pcs 4 pcs 1 Assemble the rack Insert two racks A securely all the way into two racks B respectively as shown in the illustration and use four screws M4 x 8 respectively to secure the racks in the order of 1 to 2 in the illustration Racks A Screws M4x8 F Paper setting 1 Pull out the first stage paper feed tray Slowly pull out the tray until it stops Racks B 2 Cut the rear cabinet of the desk unit Cut the cut off portions on both ends of the rear cabinet of the desk unit by hand and remove them 2 While pressing the paper holding plate remove the fixing pin 3 Put paper in the tray and close the paper feed tray AR M350 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6 6 3 Mount the rack to the desk unit Insert the bosses of the rack into the two rack mounting holes from which the cut off portions of the rear cabinet of the desk unit have been removed and use two screws M5 x 70 to secure each rack Screws M5 x 70 Rack mounting holes 4 Attach the cam and paste the rack sheet Attach the cam to the position shown in the right illustration and paste the rack sheet as described in lt 4 gt Cam attaching position Rack sheet pasting position lt 1 gt Insert the shaft to cam B as shown in the illustration and secure it with a screw M3 x 6 Shaft Screw M3 x 6 Cam B 2 Insert the shaft that ha
202. ge skew CIS adjustment Eccentric screw for K Scan magnification ratio adjustment 1 OC scan magnification ratio adjustment 1 Place a print of self print pattern A3 or WLT 70 or a scale on the table glass 2 Close the original cover and make a copy 3 Check that the value is within the specification 4 If not adjust with SIM 48 1 5 Make a copy again and check again that the value is within the specification SIMULATION 48 1 MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT SELECT 0 9 AND PRESS START 0 TRAY SELECT 1 COPY START 2 MAGNIFICATION 3 CCD MAIN 4 CCD SUB E SPF SUB 6 CIS MAIN Specification Specification Adjustment Adjustment position value Main scan direction 0 5 SIM48 1 Set value 1 magnification ratio 0 1 change Sub scan direction magnification ratio AR M350 ADJUSTMENTS 9 6 2 DSPF scan magnification ratio 1 Seta chart of print pattern 70 on SPF DSPF 2 Make a copy In the case of DSPF back copy make a single copy in the duplex mode 3 Check that the output paper satisfies the specifications 4 If not adjust with SIM 48 1 5 Make a copy again and check that the output paper satisfies the specifications SIMULATION 48 1 MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT SELECT 0 9 AND PRESS START 0 TRAY SELECT 1 COPY START 2 MAGNIFICATION 3 CCD MAIN 4 CCD SUB 5 SPF SUB 6 CIS MAIN Specifications L
203. gle Duplex add 10 to the above set value When the print line is shifted toward a from the paper center decrease the value When the print line is shifted toward b from the paper center increase the value C Resist quantity setup This adjustment required a fine accuracy Do not change the default as far as possible This adjustment is performed in the following cases When the void quantity is changed by the paper feed tray When paper is skewed Before performing this adjustment the following adjustments must have been completed LSU right angle adjustment Print magnification ratio adjustment Print off center setup Void area setup 1 Execute SIM 51 2 2 Adjust the resist quantity so that paper is transferred stably Factory setup value 45PPM BPT 55 T1 60 T2 50 DESK 50 ADU 50 35PPM BPT 60 T1 65 T2 55 DESK 55 ADU 55 3 Scanner section A Scanner unit distortion adjustment Before executing this adjustment the following adjustment must have been completed LSU right angle adjustment 1 Make a test chart as shown below Make a self print pattern 71 2 Make a copy from the table glass and check it At that time set the test chart correctly If it is set in a distorted position the adjustment cannot be made correctly 3 If the output value is not in the specified range perform the following adjustment 4 Adjust the disto
204. he LCD display 43 1 Used to set the fusing temperature in each operation mode Setup Fusing paper exit 44 1 Used to set Enable Disable of each correction operation in the Setup Process OPC drum Operation image forming process section developing transfer cleaning 4 Used to set the target image reference density level in the Setup Process OPC drum Data developing bias voltage correction developing transfer cleaning 9 Used to check the result main charger grid voltage developing Adjustment setup Process OPC drum Data Operation bias voltage laser power etc of correction operation data output developing transfer data process correction in the image forming section check display print cleaning machine By this simulation the correction operation can be checked condition AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 4 Code Main Sub Function Content Purpose Section Item 46 2 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode Adjustment Picture Density binary auto text text photo photo mode quality An adjustment with this simulation affects all the copy density adjustment values 9 Used to adjust the print density for each density level Adjustment Picture Density display value in the copy mode binary Text mode quality A desired print density can be set for each density level display value 10 Used to adjust the
205. he indicator is lit copying facsimile scanning and network scanning jobs can be started Press to start copying 13 CA key Press to clear all selected settings and return the machine to the initial settings for the currently selected mode Before starting a copy operation press the CA key first AR M350 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 5 2 3 Touch Panel A Basic screen of copy mode When the copy mode key is pressed this display screen will appear showing the basic copy mode selections D SPECIAL MODESA READY TO SCAN FOR COPY 2 SIDED COPY 10 100 11 COPY RATIO 4 6 7 8 1 Message display Basic status messages are displayed here 2 INTERRUPT key display area When interrupt copy is available the INTERRUPT key will be displayed here When an interrupt copy job is being run a CANCEL key will be displayed here to be used for canceling the interrupt copy job 3 Copy quantity display Displays the selected number of copies before the START key is pressed or the number of completed copies after the START key is pressed A single copy can be made when 0 displayed 4 2 SIDED COPY key Touch to display the duplex copy mode setting screen A highlighted selection on the screen will indicate the currently selected mode The setting screen can be closed by touching the OK key on the setting screen whether or not a selection change was made
206. heck signal detection Inhibited Fax 34 Used to measure and display the communication time Setup Fax Operation 35 Modem program rewriting Only when FAX is installed Operation test check Fax Operation 36 Used to check interface between MFPC and MDMC Operation test check Fax Operation Check is made in the data line or the command line 67 2 Used to check the parallel I F operation of the printer Inhibited Printer Interface This simulation is made only in the production site and not in communi the market It requires a special tool cation 11 Used to set Enable Disable of the parallel I F select signal of Adjustment Printer Operation Interface the printer communi cation 16 Used to check the operation of the network card Operation test check Printer Operation Interface communi cation AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 8 5 Details of simulations Main code 1 Main code 2 1 1 2 1 s n Purpose Operation test check Purpose Operation test check Used to check the operations of the scanner reading unit and its control circuit Function Content Function Content Used to check the operations of the automatic document feeder unit and its control circuit Press CUSTOM SETTING key to stop Stops when scan is completed Press START key to get started SIMULATION 1 1 S
207. hing the folding sensor PEPS lt List of display values gt FFPS_S Console finisher saddle remaining jam The folding sensor FFPS does not turn off S N MFP Controller serial number am Console finisher staple jam SE seotion sera number The stapler does not complete clinching MFP MFP controller FPNCH Console finisher punch jam LANGUAGE Language version The puncher does not complete punching BOOT MEP controller boot ROM FDOP Console finisher door open jam FAX FAX controller During after paper passing the front door joint or NIC Network card upper cover is opened PCU PCU controller PID N mail bin PID not reaching jam SCANNER Scanner controller PID S mail bin PID remaining jam FINISHER Finisher controller MPPD1 N mail pin MPPD1 notreaching am D ot EE MPPD1 S mail bin MPPD1 remaining jam PUNCH UNIT Punch unit MPPD2_N mail bin MPPD2 not reaching jam MPPD2 S mail bin MPPD2 remaining jam Product key controlled by PCU PWB serial number MPPD3_N mail bin MPPD3 not reaching jam MPPD3 S mail bin MPPD3 remaining jam MPPD4_N mail bin MPPD4 not reaching jam MPPD4 S mail bin MPPD4 remaining jam MPPD5 N mail bin MPPD5 not reaching jam MPPD5 S mail bin MPPD5 remaining jam AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 21 22 6 22 8 Purpose Adjustment setup operation data output check print Purpose Adjustment setup operation data output check display Function Content Used to print th
208. i 1135 ei 2001 2av2 Zen RD 2242 23 er GREEN iie AVA Sien ol GND2 9604S 14F 1 84432 4 AMP vi 5R 5 GND2 DSWF fi 14 DSW F PS 187 SRA21T 4L 33 3V Bloe GND2 2 13 GND2 ED MHVE O ss I GY GND2 3 12 GND2 ps 187 SRA2IT 3 GY DHVREM 4 11 DHVREM 187 uH GND2 91 Gy CN18 MHVREMI 5 10 MHVREM up THY 9 GND2 X ug B6P VH THV PWM 6 9 THV PWM SRA 21T 4L GY BL ayy PS 187 GND2 ei gii GBPWM 7 8 GBPWM Luet op HO FW 1 oR2L 9V1 DHVPWM 8 7 DHVPWM E 3 333v THV PWMI 9 6 THV PWM PS 187 up SEIS Gy4 83V DVREM 10 45 DVREM ED DAV V ELR 03V GY3 GND2 DVPWM 11 4 DVPWMY z BK 6 GND2 THVREM 1 3 THVREM PS 187 BAS NE MHV T i 2 MHV T GB DV gt 2 3 WH THin 1 1 THin YL GR mM z z MP 4 200V 3 CN3 e 9 BO3P VH X 200V 250 200V BK 200V BK FL OUTLET AC DC 250 BK Di BK ins are soldered d PWB 250 WH T WHAT z O I k SE TE SECH FOR FN AC DC ELP 03V ELR 03V B03B xask 4 PWB 1 L2 1 MFP only 2 NC 2 E E g BK F E OPTION DCPS ILNA a E 2 NO S S 8 WH N 3 it 200V Si EB Ze 09R RWZV K2GGP4 CZHR 04V H B BW E M 8 4 Rin Ri EX SS SND2 B2 AC DC 3 B Ze Rth2 B 3 D Sr z Ss lt G 8 2 Rth2 E GND2 B4 PWB EL 8 11 GND2 ge Es pe ce a x CN wu VLP 03 wi BOSP VL 100V 200V VLP 04V VLR 04V MFP DER ER 1 Ew HLI Thyn HE WH 2 HL2 HL2 2Fgic 2 H 2512 P2 BK 1 only alt L 3hanalL aalt WHIZ 2 4 F GND FOND 4 BK 3 FN 3 _ sRA 51T 4 A FL 4 wMLP 02 VLR 02
209. ified time display Cause Scanner unit abnormality Scamner wire disconnection Check 8 Check scanning with SIM 1 1 Remedy AR M350 TROUBLE CODES 11 7 MAIN SUB MAIN SUB L3 00 Content Scanner return trouble U6 00 Content Desk LCC communication trouble Details Scanner return is not completed within the Detail Desk LCC communication error specified time Communication cable test error after turning Cause Scanner unit abnormality on the power or exiting DIAG Scanner wire disconnection Cause Improper connection or disconnection of Check amp Check scanning with SIM 1 1 connector and harness Remedy Desk control PWB trouble L4 01 Content Main motor lock detection Control PWB PCU trouble d Noise or interference Detail The motor lock signal is detected for 1 5sec during rotation of the main motor Check and Canceled by turning OFF ON the power remedy Check connection of the harness and cause main motor trouble connector in the communication line Check connection of harness between the PCU PWB and the main motor 01 Content Desk LCC No 1 tray lift up trouble Control circuit trouble Detail Desk LCC No 1 tray lift up trouble Check and Use DIAG SIM25 1 to check the main Cause Sensor trouble remedy motor operation Desk control PWB trouble Check harness and con
210. in this area Original guides Adjust to the size of the originals Document feeder tray Set the originals here for automatic feeding Operation panel Use for operation of copier network scanner and facsimile features and for printer configuration operations Document cover Document scanning windows Sheet type originals are scanned here OO NID On A Go Po Document glass All originals which cannot be copied from the document feeder tray must be copied here AR M350 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 5 1 2 Operation panel When the printer is equipped with a scanner module the operation panel on the main unit will become inoperative and the panel on the scanner module must be used The operation panel on the printer engine side does not function CUSTOM SETTINGS JOB STATUS 0 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Touch panel The machine status messages and touch keys are displayed on the panel The display will change to show the status of print copy network scan or fax according to which of those modes is selected 2 Mode select keys and indicators Use to switch the display mode of the touch panel 3 PRINT key Press to enter the print mode READY indicator READY indicator DATA mdicator Print data can be received when this indicator is lit
211. inal resist front sensor SPSD 11 No 1 mirror 4 Original set sensor 12 Copy lamp Xenon 5 Original take up roller 13 Mirror base unit 6 Original length sensor 1 SLD1 14 No 3 mirror 7 Original length sensor 2 SLD2 15 No 2 mirror 8 CCD lens unit 16 Original exit roller 5 Switch Sensor Code Active condition 1 SPSD SPF original resist front sensor 2 SCOV SPF paper feed cover sensor 3 SDD SPF original set sensor 4 SOCD OC open close sensor 5 Original size sensor PWB Light emitting side 6 SLD1 SPF original length sensor 1 7 SLD2 SPF original length sensor 8 SPF original width detection volume PWB 9 Original size sensor PWB Light receiving side 10 SSET SPF open close sensor 11 SPOD SPF original exit sensor 12 MHPS Mirror home position sensor AR M350 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 5 6 6 PWB No Name Function Operation 1 SPF control PWB SPF control 2 Original size detection PWB Light emitting side Original size detection when using the table glass 3 CCD PWB in lens unit The lens unit cannot be disassembled Image scan Table glass SPF surface 4 SPF original width detection volume PWB SPF original width detection 5 MER operation PWB Panel operation control 6 LCD inverter PWB Inverter for LCD backlight 7 LWDS PWB LCD signal relay 8 Original size sensor Light receiving side O
212. ing cases When the center is misaligned in printing When the LSU is replaced When the option paper feed unit or the automatic duplex unit is installed or replaced Before execution of this adjustment the following adjustments must have been completed LSU right angle adjustment Print magnification ratio adjustment After completion of this adjustment the following adjustment must be executed Void area setup Execute SIM 50 10 Set the paper fed tray and the magnification ratio for the adjustment After entering the adjustment values press START key and printing is started Check the off center distance from the paper edge of the printed copy Repeat procedure 2 until the specification is satisfied When adjusting the off center of LCC1 load paper only on the left tray of LCC When adjusting the off center of LCC2 load paper only on the right tray of LCC This is because no distinction of right and left is made when selecting a tray et Print lead edge 4 p gt Specification 1 5mm AR M350 ADJUSTMENTS 9 2 Adjustment position Measurement Specification Set value reference Default Range Print off center SIM 50 10 Tray 1 Tray 1 Output pattern 0 1 5mm 50 0 99 Set value 1 Tray 2 Tray 2 center line 0 1mm shift Tray 3 Tray 3 LCC left Tray 4 Tray 4 LCC right MFT Manual feed ADU Duplex For the duplex mode Sin
213. installed AR EF1 AR RK1 of installation as needed 3X2 When installing a controller board a facsimile unit and other electric devices be sure to install them at a time Only off center adjustment is needed for AR DU3 For the FAX scanner options AR M350 M450 only No For installation of an option unit refer to the Service Manual of the option unit AR M350 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6 1 2 Note for installation place Improper installation may damage this product Please note the following during initial installation and whenever the machine is moved 1 The machine should be installed near an accessible power outlet for easy connection 2 Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that meets the specified voltage and current requirements Also make certain the outlet is properly grounded For the power supply requirements see the name plate of the main unit 3 Do not install your machine in areas that are damp humid or very dusty exposed to direct sunlight poorly ventilated subject to extreme temperature or humidity changes e g near an air conditioner or heater 4 Besure to allow the required space around the machine for servicing and proper ventilation 11 13 16 30cm 31 1 2 23 5 8 80cm 60cm lt lt 557 60cm 3 Unpacking procedure Check the following items are included in the package Developer
214. ion because next paper is fed after machine completely output previous page Sequential broadcasting O E mail only It is not available for FTP Desktop Simultaneous FAX transmission O Specifying multiple destinations of FAX E mail or FTP and broadcasting by a single scan O Available 9 Functions Figures in reduction enlargement are represented by those at the ratio to show slowest speed 2 First Copy Time Conditions A4 or 8 5 x11 P from front tray of PPC without HDD and with polygon motor running AR M350 AR M450 Document glass 1 Less than 5 3 seconds Less than 4 6 seconds Transmitting Rotating transmission O to be matched with FAX functions specification Long length original X transmission Verification stamp function Option Report list Transmit receive record O functions Transmit receive result O Address phone directory O list Group list O ID sender list O Program list O DSPF Less than 6 0 seconds Less than 5 3 seconds 1 During OC high speed mode 3 Job Speed AR M350 AR M450 SS 33 cpm 9495 42 cpm 9396 SD 32 cpm 91 40 cpm 8896 D gt D 3 32 cpm 91 40 cpm 8896 1 S gt S A4 8 5 x11 P original 5 sheets Copy 5sets 2 S gt D A4 8 5 x11 P original 10 sheets copy 5sets 8 DD A4 8 5 x11 P original 5 sheets 10 pages copy 5sets Note First copy time has be
215. ion possible Operations except for the trouble mode are possible READY depending on conditions For the mode where operations are impossible only setup can be allowed and the message is provided to show that operations are impossible NOT READY in this case Display A dialog is shown in case of a trouble For the mode where operations are possible the OK button is added to the message For the mode where operations are impossible the OK button is not shown and the process to cancel is indicated Machine operation is impossible The trouble display is always shown and all setup operations are invalid E Writing to the trouble memory In this series the simulation diag allows to select whether the same trouble is written to the trouble memory when it occurs If the DIAG simulation is set as above when any trouble occurs its hysteresis is written to the trouble memory DIAG SIM 26 35 0 The same trouble as the previous one is not recorded Default 1 When a trouble occurs it is written to the trouble memory without exception AR M350 TROUBLE CODES 11 12 12 ELECTRICAL SECTION 1 Block Diagram I PREPARAR A O O
216. ion ratio Set value 3 SIDE SIDE 1 value 7 IMAGE LOSS Back lead edge image loss 15 0 99 SIMULATION ZO 7 LEAD SIDE 2 set value LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT SPF CALC SELECT 0 10 AND PRESS START 8 IMAGE LOSS Back side image loss set 20 0 99 0 TRAY SELECT li 1 COPY START 2 MAGNIFICATION d SIDE SIDE 2 value 3 14 415 W 9 REARLOSS Frontrear edge image loss 0 0 20 5 IMAGE LOSS LEAD SIDE1 SIDE1 set value 6 IMAGE LOSS SIDE SIDE1 E 7 IMAGE LOSS LEAD SIDE2 fig 10 REAR LOSS Back rear edge image loss 0 0 20 8 IMAGE LOSS SIDE SIDE2 Ei SIDE2 set value 9 REAR LOSS SIDE1 0 10 REAR LOSS SIDE2 o A A List of display values 1 Select other than 0 2 z z and press START Key P ess CUSTOM SETTING key E E Normal display NOW COPYING ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN SIMULATION 50 7 Jam JAM LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT SPF CALC INPUT VALUE 0 999 AND PRESS Paper empty PAPER EMPTY START E 3 14 50 List of set values 2 gt Select 1 and z z 1 TRAY1 11 TRAY1 with Duplex i US es OE 2 TRAY2 12 TRAY2 with Duplex Ldbg E E 3 TRAY3 13 TRAYG with Duplex SIMULATION 50 7 4 TRAY4 14 TRAY4 with Duplex LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT SPF CALC NOW COPYING 5 Manual feed 15 Manual feed with Duplex Select 0 and press IN ME List of set values 3 gt press STARTIKSy press CUSTOME SETTING key Set range 25 20096 SIMULATION 50 7 LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT SPF CALC SELECT 1 5 AND PRESS START FEED TRAY 1 TRA
217. is highlighted on the right of each item Set value 2 Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad Press P to store the set value Default 50 set range 0 99 Section Scanner reading Section Scanner reading Item Picture quality Item Picture quality Operation Procedure 1 Select the exposure mode to be set Operation Procedure 1 Select the exposure mode to be set Scanner small text mode individual adjustment The current set value is highlighted on the right of each item Set value 2 Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad Press P to store the set value Default 50 set range 0 99 The set value is ch anged only and printing is not performed SIMULATION 46 21 EXP LEVEL SETUP SCANNER AUTO SET PRESS START 0 SCANNER EXP LEVEL Press START key Press START key o CUSTOM SETTING key as SIMULATION 46 21 AND PRESS START EXP LEVEL SETUP SCANNER AUTO SET INPUT VALUE 0 99 0 SCANNER EXP LEVEL lt Set value gt O Scanner mode exposure setup 46 22 Purpose Adjustment setup operation data output check display print Function Content Used to adjust the scanner exposure level and to make individual setup Normal mode Section Scanner reading Item Picture quality Operation Procedure 1 Select the exposure mode to be set Scanner normal text mode indivi
218. is highlighted when detected SIMULATION 3 20 MAIL BOX SENSOR CHECK Mao MPFD2 MPFD3 MPFD4 MPFD5 MPFD6 MPFD7 MPFD8 MPID M24VM MDDI MPPD1 MPPD2 MPPD3 MPPD4 MPPD5 MDOPD Function Content Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed section desk paper feed large capacity trays and their control circuits Section Paper feed Item Operation Operation Procedure The display is highlighted when detected 3 tray desk List of display values SIMULATION 4 2 MPFD 1 Tray 1 paper full detection MPPD1 Paper transport sensor 1 DES SENSOR CHECK DDRS DPFD1 DPFD2 DPFD3 MPFD2 Tray 2 paper full detection MPPD2 Paper transport sensor 2 MCLUD DLUD4 DLUD2 MCSPD MPFDS3 Tray 3 paper full detection MPPD3 Paper transport sensor 3 DSPD1 DSPD2 MCPED DPED1 MPFD4 Tray 4 paper full detection MPPD4 Paper transport sensor 4 DPED2 MCSS1 MCSS2 MCSS3 MPFD5 Tray 5 paper full detection MPPD5 Paper transport sensor 5 E SE SEN Ge MPFD6 Tray 6 paper full detection M24VM 24V power supply DCSS238 DCSS24 XXXXXX MPFD7 Tray 7 paper full detection MDDI Jam cancel door LCC MPFD8 Tray 8 paper full detection MDOPD Interface unit door GEES MPID Interface unit paper entry LCC SENSOR CHECK detection TDRS TTS
219. ith the soft switch is outputted Used to check the operation Only when FAX is installed 19 Used to backup the FAX SRAM data into the flash Setup Fax Operation Memory Option FAX memory AR MM9 Only when FAX is installed 20 Used to restore the backup data SIM 66 19 to SRAM Setup Fax Operation Only when FAX is installed 21 Usedto print the FAX information registrations communication Adjustment setup Fax Data management file management system errors operation data output Only when FAX is installed check display print 22 Used to adjust the handset sound volume Setup Fax Operation Only when FAX is installed 23 Used to download the FAX program Inhibited Fax Only when FAX is installed 24 Used clear the FAST memory data Inhibited Fax Only when FAX is installed 25 Used to register the FAX number for MODEM dial in Inhibited Fax Only when FAX is installed 26 Used to register the external telephone number for MODEM Inhibited Fax dial in Only when FAX is installed 27 Used to register the voice warp transfer number Inhibited Fax Only when FAX is installed 28 Used to record a sound message Inhibited Fax Only when FAX is installed 29 Used to clear the telephone directory Setup Fax Operation Only when FAX is installed 30 Used to check TEL LIU status change Setup Fax Operation 31 Used to set the TEL LIU status Setup Fax Operation 32 Used to check received data Inhibited Fax 33 Used to c
220. ition of the MB rail 5 Loosen the screw at the right of the MB rail to adjust i d Q L gt lt gt Ze L M SS lt Specifications gt Measurement Specification Set value point OC scan Angle 6 in the 90 0 13 1 scale about distortion above figure 0 25 shift in 0 adjustment C Vertical image distortion balance adjustment Copy lamp unit installing position adjustment 1 Insert the front rear mirror base drive wire into the frame groove and press and fix it with the wire holder At that time do not tighten the wire fixing screw Change the direction of the lamp positioning plate F and R 2 Push the copy lamp unit onto the positioning plate and tighten the wire fixing screw lt Note for assembling the copy lamp unit gt After fixing manually shift the copy lamp unit a few times to check that it moves smoothly D Vertical image distortion balance adjustment No 2 3 mirror base unit installing position adjustment This adjustment is to adjust the parallelism of the mirror base to the OPC drum surface and the original surface 1 Manually turn the mirror base drive pulley to bring mirror base B into contact with mirror base positioning plate If at that time the front frame side and the frame side of mirror base B are brought into contact with the mirror base positioning plate simultaneously the parallelism is correct and there is no need for adjustment
221. ity L6 10 Polygon motor lock detection PCU Trouble signal is outputted from the high L8 01 No full wave signal PCU voltage transformer 02 Full wave signal width PCU Cause The main charger is not installed properly abnormality The main charger is not assembled properly U6 00 Desk LCC communication With Paper feed PCU Disconnection of connector of high voltage trouble desk installed transformer 01 Desk LCC1CS lift up trouble With Paper feed PCU High voltage harness disconnection or Multi purpose tray desk installed breakage 02 Desk2 CS lift up trouble LCC1 With Paper feed PCU Check andi Dee Ihe diag id lift up trouble desk installed remedy main charger output i 03 Desk3 CS liftup trouble LCC2 wii Paper feed PCU Check for disconne tion of the main charger S d Replace the high voltage unit lift up trouble desk installed 10 Desk LCC transport motor With Paper feed PCU E6 10 Content CIS shading trouble Black correction trouble desk installed Details The CIS black scan level is abnormal when EE EL Auto developer adjustment Only during PCU Vie lamp feror trouble Over toner DIAG Cause Abnormal harness installation to CIS unit EU Auto developer adjustment Only during PCU E URS Ewe ene el trouble Under toner DIAG F9 02 Centro port check error Controller Bened en ES eee 03 NIC port check error Controller Check scanner PWB U1 01 FAX Battery abnormality With FAX board Controller installed 02 RT
222. ity Protocol error Cause Motor lock Cause Defective connection of slave unit PWB Motor rpm abnormality connector Overcurrent to the motor Defective harness between slave unit PWB Console finisher control PWB trouble and ICU PWB Check and Use DIAG SIM3 3 to check the motor Slave unit PWB mother board connector pin remedy operation breakage 20 Content Finisher AR FN6 rear alignment motor Check amp Check connector and harness of slave unit trouble Remedy PWB and ICU PWB Detail Rear alignment motor operation abnormality Check grounding of machine Ge Cause Motor lock 90 Content PCU communication trouble Motor rpm abnormality Details Overcurrent to the motor Cause Console finisher control PWB trouble Check amp Check and Use DIAG SIM3 3 to check the motor Remedy remedy operation F1 00 Content Finisher AR FN6 communication trouble 80 Content Finisher AR FN6 power abnormality Detail Communication cable test error after turning Detail The 24V power is not supplied to the finisher on the power or exiting from DIAG PWB Communication error with the finisher Cause Improper connection or disconnection of Cause Improper connection or disconnection of connector and harness connectors and harness between the Finisher control PWB trouble machine and the finisher Power unit trouble Finisher control PWB trouble Check and Use DIAG SIM3 2 to check the sensor Control PWB PCU trouble remedy Malfunction by noises 87 Content Fini
223. justment value and press START to store it SIMULATION 63 7 1 c H Press SHADING POSITION ADJUSTMENT PRESS START START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 63 7 SHADING POSITION ADJUSTMENT INPUT VALUE 1 16 AND PRESS START 1 CCD E Set value Initial value Range 1 CCD scan 6 1 16 1 count 0 5 mm AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 58 List of set values Main code 64 0 Paper feed tray 1 TRAY1 2 TRAY2 64 1 3 TRAY3 Purpose Operation test check 5 MANUAL Function Content Used to ub the operations of the printer 1 Print execution Print is started with the set data Ap d printing T F 2 Print pattern Refer to the print pattern he print pattern paper feed mode print mode 3 Picture density Enable only when No 79 80 or 84 is selected print quantity density can be changed 4 Print quantity optionally 5 Print mode 1 Standard Section Printer 2 Smoothing ON Item Operation 3 Toner save ON Operation Procedure Perform self printing The current set data is 4 Half tone ON displayed on the right side of the menu 5 Smoothing Toner save 6 Smoothing Half tone SIMULATION 64 1 7 Toner save half tone SELF PRINT MODE SELECT 0 7 AND PRESS START QT BAV SELECT TPRINT START 8 Smoothing Toner save Half tone 2 PRINT PATTERN 3 DENSITY H 6 Print level 17
224. key Press CUSTOM SETTING key or START key SIMULATION 61 2 1 AE LASER POWER SETTING COPY INPUT VALUE 1 165 AND PRESS START List of set values Initial value Set range 1 Auto exposure mode 45PPM 104 104 150 35PPM 80 45PPM 2 Text mode 45PPM 104 SE 85PPM 35PPM 80 3 Text Photo mode 45PPM 104 35PPM 80 4 Photo mode 45PPM 104 35PPM 80 AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 56 Purpose Adjustment 62 2 Function Content Used to adjust the scanner exposure laser Een power absolute value in the FAX reception Purpose Operation test check mode Only when FAX is installed Function Content Used to check the hard disk operation Section PCU read write Item Operation Only for the model with the hard disk Operation Procedure Set the laser power in FAX reception Partial check Enter the set value and press Start to store it Section Memory Item Operation SIMULATION 61 3 Operation Procedure Perform the partial check of read write of the LASER POWER SETTING FAX PRESS START hard disk EXECUTING is displayed during 1 FAX check When check is normally completed OK is displayed When an error occurs NG is displayed Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key or START key SIMULATION 62 2 SIMULATION 61 3 HDD R W TEST LASER POWER SETTING FAX
225. kit Transfer roller x1 100K AR 450KA Discharging plate x1 Paper dust removing unit x1 DV blade x1 DV side seal F x1 DV side seal R x1 6 200K PM kit Upper heat roller x1 200K AR 450KB Lower heat roller x1 Fusing separation pawl Upper x4 Fusing separation pawl Lower x2 Cleaning roller x1 Bearing x2 7 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 3000x3 AR SC1 Common with cartridge for AR FN4 amp AR FN6 8 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000x3 AR SC2 Common with cartridge for AR FN7 Note1 Print on Master individual carton 4 languages English French German Spanish Note2 Packed with machine DR 50K Developer UN Process UN Note3 The other maintenance parts which are not listed above are registered as service parts AR M350 CONSUMABLE PARTS 4 3 G Hong kong NO Name Content Life Product name Remark 1 Toner CA Black Toner Toner Net Weight 814g 27K AR 450ST C Life setup is based on A4 6 2 Developer Developer Developer Net Weight 450g 100K AR 450SD C 3 Drum Drum x1 50K AR 450DR C 4 50K PM kit Cleaner blade x1 50K AR 450KC Drum separation pawl x4 Screen grid x1 Toner reception seal x1 Side malt F x1 Side malt R x1 Charging plate x1 5 100K PM kit Transfer roller x1 100K AR 450KA Discharging plate x1 Paper dust removing unit x1 DV blade x1 DV side seal F x1 DV side seal R x1 6 200K PM kit Upper heat roller x1 200K AR 450KB Lower heat roller x1 Fu
226. l circuit operation test check developing transfer cleaning 6 Used to check and adjust the transfer charger current and its Adjustment Process OPC drum control circuit operation test check developing transfer cleaning 17 Used to set and check the transfer roller output Operation test check Process OPC drum Operation developing transfer cleaning 9 1 Used to check the operation under load clutches and Operation test check Duplex Operation solenoids in the duplex section and their control circuits 2 Used to check the sensors and detectors in the duplex section Operation test check Duplex Operation and their control circuits 10 O Used to check the operation of the toner motor and its control Operation test check Process OPC drum Operation circuit developing transfer Note cleaning Do not execute this simulation with toner in the toner hopper If executed toner will enter the developing section causing an overtoner trouble Be sure to remove toner motor from the toner hopper before execution 13 0 Used to cancel the self diag U1 trouble Cancel Trouble Only when FAX is installed incase of a trouble 14 0 Used to cancel the self diag U1 LCC US PF troubles Cancel Trouble Error incase of a trouble 15 O Used to cancel the self diag U6 09 20 21 22 trouble Cancel Paper feed Trouble incase of a trouble 16 0 Used to cancel the self diag U2 trouble Cancel Trouble Error incase of a
227. loper in 2 languages English French DR in 4 languages English French German Spanish Note2 Packed with machine DR 50K Developer UN Process UN Note3 The other maintenance parts which are not listed above are registered as service parts AR M350 CONSUMABLE PARTS 4 1 C Europe Australia New Zealand NO Name Content Life Product name Remark 1 Toner CA Black Toner Toner Net Weight 814g 27K AR 450T Life setup is based on A4 6 2 Developer Developer Developer Net Weight 450g 100K AR 450DV 3 Drum Drum x1 50K AR 450DM 4 50K PM kit Cleaner blade x1 50K AR 450KC Drum separation pawl x4 Screen grid x1 Toner reception seal x1 Side malt F x1 Side malt R x1 Charging plate x1 5 100K PM kit Transfer roller x1 100K AR 450KA Discharging plate x1 Paper dust removing unit x1 DV blade x1 DV side seal F x1 DV side seal R x1 6 200K PM kit Upper heat roller x1 200K AR 450KB Lower heat roller x1 Fusing separation pawl Upper x4 Fusing separation pawl Lower x2 Cleaning roller x1 Bearing x2 7 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 3000x3 AR SC1 Common with cartridge for AR FN4 amp AR FN6 8 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000x3 AR SC2 Common with cartridge for AR FN7 Note1 Print on Master individual carton 4 languages English French German Spanish Note2 Packed with machine DR 50K Developer UN Process UN Note3 The other maintenance parts which are not listed above a
228. lose the tray Remove the locks of the middle tray and the lower tray similarly Front mounting plate Screws Power supply unit Screws TP Front mounting plate AR M350 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6 3 5 Connect the power supply unit harness to the PCU PWB of the main unit of the printer lt 1 gt Remove the screw that fixes the harness cover of the main unit of the printer and slide the harness cover up to remove it Process the harness cover as shown in the illustration Harness cover 2 Connect the optional power supply harness connector to CN11 red connector of the PCU PWB of the main unit of the printer Connector 3 Reattach the harness cover to its original position and fix it with the removed screw At this time ensure that the optional power supply unit harness is arranged as shown in the illustration Fix the harness securely to the wire saddle Optional power supply harness Wire saddle Wire saddle 6 Connect the relay harness of the stand paper drawer to the power supply unit Connect the relay harness of the stand paper drawer to the connector of the power supply unit Connector of the power supply connector Relay harness of the stand paper drawer 7 Attach the rear cabinet of the stand paper drawer lt 1 gt Pass the cord of the power supply unit through the hole of the rear cabinet and attach the rear cabinet to the stan
229. lti purpose tray lift up motor trouble Harness disconnection f the PCU PWB the lift up unit and the paper feed unit Check and Check MCPED PCLUD and their harness remedy and connectors AR M350 TROUBLE CODES 11 6 Check the lift up unit MAIN SUB MAIN SUB F6 00 Content Communication trouble ICU detection H3 00 Content Fusing section high temperature trouble between ICU and FAX HL1 Detail The fusing temperature exceeds 242 C Details Communication establishment error Fleming RT An input voltage of 0 27V or above is Parity Protocol error H1 detected Cause Slave unit PWB connector disconnection Cause thermistor trouble Harness abnormality between slave unit M Control PWB trouble PWB and ICU PWB PEE Fusing section connector disconnection Slave unit PWB mother board connector pin a AC power trouble breakage Check and Use DIAG SIM5 2 to check the heater lamp Slave unit ROM abnormality No ROM remedy Blinking operation Reverse insertion of ROM ROM pin If the heater lamp blinks normally breakable Check the thermistor and its harness Check amp Check connector harness between slave unit Check the thermistor input circuit in the Remedy PWB and ICU PWB control PWB Check grounding of machine If the heater lamp keep lighting Check slave unit PWB R
230. lues gt MPLD Manual feed tray length detection MPLS1 Manual feed pull out sensor 1 MPLS2 Manual feed pull out sensor 2 Bypass Tray The detected width of manual feed tray is displayed width size A4 A3 11x B5 B4 8 5x A4R B5R ASR 5 5x 7 25x EXTRA CSS1 Tray 1 insertion detection MCSS1 MP tray size detection 1 PED Tray 1 paper empty MCSS2 MP tray size detection 2 detection LUD Tray 1 upper limit MCSS3 MP tray size detection 3 detection MCSET MP unit detection MCSSA MP tray size detection 4 MCDRS MP unit side door open MP Tray The detection size of MP detection size tray is displayed MCPPD MP tray transport MPFSET Manual feed tray detection detection MCLUD MP tray upper limit MPED Manual feed tray paper detection empty detection MCPED MP tray paper empty MPLD Manual feed length detection detection MCSPD MP tray remaining MPLS1 Manual feed pull out quantity detection sensor 1 MPLS2 Manual feed pull out sensor 2 Bypass The detection size of Tray manual feed tray is size displayed AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 31 40 2 40 7 R H u M RH
231. lvaps peo uuo 44S luas asapjuado 30 sues fuel FOI JS sues qbue UBIO 44s Ip Jojo SH ds Ip paa euu Ap luas o eu Ap lusps seddoys purfuo AS Verte 1801 pulfuo A luas Janoo pao aded JdS luas qas Puno ds AR M350 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 1 2 Circuit Diagram 8 7 TX25 80P LT H1 BOARD TO BOARD TX24
232. mail sending 3 Number of times of FTP sending AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 27 Main code 25 Main code 26 25 1 26 3 Purpose Operation test check Purpose Setup Function Content Used to check the operations of the main drive section excluding the scanner reading section and the toner density sensor The toner density Function Content Used to set the specification mode of the auditor Setup must be made according to the use conditions under auditor displayed Press START key and the main motor will rotate to start monitoring the toner density control sensor SIMULATION 25 1 DV MONITOR PRESS START Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key to stop Or stop after 2min SIMULATION 25 1 DV MONITOR EXECUTING 25 2 Purpose Setup Function Content Used to initialize the toner density when replacing developer Auto adjustment Section Process OPC drum developing transfer cleaning Item Operation Procedure The toner density control sensor value is displayed Press START key and the main motor will rotate After stirring for 2 min the toner density control sensor value is sampled 10 times and the average value is stored Note Open front cover before entering SIM for Auto adjust SIMULATION 25 2 AUTOMATIC DV ADJUSTMENT P
233. mall text mode Binary value mode AUTO SIM46 14 LIGHT DARK Half tone mode AUTO LIGHT DARK Fine mode Binary value mode AUTO SIM46 15 LIGHT DARK Half tone mode AUTO LIGHT DARK Super fine mode Binary value mode AUTO SIM46 16 LIGHT DARK Half tone mode AUTO LIGHT DARK AR M350 ADJUSTMENTS 9 8 1 Test chart setting 1 Place a test chart UKOG 0162FCZZ on the original table as shown below 2 Place several sheets of A3 11 x 17 white paper Sharp s specified paper on the test chart at the rear reference Test chart comparison UKOG 0162FCZZ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DENSITY No 10 UKOG 0089CSZZ 0 1 0 2 0 3 DENSITY No 0 5 1 9 KODAK GRAY 1 2 3 SCALE 19 SHARP CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN b Individual adjustment of each copy quality mode 2 Density adjustment procedure a Collective adjustment of two or more copy quality modes Normally this adjustment is performed with SIM 46 2 In this method two or more copy density adjustments in different modes ca collectively 1 Execute SIM 46 2 Binary value mode n be adjusted Quality mode Linked simulation data AE3 0 AE CH3 0 Character sim46 9 MIX3 0 Character Photo sim46 10 PH3 0
234. mm 3 0mm 0 1mm unit Paper size Letter R 3 0mm 0 0mm 3 0mm 0 1mm unit Print key operator program list Key operator code change Set code 00000 System settings Default settings Print density level Normal DAKER DARKEST LIGHTEST LIGHTER Disable notice page printing Yes No Disable test page printing Yes No A4 LT auto select ON OFF Interface settings Hexadecimal dump mode ON OFF PDL for parallel port Auto PostScript PCL PDL for network port Auto PostScript PCL I O timeout 1sec 20sec 999sec Port switching Per job Timeout Paralell OFF Network OFF Network settings IP address setting IP address 000 000 000 000 IP subnet mask 000 000 000 000 IP gateway 000 000 000 000 Enable TCP IP Yes No Enable NetWare Yes No Enable EtherTalk Yes No Enable NetBEUI Yes No Reset the NIC Intialize Store settings Restore factory defaults Store current configuration Restore configuration Product key PS3 expansion kit E mail alert and status AR M350 MACHINE OPERATION 8 4 9 ADJUSTMENTS Adjustment item 1 Process section gt High voltage output adjustment 2 Engine section LSU right angle adjustment Print off center adjustment Resist quantity adjustment 3 Scanner section Scanner unit distortion adjustment OC scan distortion adjustment V
235. n units AR D13 AR D14 should be installed to the machine for safety reasons Refer to the drawing of the AR MU1 in this manual 1 Putthe machine on the previously installed option unit Be sure to check that the boss of the option unit is securely engaged with the machine and that the external lines front and left sides of the option unit and those of the machine are aligned completely 3 Remove the rear cabinet of the stand paper drawer and remove the AC inlet cover lt 1 gt Remove the four screws that fix the rear cabinet and then remove the rear cabinet Caution For installation of the main unit it must be held by two persons and installed without haste 2 Connect the main unit to the stand paper drawer lt 1 gt Attach the rear mounting plates using a supplied screw for each 2 Remove the screw that fixes the AC inlet cover and then remove the Rear mounting plate AC inlet cover 3 Process the AC inlet cover as shown in the illustration AC inlet cover 4 Attach the power supply unit AR DC1 Attach the power supply unit to the hanging portions and secure it using the three supplied screws Hanging portion Caution Insert the rear mounting plates under the desk frame 2 Pull out the upper paper tray of the stand paper drawer until it stops and attach the front mounting plates using a supplied screw for each Then remove the lock of the paper tray and c
236. n without shorting the If the heater lamp does not light Remedy boot test pin in the FAX PWB Check for heater lamp disconnection and Replace FAX PWB eee i eck the interlock switch F7 01 Content FAX board EEPROM read write Quer Check the AC PWB and the lamp control Details EEPROM access error read write circuit in the control PWB Cause EEPROM trouble Use DIAG SIM14 to cancel the trouble FAX PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble H5 01 Content 5 time continuous POD1 not reaching jam Check amp Replace FAX PWB detection Remedy Detail 5 time continuous POD1 not reaching jam H2 00 Content thermistor open detection HL1 Fusing unit not installed Cause Afusing section jam is not properly removed RT Detail Thermistor is open Jam paper remains H1 An input voltage of 2 92V or above is POD1 sensor trouble or harness detected disconnection 01 Fusing unit not installed Improper installation of fusing unit Cause Thermistor trouble Check and Check jam paper in the fusing section H2 Control PWB trouble remedy winding etc Fusing section connector disconnection Check POD1 sensor harness and check the AC power trouble fusing unit installation Fusing unit not installed Use DIAG SIM14 to cancel the trouble Check and Check harnesses and connectors from the L1 00 Content Scanner feed trouble remedy thermistor to the control PWB Details Scanner feed is not completed within the Use DIAG SIM14 to clear the self diag spec
237. nector between the Gear breakage PCU PWB and the main motor Lift up motor trouble 02 Content Drum motor lock detection Check and Use DIAG SIM4 2 to check the lift up remedy sensor detection coe Wee e T Use DIAG SIM4 3 to check the lift up motor operation Cause Drum motor trouble Improper connection of harness between the 02 Content Desk No 2 tray LCC1 lift up trouble PCU PWB and the drum motor Detail Desk No 2 tray LCC lift up trouble Control circuit trouble Cause Sensor trouble Check and Use DIAG SIM25 1 to check the drum Desk control PWB trouble remedy motor operation Gear breakage Check harness and connector between the Lift up motor trouble PCU PWB and the drum motor Check and Use DIAG SIM4 2 to check the lift up L6 10 Content Polygon motor lock detection remedy sensor detection Detail Itis judged that the polygon motor lock signal Use DIAG SIM4 3 to check the lift up motor is not outputted operation Lock signal is checked in the interval of 03 Content Desk No 3 tray LCC2 lift up trouble 10sec after starting the polygon motor and it Detail Desk no 3 tray lift up trouble is judged that the polygon motor does not Cause Sensor trouble rotate normally Desk control PWB trouble Cause The LSU connector or harness in the LSU is Gear breakage disconnected or broken Lift up motor trouble Polygon motor trouble Check and Use DIAG SIM4 2 to check the lift up Checkand Use DIAG SIM61 1 to check the polygon reme
238. ning jam Desk tray 2 feed paper Ee TTRAY2 Tandem tray 2 paper feed jam TPFD3 not reaching e De o CR TPFD3STD2 TPFDS remaining jam Tandem tray 2 feed paper D TTRAY1 Tandem tray 1 paper feed jam TPFD2 not reaching e TPFD2NTD2 TPFD2 not reaching jam Tandem tray 2 feed paper iS Ae Ee ide TR TPFD2STD1 TPFD2 remaining jam Tandem tray 1 feed paper TPFD2STD2 TPFD2 remaining jam Tandem tray 2 feed paper FPID N Built in finisher PID not reaching jam 22 5 FPID S Built in finisher PID remaining jam D se Ee FSCID N Bulltin finisher SCID not reaching jam Function Content Used to check the ROM version of each unit FSCID_S Built in finisher SCID remaining jam section FSCID2 N _ Built in finisher SCID2 not reaching jam Section FSCID2 S Built in finisher SCID2 remaining jam Item Software FPPD S Built in finisher PPD remaining jam Operation Procedure The version of each ROM is displayed FSCPD_N Built in finisher SCPD not reaching jam FSCPD S Built in finisher SCPD remaining jam en MOM FPOD N Built in finisher POD not reaching jam S N MFP 000000000 S N ENGINE 0000000000 FPOD S Builtin finisher POD remaining jam MR o e O ANGUAGE TOU FES N Console finisher entry port sensor FES not reaching PCU 1 00 BOOT 1 00 SCANNER 1 00 FAX 1 00 am FINISHER 1 00 NIC 1 00 FES S Console finisher entry port sensor FES remaining jam DESK LCC 1 00 MAIL BIN 1 00 FFPS N Console finisher saddle not reaching jam BUNCE Nip 200 Not reac
239. nisher AR FN7 lift motor trouble Malfunction by noise Detail Lift motor operation abnormality Check and Canceled by turning OFF ON the power Cause Motor lock remedy Check connectors and harness in the Motor rpm abnormality communication line A Overcurrent to the motor Replace the console finisher control PWB Console finisher control PWB trouble Check and Use DIAG SIM3 3 to check the motor remedy operation AR M350 TROUBLE CODES 11 5 MAIN SUB MAIN SUB E1 33 Content Console finisher AR FN7 F2 00 Content Toner control sensor abnormality punch AR PN1 side registration motor Detail Toner control sensor output open trouble Cause Connector harness trouble Detail Punch side registration motor operation Connector disconnection abnormality Check and Check connection of the toner control sensor Cause Motor lock remedy Check connection of connector and harness Motor rpm abnormality to the main PWB Overcurrent to the motor Check for disconnection of harness Console finisher control PWB trouble 02 Content Toner supply abnormality enecrana Use DING SIMS motor Detail Toner control sensor output value becomes remedy operation under toner too earlier 34 Content Console finisher AR FN7 Cause Connector harness trouble punch AR PN1 motor trouble
240. noises GE rpm SEN Check and Canceled by turning OFF ON the power Em e be Medios bl remedy Check connectors and harness in the onsole finisher contro rouble communication line Check and Use DIAG SIM3 3 to check the motor Replace the console finisher control PWB or remedy operation PCU PWB 10 Content Console finisher AR FN7 31 Content Console finisher AR FN7 stapler motor trouble fold sensor trouble Detail Stapler motor operation abnormality Detail Sensor input value abnormality Cause Motor lock i Cause Sensor breakage Motor rpm abnormality harness breakage Overcurrent to the motor Console finisher control PWB trouble Console finisher control PWB trouble Check and Use DIAG SIM3 2 to check the sensor Check and Use DIAG SIM3 3 to check the motor remedy operation EE operation 32 Content Communication trouble between the console 11 Content Console finisher AR FN7 finisher AR FN7 bundle exit motor trouble and the punch unit AR PN1 Detail Bundle exit motor operation abnormality Detail Communication err between the console Cause Motor lock finisher and the punch unit Motor rpm abnormality Cause Improper connection or disconnection of Overcurrent to the motor connector and harness between the console Console finisher control PWB trouble finisher and the punch unit Check and Use DIAG SIM3 3 to check the motor Console finisher control PWB trouble remedy _ operation Control PWB PCU trouble 15 Content Console fi
241. normal Details Scanner memory check sum error Cause RTC circuit abnormality Cause EEPROM trouble Battery voltage fall Control circuit freeze by noises Battery circuit abnormality Scanner PWB EEPROM access circuit Check amp Setthe time again with key operation and trouble Remedy check that time advances properly Check amp Check that EEPROM is set properly Check RTC circuit Remedy Record counter adjustment values with the Check that battery voltage is about 2 5V or above Check battery circuit AR M350 TROUBLE CODES 11 9 simulation to protect the data from being deleted Cancel U2 trouble with SIM 16 Replace scanner PWB MAIN SUB U2 90 Content EEPROM read write error PCU Detail PCU EEPROM write error Cause EEPROM trouble EEPROM is not initialized Hang of control circuit due to noises PCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble Checkand Check that EEPROM is properly inserted remedy Save the counter adjustment values with the DIAG simulation Use DIAG SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble Replace the Controller PWB 91 Content Memory check sum error PCU Detail PCU memory check sum error Cause EEPROM trouble EEPROM is not initialized PCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble Uninitialized EEPROM installed Check and Check that EEPROM is properly inserted remedy Save the counter adjustment values with the DIAG simulation Use DIAG SIM
242. nsor AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 10 The following units are added when the punch unit is installed to the console finisher FPE Punch motor encoder FPSHPS Punch side register HP FPUC Punch connection detection FPDS Punch dust sensor FPDSS4 Punch side register sensor 4 FPDSS3 Punch side register sensor 3 FPDSS2 Punch side register sensor 2 FPDSS1 Punch side register sensor 1 FPTS Punch timing sensor 3 3 Purpose Operation test check Function Content Used to check the operation under load in the finisher and their control circuits Section Finisher Item Operation Operation Procedure The display is highlighted when detected SIMULATION 3 3 FINISHER LOAD TEST SELECT 1 AND PRESS START CUSTOM SETTING key to stop Press START key to get started Press SIMULATION 3 3 FINISHER LOAD TEST EXECUTING lt List of display values gt 3 6 Purpose Adjustment Function Content Used to adjust the stacking capacity of the finisher AR FN6 Used to adjust the alignment plate jogger stop position in the finisher paper width direction The adjustment is made by changing the alignment plate home position in the paper width direction by software Section Finisher Item Operation Operation Procedure Enter the adjustment value with 10 digit key pad and
243. nssumea 00 O SON L1H aT CT oT as NZAddV OS Wl ome Aide sed enuen MSW 3sn4 7 NI OV uldzz zur ls YIMOd Y Odd Sdt i acr erien Je uonejep Uld Hz onoajep aunjesadua sejjos3eaH LUS vaca nov dOdY OJAN SE E ONISNA dIdV S4AdW Dour poe Jaded enueyy LI ao uonpejp dopuidnajr uomooiep emesseo uds NOlLdO nav jodsues Jaded H Md YAH Odd Wl Hd 99 ugro el NA AH losuas soj u do 1 109 jeuiuo yun 471108 Sd pun 3113SSVO S20 emp podsueg ded TOY del aoe 8Md a Lun Oe voe poisson UM anl rei Hd uM ulde uej uonong Jos ies uonisod euiou souy un pesi seded agesseo Jd dad gt mma gt N as SdHIN yun 1009 HoT 8Md Nod Cu NO9A109 uld8 344d NOILdO ASI Gal Cwa gt uds O44 Nd INYA NIV SIS ei Lu j HOAG pasea ROO y sosuas uoenusouoo sg GO iL HANSA NOD aa piousjos uonesedas eded Sd d yun AQ Uld89 81989 ISOS RI amd Uld9 GOLON 4d8 AND i uge uldgz Hd ejgeo e euojul SH3NNVOS WEI J DES 044 044 iari anae ae al PER p Dee un gio ND EE p DS ayoga 3HLOIN gog dal ais eesje Q JjdSa H3ddOH H3NOL ESCH Md INF NDS e rama dS uonoejep uedo 100p 497 uonoejep uedo Joop Moi uejisheuxo jeet uldze b on EEA 933 y Me gt msa NIN Udoz i555 amd SQ T uj jsnetxo euozo Ue Burjooo jeten 8Md 199 Wd L d W I Uldt eegal e za E I Elda biais SANI on ova L S uonosgjep jee Jade 1 NOILdO Ire ear a91 ASAJAIT3Q NINO EA T3NVd do LINN H3NNVOS i l
244. onth of packing X stands for October Y November and Z December X stands for October Y November and Z December 8 9 Number 8 9 Number Indicates the day of the month of packing Indicates the day of the month of packing 10 Letter 10 Letter Indicates the production factory A for Nara Plant Indicates the production factory A for Nara Plant B Toner cartridge 3 Environmental conditions The lot number is composed of 7 digits each digit indicates the A Operating conditions following The lot number shall be printed in the position shown below 112138314151 61 7 30 C 85 85 gt 1 Version number A sequentially revised H 2 Numeral figure SZ 3 Indicates the end digit of the production year gt 35 C 60 3 Letter o Indicates the production factory B for SOCC 4 Destination code r 5 6 Numeral figures Indicates the production day 20 7 Numeral figure or X Y Z Indicates the production month 10 Temperature C 35 X stands for October Y November and Z December Without dew condensation B Storage conditions Lot No Location 90 2 kej E 2 I Lot No Location 20 Heat seal 10 Temperature IC 40 Without dew condensation Aluminum bag AR M350 CONSUMABLE PARTS 4 5 5 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 1 Appearance 1 DSPF exit area Scanned originals are deposited here Document feeding area cover Open to remove misfeed originals
245. orm read write check of the ICU image the sync signal HSYNC is delivered or not After starting NOW CHECKING is displayed during checking When the test is normally completed OK is displayed When an error occurs NG is displayed SIMULATION 60 1 DRAM TEST SELECT 1 2 AND PRESS START 1 ICU DRAM 2 ASIC DRAM Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key Wb SIMULATION 60 1 1 ICU DRAM DRAM TEST NOW CHECKING Check completed zum Press CUSTOM SETTING ey SIMULATION 60 1 1 ICU DRAM DRAM TEST OK or NG lt List of set values gt 1 ICU DRAM Image memory for ERDH SIMULATION 61 1 LSU TEST PRESS START UT Kg Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key E SIMULATION 61 1 1 LSU LSU TEST NOW CHECKING Check completed SIMULATION 61 1 LSU TEST OK or NG 1 LSU 61 2 zn Press CUSTOM SETTING ey Purpose Adjustment Function Content Used to adjust the laser power absolute value in the copy mode 2 ASIC DRAM Image memory for ASIC Section PCU Item Operation Operation Procedure Enter the laser power set value in copying and press START to store it SIMULATION 61 2 1 AE B 3 MIX P LASER POWER SETTING COPY SELECT 1 4 AND PRESS START 2 CHARA E 4 PHOTO E Press START
246. ot copied Photo Photo 3 3 Copied 2 Not copied Auto 3 Copied 2 Not copied If the copy density is too light increase the adjustment value If the copy density is too dark decrease the adjustment value Adjustment range 30 170 This adjustment is used when a different density level for AR M350 ADJUSTMENTS 9 9 different copy quality mode is required SIM 46 5 to 7 and SIM 46 9 to 11 are used 1 Execute the simulation corresponding to the copy quality mode to be adjusted SIMULATION 46 9 EXP LEVEL SETUP CHAR 2 SELECT 0 11 AND PRESS START 0 TRAY eve E A 1 COPY START 2 EXP LEVEL 3 1 0 E EJ 5 2 0 a 6 2 5 7 3 0 BW 8 3 5 9 4 0 CR 45 EY 11 5 0 Select other ui 0 2 and press START Key Press CUSTOM SETTING key mune mune SIMULATION 46 9 EXP LEVEL SETUP CHAR 2 INPUT VALUE 0 99 AND PRESS START Or copying is terminated Select 1 and I Press START key press STARTIIKSY l Y Press CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 46 9 EXP LEVEL SETUP CHAR 2 NOW COPYING Select 0 and Press START key o press START key press CUSTOME SETTING ke d SIMULATION 46 9 EXP LEVEL SETUP CHAR 2 SELECT 1 5 AND PRESS START FEED TRAY 1 TRAY1 2 TRAY2 3 TRAY3 4 TRAY4 5 MFT Select 2 and Press START key or press START key press C
247. ous laser radiation For your safety observe the precautions below aa A e Do notremove the cabinet operation panel or any other covers KLASS 1 LASERAPPARAT e The equipment s exterior covers contain several safety interlock switches Do not bypass any safety interlock by inserting wedges or other items into switch slots CAUTION INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN INTERLOCKS Caution DEFEATED AVOID EXPOSURE Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in TO BEAM hazardous radiation exposure VORSICHT UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GE FFNET UND SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG BERBR CKT NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN ADVARSEL USYNLIG LASERSTR LNING VED BNING N R SIKKERHEDSBRYDERE ER UDE AF FUNKTION UNDG UDSAETTELSE FOR STR LNING VAROITUS LAITTEEN KAYTTAMINEN MUULLA KUIN TASSA KAYTTOOHJEESSA MAINITULLA TAVALLA SAATTAA ALTISTAA KAYTTAJAN TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1 Rx aM YLITT V LLE INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED NAKYMATTOMALLE de e po LASERS TEILYLLE USYNLIG LASERSTRALING VED BNING NAR SIKKERHEDSAFBRYDERE ER A eC n CLASS 1 VARNING ADVERSEL UNNG EKSPONERING FOR STR LEN LASER PRODUCT OM APPARATEN ANVANDS PA OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING N R DENNA DEL AR PPNAD OCH SP RRAR AR URKOPPLADE STRALEN AR FARLIG BETRAKTA EJ STR LEN
248. ove are recognized as Japan Conforms to Advisory Document T 35 SIMULATION 66 3 FAX PWB MEMORY CHECK MFP SRAM CHECKING MFP FLASH NO CHECK MFP OP FLASH NO CHECK MODEM EEPROM NG A0010000 MODEM SRAM G A NO CHECK MODEM SRAM NG A11 MODEM SDRAM OK List of display values gt NO CHECK Not checked CHECKING Checking OK Check complete OK NG Check error Items MFP SRAM MFP control PWB SRAM MFP FLASH FAX UE PWB FLASH Memory AR MM9 MFP OP FLASH FAX I F PWB MODEM EEPROM FAX PWB MODEM SRAM G A FAX PWB MODEM SRAM FAX PWB MODEM SDRAM FAX PWB AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 61 List of set values 66 4 1 No signal 17 12 0 V33 2 33 6 V34 18 14 4 V17 Purpose Operation test check 3 31 2 V34 19 112 0 V17 Function Content Used to check the operation of data signal output 4 288 V34 20 9 6 V17 in the FAX data output mode 5 264 V34 21 72 V17 Used to check the MODEM operation 6 240 V34 22 9 6 V29 Send level Odb Max 7 21 6 V34 23 7 2 V29 Only when FAX is installed 8 192 V34 24 14 8 V27t Section FAX 9 16 8 V34 25 2 4V27t tem Operation 10 14 4 V34 26 0 3FLG Operation Procedure Signal output check level Max 11 120 V34 27 CED2100 When CUSTOM SETTING is pressed during 12 9 6 V 4 28 CNG1100 execution of this simulation exe
249. pad SIMULATION 48 1 3 Press START to store the set value MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT INPUT VALUE 0 99 AND PRESS START Default 50 set range 0 99 3 CCD MAIN Select 1 and I Press START key press STARTIKEY Y Press CUSTOM SETTING key Or copying is terminated SIMULATION 48 5 MOTOR SPEED ADJUSTMENT SELECT 0 5 AND PRESS START SIMULATION 48 1 o mir 220 BJ 1 mir 169 Ef MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT NOW COPYING 2 MIR 110 3 MIR 55 4 SPF 220 EY 5 SPF 110 EN EN Select 0 and Press START key or E E press Ese press CUSTOME SETTING key er ae o z press START key Press START key or SIMULATION 48 1 SIMULATION 48 1 CUSTOM SETTING key MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT SELECT 1 15 AND PRESS START FEED TRAY 1 TRAY1 2 TRAY2 3 TRAY3 4 TRAY4 SIMULATION 48 5 5 BPT SCAN MOTOR SPEED ADJUSTMENT INPUT VALUE 0 99 AND PRESS ABOVE 10 DUPLEX MODE START 50 0 MIR 220 Ge Sm Em mm Press START Key or press GUSIGNESEUHNGIKSNE lt List of display values gt SIMULATION 48 1 Mi a irror motor 220mm MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT ius otor 220mm sec MAGNIFICATION Mirror motor 168 7mm INPUT 25 400 96 100 Mirror motor 110mm sec Mirror motor 55mm sec SPF motor 220mm sec SPF motor 110mm sec oA OIN o AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 47 Li
250. peat MFPC gt MDMC CMD repeat ONDAN MFPC MDMC I F CHECK INPUT 1 8 AND PRESS START Press START key SIMULATION 66 36 EXECUTING MFPC MDMC UE CHECK INPUT 1 8 AND PRESS START D When check is once or repeat and the result is NG When check is repeat and CUSTOM SETTING key is pressed SIMULATION 66 36 MFPC MDMC I F CHECK INPUT EXECUTING OK or NG 8 AND PRESS START lt List of display values gt 1 MFPC lt MDMC Data line once only 2 MFPC MDMC Data line once only 2 MFPC lt MDMC Data line repeat 4 MFPC gt MDMC Data line repeat 5 MFPC lt MDMC Command line once only 6 MFPC gt MDMC Command line once only 7 MFPC lt MDMC Command line repeat 8 MFPC gt MDMC Command line repeat AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 72 Main code 67 67 16 67 2 Purpose Operation test check Function Content Used to check the operation of the network card Purpose Operation test check Section Printer Function Content Used to check the parallel I F operation of the printer This simulation is made only in the production site and not in the market It requires a special tool Section Printer Item Operation Operation Procedure The Centro port is checked 1 Insert the adjustment jig into the Centro port under the ready state and press STRT
251. performed in HP LaserJet 4000 Small margin difference rendering difference by different font family default and transfer function difference are not to be included in the compatibility SPD Supporting Parity Not support ECC Not support Operation assured Memory As of March 2001 Manufacture Capacity Model name RAM CHIP name Note Kingston 128MB KVR133X64C3 HYB39S64800BT Technology 128 7 5 128MB KVR133X64C3 D456821G A75 128 9JF 256MB KVR133X64C3 HY57V28820AT H 256 Viking 64MB VIK8641CL2 1PD456841G5 Compornents A80 9JF 64MB VIK8641CL2 D456841G5 A80 9JF 128MB VIK6642CL2 TC59SM708FT 80 128MB VIK6642CL2 D4564841G5 A80 9JF 256MB VIK2642CL2 TC59SM708FT 80 Memory Card 64MB DM864VS65804X GM72V66841 XT75 Technology 7G 128MB DM1665VS65804 HY57V64820HG X 7G C Scanner function 1 Scanner function Scanner mode Scan to E mail Internet FAX Scan to Server Client PC 2 Support System Embedded server SMTP server FTP server Protocol TCP IP 3 Support Image Format TIFF PDF TIFF F Compression method Uncompressed G3 1 dimension 1 G4 2 1 G3 1 dimension MH Modified Huffman 2 G4 MMR Modified MR 4 Transmission Mode DSPF OC transmission switching O Switching during the reading is not feasible AR M350 SPECIFICATIONS 3 3 5 Imag
252. pose Data clear Purpose Operation test check Function Content Used to set the FAX soft switch setup to the default Except for the adjustment values Function Content Used to check the operations of FAX PWB memory read write with a number 2 Select the country code and press START to rewrite the setting 3 Select a number 1 2 with 10 digit key pad and press START to execute 1 FAX soft SW clear 2 Not clear 4 The soft switch excluding the FAX adjustment value corresponding to the selected country code is cleared Section Fax This adjustment is required when replacing the Item Data PWB with a new one Operation Procedure The current set value of SW1 is displayed Section Fax Entry of 1 8 only is effective Item Data 1 Specify the bit to be changed highlighted Operation Procedure Check the FAX PWB memory When this simulation is executed the error occurring address or the data line is displayed 5 The selected country is highlighted SIMULATION 66 2 FAX SOFT SW CLEAR WIHTOUT ADJUSTMENT VALUE INPUT COUNTRY CODE AND PRESS START Press START key SIMULATION 66 2 FAX SOFT SW CLEAR ARE YOU SURE T YES 2 NO Country codes Japan 0 U S A 10110101 Australia 1001 U K 10110100 France 111101 Germany 100 Canada 100000 Netherlands 1111011 The codes other than the ab
253. print density for each density level Adjustment Picture Density display value in the copy mode binary Text Photo mode quality A desired print density can be set for each density level display value 11 Used to adjust the print density for each density level Adjustment Picture display value in the copy mode binary Photo mode quality A desired print density can be set for each density level display value 12 Used to adjust the print density in the FAX mode all modes Adjustment Picture An adjustment with this simulation affects all the copy density quality adjustment values Only when FAX is installed 13 Used to adjust the print density in the FAX mode Adjustment Picture normal mode Only when FAX is installed quality 14 Used to adjust the print density in the FAX mode Adjustment Picture small text mode Only when FAX is installed quality 15 Used to adjust the print density in the FAX mode fine mode Adjustment Picture Only when FAX is installed quality 16 Used to adjust the print density in the FAX mode Adjustment Picture super fine mode Only when FAX is installed quality 17 Used to adjust the CCD CIS shading reference value Setup check Picture quality 18 Used to adjust gamma density gradient in each copy mode Adjustment Picture Density quality 19 Used to adjust gamma density gradient in the auto copy mode Adjustment Picture Density and to set the density detection area and to set the image
254. ptical unit has occurred the whole optical unit must be exchanged as a unit not as individual parts 2 Donotlook into the machine with the main switch turned on after removing the developer unit toner cartridge and drum cartridge 3 Do not look into the laser beam exposure slit of the laser optical unit with the connector connected when removing and installing the optical system 4 The middle frame contains the safety interlock switch Do not defeat the safety interlock by inserting wedges or other items into the switch slot Cautions on laser Wave length 785nm 10nm At the production line the output power of the scanner unit i5nm is adjusted to 0 4 MILLIWATT PLUS 8 and is maintained North America constant by the operation of the Automatic Power Control APC 35 cpm model 4 1 us 4 1 ns 7 mm Pulse times 45 cpm model 5 7 us 5 7 ns 7 mm Caution Europe This product contains a low power laser device To ensure e opm ERE a Hs 2 id mm safety do not remove any cover or attempt to gain access cpm model 4 4 us 4 4 ns 7 mm 9 the inside of the product Refer all servicing to qualified Output power 0 2 mW 0 4 mW personnel For North America For Europe SAFETY PRECAUTIONS CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT This Digital Equipment is rated Class 1 and complies with 21 CFR 1040 10 and 1040 11 of the LASER KLASSE 1 CDRH standards This means that the equipment does not produce hazard
255. ptions and illustrations may be different Scanner document feeder device Finishing device Duplex bypass device Main unit Finishing device Main unit Duplex device Paper feeding device Paper feeding device Start of installation Main unit paper feeding gt lt 1 device and power supply unit Install controller board facsimile unit or other electric devices AR M11 AR NC5J AR HD3 AR FX5 AR MM9 AR PK1 AR NS2 AR NC5J Electrical setting adjustment Extended memory Controller board facsimile unit or other electric devices installed AR MU1 AR DC1 AR D13 AR DC1 AR D14 AR DC1 Main unit Install duplex pypass device Duplex bypass Yes 1 Installation of driver software setting device installed AR DU3 and operation check AR DU4 Main unit AR EF 1 AR M11 AR NC5J AR HD3 AR FX5 AR PK1 AR NS2 No 2 Paper guide position adjustment off center adjustment Install finishing device AR MUMS DISAB DIS 9 i AR DU3 AR DU4 X3 Finishing device Yes AR MS1 AR DC1 installed AR FN6 AR DC1 AR FN7 AR PN1A B C D End No Install scanner document feeder X1 When installing a paper feeding device an optional power supply unit or a duplex bypass device be Scanner document Yes AR M350 M450 only sure to reattach the rear cabinet the AC inlet cover and the harness cover of the main unit at the end feeder
256. r alignment motor With Finisher PCU trouble FRONT installed 20 Finisher alignment motor With Finisher PCU trouble installed 80 Finisher 24V power supply With Finisher PCU trouble installed 87 Finisher staple rotation motor With Finisher trouble installed F1 00 Mail bin stacker communication With Mail bin PCU trouble stacker installed 02 mail bin stacker main drive With Mail bin PCU motor trouble stacker installed 12 Mail bin stacker gate trouble With Mail bin PCU stacker installed 80 Mail bin stacker 24V power With Mail bin PCU supply trouble stacker installed Trouble Contents Remark Trouble codes detection F1 03 Console finisher paddle motor With Console PCU trouble Finisher installed 06 Console finisher slide motor With Console PCU trouble Finisher installed 10 Console finisher stapler motor With Console PCU trouble Finisher installed 11 Console finisher bundle exit With Console PCU motor trouble Finisher installed 15 Console finisher lift motor With Console PCU trouble Finisher installed 19 Console finisher alignment With Console PCU motor trouble FRONT Finisher installed 20 Console finisher alignment With Console PCU motor trouble Finisher installed 30 Console finisher With Console PCU communication trouble Finisher installed 31 Console finisher fold sensor With Console PCU trouble Finisher installed 32 Console finisher punch unit With Console
257. re registered as service parts D Middle East Africa NO Name Content Life Product name Remark 1 Toner CA Black Toner Toner Net Weight 814g 27K AR 450FT Life setup is based on A4 6 2 Developer Developer Developer Net Weight 450g 100K AR 450SD 3 Drum Drum x1 50K AR 450DR 4 50K PM kit Cleaner blade x1 50K AR 450KC Drum separation pawl x4 Screen grid x1 Toner reception seal x1 Side malt F x1 Side malt R x1 Charging plate x1 5 100K PM kit Transfer roller x1 100K AR 450KA Discharging plate x1 Paper dust removing unit x1 DV blade x1 DV side seal F x1 DV side seal R x1 6 200K PM kit Upper heat roller x1 200K AR 450KB Lower heat roller x1 Fusing separation pawl Upper x4 Fusing separation pawl Lower x2 Cleaning roller x1 Bearing x2 7 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 3000x3 AR SC1 Common with cartridge for AR FN4 amp AR FN6 8 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000x3 AR SC2 Common with cartridge for AR FN7 Note1 Print on Master individual carton 4 languages English French German Spanish Note2 Packed with machine DR 50K Developer UN Process UN Note3 The other maintenance parts which are not listed above are registered as service parts AR M350 CONSUMABLE PARTS 4 2 E Israel Russia CIS Philippines NO Name Content Life Product name Remark 1 Toner CA Black Toner Toner Net Weight 814g 27K AR 450FT Life
258. replace or adjust as necessary O Clean A Replace A Adjust x Lubricate O Move position Option name Part name en 50K 100K 150K 200K 250K 300K 350K 400K Remark AD Paper f Paper feed Note 3 SEH feed dco NN E O x a x 9 x O x O x Separation pad O x O x O x O x O x Note 3 Torque limiter O x x x x x Note 3 Transport section Transport rollers O O O O O O O O O heu PPer o lolololololololo Drive section Gears Specified position Belts x Other Sensors x x x x x Desk Paper fi Paper feed Note 3 e stage LCC ddr section ici O X o x o x O x O x Multi purpose Torque limiter O x x x x x Note 3 Transport section Transport roller O O O O O O O O O ao lo lolololololololo Drive section Gears Specified position Belts x Other Sensors x x x x x Finisher Transport section Transport rollers O O O O O De curler roller O x x O x O x O x O act paper o o o o o Drive section Gears Specified position Belts x Other Sensors x x x x x Discharge brush x x x x x Staple un Replace UN at 100K staple Staple cartridge User replacement for every 3000pcs Mail bin Transport section Transport roller O O O O O stacker r r morem were rg re Drive section Gears Specified position Belts x Other Sensors x x x x x Discharge brush x x x x x Saddle finisher Transport section Transport roller O O O O O Transport paper alles E O o p O O Drive section Gears Specified position Belts x O
259. res 1 2 repeat the adjustment again N SIMULATION 41 2 PD SENSOR ADJUSTMENT SELECT1 2 AND PRESS START PLEASE OPEN THE ORIGINAL COVER EE When 1 is selected 1 NO ORIGINAL press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING Key 2 A3 ORIGINAL mime SIMULATION 41 2 PD SENSOR ADJUSTMENT NO ORIGINAL COMPLETE or ERROR email A3 ORIGINAL INCOMPLETE When 2 is selected press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key In case of an error SIMULATION 41 2 PD SENSOR ADJUSTMENT NO ORIGINAL COMPLETE A3 ORIGINAL COMPLETE or ERROR at WARR Y AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 33 41 3 Main code 43 Purpose Operation test check 43 1 Function Content Used to check the operation of the document o OO _ E e M3 size sensor and the related circuit Purpose Setup The output level of the document size sensor can be monitored on the LCD display Function Content Used to set the fusing temperature in each operation mode Section Other Section Fusing paper exit Item Operation Item Operation Operation Procedure The OC document sensor detection level is Operation Procedure The fusing control temperature is set displayed Real time display SIMULATION 41 3 PD SENSOR DATA DISPLAY PD1 128 200 PD3 128 50 PD5 128 51 PD7 128 52 PD2 128 200 PD4 128 52 PD6 1
260. ress CUSTOME SETTING key SIMULATION 46 10 EXP LEVEL SETUP MIX 2 SELECT 3 11 AND PRESS START EXP LEVEL SELECT 3 1 0 4 1 5 5 2 0 6 2 5 7 3 0 8 3 5 9 4 0 10 4 5 11 5 0 List of set values 1 O Paper feed tray selection 1 Copy start Default 2 Exposure level selection 3 Exposure level 1 0 4 Exposure level 1 5 5 Exposure level 2 0 6 Exposure level 2 5 7 Exposure level 3 0 8 Exposure level 3 5 9 Exposure level 4 0 10 Exposure level 4 5 11 Exposure level 5 0 lt List of display values 1 gt Normal display NOW COPYING ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN Jam JAM paper empty PAPER EMPTY lt List of set values 2 gt 1 TRAY1 2 TRAY2 3 TRAY3 4 TRAY4 5 Manualfeed List of set values 3 gt 3 Exposure level 1 0 4 Exposure level 1 5 5 Exposure level 2 0 6 Exposure level 2 5 7 Exposure level 3 0 8 Exposure level 3 5 9 Exposure level 4 0 10 Exposure level 4 5 11 Exposure level 5 0 AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 38 46 11 Purpose Adjustment Function Content Used to adjust the print density for each density level display value in the copy mode binary Photo mode A desired reading density can be set for each density level display value Section Item Picture quality Operation P
261. ress CUSTOME SETTING key E SIMULATION 53 6 SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT POSITION 1 COMPLETE or ERROR Select 3 and E E press START key Press CUSTOME SETTING key SIMULATION 53 6 SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT POSITION 2 COMPLETE or ERROR Select 4 and press START key Press CUSTOME SETTING key SIMULATION 53 6 SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT MIN POSITION COMPLETE or ERROR AR M350 ADJUSTMENTS 9 10 10 SIMULATIONS 1 Entering the simulation mode Enter the copy mode and perform the following procedures P gt El C gt E 2 Switching the simulation mode Press USER SETTING to return to the code entry screen 3 Canceling the simulation mode Press CA key to cancel the simulation mode 4 Simulation list gt Main code START Sub code START Code Function Content Purpose Section Item Main Sub 1 1 Used to check the operations of the scanner reading unit and Operation test check Scanner reading Operation its control circuit 2 Usedto check the operations of the sensors and detectors in Operation test check Scanner reading Operation the scanner reading unit and their control circuits 2 1 Usedto check the operations of the automatic document feeder Operation test check DSPF Operation unit and its control circuit 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors
262. riginal size detection when using the table glass 9 CIS unit in CIS unit The CIS unit cannot be disassembled Image scan SPF back surface 10 CIS interface PWB in CIS unit The CIS unit cannot be disassembled CIS signal AD conversion process 11 Scanner interface PWB Scanner unit and connection of scanner control PWB 12 CIS control PWB CIS unit control and image process 13 CL inverter PWB Inverter for copy lamp 14 Scanner control PWB Scanner unit control 7 Motor Clutch Solenoid No Name Function Operation 1 SPFM SPF motor Original transport in SPF scan 2 SPSC SPF original resist clutch SPF original scan timing adjustment 3 SPFC SPF original feed clutch SPF original feed roller drive 4 SDSS SPF original stopper solenoid SPF original stopper gate drive 5 MIRM Mirror motor Mirror base copy lamp base drive 6 SPFS SPF original feed solenoid SPF original feed unit drive 7 STMPS Stamp solenoid Finish stamp drive Option AR SU1 required AR M350 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 5 7 6 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 1 Installing procedure flowchart There are many combinations between this machine and option units For installing option units observe the following procedures for efficiency To install the devices effciently follow the procedure below Some peripheral devices may have been installed as standard devices depending on the main unit model Part of descri
263. rite error 83 Delete error 84 Verify error NG Due to loader error 66 36 aC _ M A M a s cc ca st c e in Purpose Operation test check Function Content Used to check interface between MFPC and MDMC Check is made in the data line or the 66 35 Purpose Operation test check Function Content Modem program rewriting Section FAX Item Operation Operation Procedure The modem program in the FAX program is rewritten 1 Select with 10 digit key pad and press START to execute the following 1 MODEM program rewrite 2 Not clear 2 Check the check sum value loader If it is OK the test is normally completed If NG the check sum value 1 byte hexadecimal is displayed 3 If the check sum value is NG the MODEM result is also NG 4 The Modem rewrite result is displayed Communication means memory transmission command line Image quality Normal Section FAX Density Thin Item Operation ECM ON Operation Procedure 1 Select with 10 digit key pad and press START Sender record OFF 2 When check is repeat the operation is executed until the result becomes NG or CUSTOM SETTING is pressed SIMULATION 66 36 1 MFPC lt MDMC DATA once MFPC gt MDMC DATA once MFPC lt MDMC DATA repeat MFPC gt MDMC DATA repeat MFPC lt MDMC CMD once MFPC gt MDMC CMD once MFPC lt MDMC CMD re
264. rminated Dial is set with the setup value of 19ms SIMULATION 66 14 DIAL TEST 10PPS SELECT 0 1 AND PRESS START 0 EXECUTE 1 MAKE TIME A 29 ms Select 1 and press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key or START key SIMULATION 66 14 DIAL TEST 10PPS SELECT 0 15 AND PRESS START 1 MAKE TIME Press CUSTOM SETTING key Select 0 and press START key mmn SIMULATION 66 14 DIAL TEST 10PPS EXECUTING 1 MAKE TIME f 29 ms lt List of set values gt 0 Execution 1 Dial pulse make time setup 0 15 Dial is send with the setup value of 29ms AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 67 66 16 66 18 Purpose Setup Purpose Setup Function Content Used to test the dial signal DTMF output in the FAX tone dial mode The dial number signal set with SIM 66 13 is outputted The send level can be set to an optional level Used to check dialing troubles and the operation Function Content Fax tone dial mode The send level set with the soft switch is outputted Used to check the dial IC operation 1 The level dB setup is made Set range 0 15dB 2 The difference between high group and low group is set Set range 0 15 3 When CUSTOM SETTING is pressed the execution is terminated Forthe set value refer to the soft SW specifications 0 EXECU
265. rocedure The exposure mode to be set is selected Photo mode 1 The current set value is highlighted on the right side of each item In this screen be sure to select 1 COPY START Set value 1 2 Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad Press P to store the set value Default 50 set range O 99 3 Press START and copying is started and the Set value is stored Display value 1 4 Select a paper feed tray Set value 2 5 Select an exposure level Set value 3 EXP LEVEL S 0 TRAY SELE SIMULATION 46 11 2 EXP LEVEL 3 1 0 EU 4 15 EU 5 20 Eu 6 2 5 EN 7 30 E 8 35 EY 9 4 0 EJ 10 4 5 El 11 5 0 ETUP PHOTO2 SELECT 0 11 AND PRESS START Select oth and press er than 0 2 START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key CT 1 COPY START A mme 1 1 0 SIMULATION 46 11 EXP LEVEL SETUP PHOTO2 INPUT VALUE 0 99 AND PRESS START Select 1 and press START key Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key Or copying is terminated SIMULATION 46 11 EXP LEVEL SETUP PHOTO2 NOW COPYING press START key Press START key or press CUSTOME SET E ING key FEED TRAY 5 BPT SIMULATION 46 11 EXP LEVEL SETUP PHOTO2 SELECT 1 5 AND PRESS START 1 TRAY1 2 TRAY2 3 TRAY3 4 TRAY4 Select 2 and press START key
266. rpendicular to the sub scanning direction 3 Measure distance A at a position 220mm apart from the point of 4 Check that distance A satisfies the specification below paper transport direction with a square At that time let the point of intersection of the perpendicular line and the horizontal line be the start point intersection of the vertical line outputted by self print and the line drawn with a square 3 Print lead edge 220mm Spec A Within 0 5mm 220mm If the printout is out of the specifications perform the following procedures Loosen two screws M4 which are fixing the LSU Turn the adjustment screw on the upper side rear of the printer operation panel clockwise and counterclockwise to adjust the height of the LSU front side After completion of adjustment tighten the two fixing screws of the LSU unit Print the grid pattern again and check it Repeat procedures 7 to 10 until the printout is in the specified range 10 After completion of the work apply screw lock to the screws a Print lead edge lt Specifications gt Measurement Specification Set value position Print distortion SIM 64 1 90 0 13 Adjustment adjustment Self print pattern 71 scale 1 about 0 25 shift in 0 B Print off center adjustment This adjustment is performed in the follow
267. rror Controller 01 FAX expansion Flash Rom When the Fax ICU Controller EEPROM abnormality board is 12 Adjustment value check sum Controller installed error Controller EEPROM 04 FAX MODEM operation When the Fax FAX 80 Scanner section EEPROM When the SCANNER abnormality board is read write error scanner is installed installed F7 01 FAX board EEPROM When the Fax FAX 81 Scanner section memory sum When the SCANNER read write error board is check error scanner is installed installed H2 00 Thermistor open HL1 PCU 90 PCU section EEPROM read PCU 01 Thermistor open HL2 PCU write error H3 00 Heat roller high temperature PCU 91 PCU section memory sum PCU detection HL1 check error 01 Heat roller high temperature PCU U7 00 PC MODEM communication Controller detection HL2 error H4 00 Heat roller low temperature PCU PF RIC copy inhibit command Controller detection HL1 reception 01 Heat roller low temperature PCU CH Door open CH ON PCU detection HL2 00 No developer cartridge PCU H5 01 5 time continuous POD1 PCU 01 No toner cartridge PCU EEN Auditor not ready Controller ET 100 eme Trouble anon the SCANNER PC Personal counter not installed Controller scanner is installed L3 00 Scanner return trouble When the SCANNER 2 Details of trouble codes NE MAIN SUB installed L4 01 main motor lock detection PCU sl 00 content MO ouble 02 Drum motor lock detection PCU Detail GE abnormal
268. rror Detail Adjustment data area check sum error Detail Controller Centro port trouble Cause EEPROM trouble Cause Centro port trouble Control circuit trouble by noise Controller PWB trouble Controller PWB EEPROM access circuit Checkand Replace the Controller PWB trouble remedy Check and Check that EEPROM is properly inserted 03 Content NIC port check error remedy Save the counter adjustment values with the Detail NIC port check error DIAG simulation ease NIC port trouble Use DIAG SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble Ge Replace the SE PWB Controller PWB trouble 80 Content EEPROM read write error Scanner Checkand Replace the NIC PWB Details Scanner EEPROM write error remedy Replace the Controller PWB Cause EEPROM abnormality U1 01 Content FAX Battery abnormality EEPROM which is not initialized is installed Hang of control circuit due to noises Detail Backup SRAM battery voltage fall Scanner PWB EEPROM access circuit Cause Battery life abnormality Battery circuit abnormality Check amp Check that EEPROM is set properly Check and Check that the battery voltage is about 2 5V Remedy Record counter adjustment values with the remedy or above simulation to protect the data from being Check the battery circuit deleted 02 Content RTC read abnormality Cancel U2 trouble with SIM 16 common with FAX on ICU PWB Replace scanner PWB Details The value read from RTC on ICU PWB is 81 Content Memory check sum error Scanner EE h ab
269. rt Default 46 2 2 Exposure level selection e A 3 AE mode Purpose Adjustment 4 Text mode 30 Function Content Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode 5 Text Photo mode 30 binary auto text text photo photo mode 6 Photo mode 30 An adjustment with this simulation affects all the reading density adjustment values List of display values 1 Section Normal display NOW COPYING Item Picture quality ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN Operation Procedure The exposure mode to be set is selected Jam JAM Auto adjustment paper empty PAPER EMPTY 1 The current set value is highlighted on the right side of each item In this screen be sure List of set values 2 gt to select 1 COPY START Set value 1 1 TRAY1 2 Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad 2 TRAY2 Press P to store the set value 3 TRAY3 Default 50 set range 0 99 A TRAY4 3 Press START and copying is started and the 5 Manual feed set value is stored Display value 1 4 Select a paper feed tray Set value 2 List of set values 3 gt 5 Select an exposure level Set value 3 3 AE mode 4 Text mode 30 SIMULATION 46 2 5 Text Photo mode 30 EXP LEVEL SETUP 2 SELECT 0 6 AND PRESS START 6 Photo mode 30 AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 36 List of set values 1 46 9 O Paper feed tray selection SS 1 Copy start Default Purpose Adjustment e 2 Exposure level selection Function
270. rtion Fig 1 First copy image Fig 2 First copy image Difference Difference wc A In the case of Fig 1 Shift cam A in the direction A by the difference in the copy image For one scale one groove shift by 0 5mm After shifting tighten the fixing screw M3 x 12 of cam A and make a copy again and check the copy again to insure that there is no distortion In the case of Fig 2 Shift cam A in the direction B by the difference in the copy image For one scale one groove shift by 0 5mm After shifting tighten the fixing screw M3 x 12 of cam A and make a copy again and check the copy again to insure that there is no distortion AR M350 ADJUSTMENTS 9 3 B OC scan distortion adjustment MB B rail height adjustment This adjustment requires a high level preciseness It is easier to perform the scanner unit distortion adjustment previously described Before performing this adjustment the following adjustment must have been completed LSU right angle adjustment 1 Make a test chart as shown below Print a self print pattern 71 2 Make a copy from the table glass and check it At that time set the test chart correctly If it is set in a distorted position the adjustment cannot be made correctly 3 Ifthe output value is not in the specified range perform the following adjustment 4 Remove the front cabinet in front of the scanner and check that installing pos
271. s been attached to cam B into the hole of the rack as shown in the illustration attach cam A to the shaft and secure it with a screw M3 x 6 Screw M3 x 6 Rack 3 Secure cam A with a cam A securing screw M3 x 12 At this time adjust the position of the head of the cam A securing screw to the center of the indicator line of cam A and secure the cam Indicator line CamA securing screw M3 x 12 4 Paste the rack sheet to the position shown in the illustration Rack sheet 5 Putthe scanner unit on the rack Hold the grips of the scanner unit put the scanner unit on the rack from the front of the rack by positioning the unit to the rack as shown in the illustration and gently slide the unit until it stops at the end of the rack 6 Secure the scanner unit Secure the scanner unit that has been put on the rack to the rack with three M4 stepped screws M4 stepped Screws 7 Remove the securing tape and securing screw for packing Remove all pieces of packing tape and the screw that secure the scanner module and remove the packing the notice sheet 8 Connect the cable Connect the connector of the scanner module to the connector of the main unit of the printer and tighten the two screws on the connector to secure the connector Caution To prevent damage to the pins inside the connector when inserting the connector align the guides of the connector exactly Conn
272. setup is based on A4 696 2 Developer Developer Developer Net Weight 450g 100K AR 450SD 3 Drum Drum x1 50K AR 450DR 4 50K PM kit Cleaner blade x1 50K AR 450KC Drum separation pawl x4 Screen grid x1 Toner reception seal x1 Side malt F x1 Side malt R x1 Charging plate x1 5 100K PM kit Transfer roller x1 100K AR 450KA Discharging plate x1 Paper dust removing unit x1 DV blade x1 DV side seal F x1 DV side seal R x1 6 200K PM kit Upper heat roller x1 200K AR 450KB Lower heat roller x1 Fusing separation pawl Upper x4 Fusing separation pawl Lower x2 Cleaning roller x1 Bearing x2 7 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 3000x3 AR SC1 Common with cartridge for AR FN4 amp AR FN6 8 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000x3 AR SC2 Common with cartridge for AR FN7 Note1 Print on Master individual carton 4 languages English French German Spanish Note2 Packed with machine DR 50K Developer UN Process UN Note3 The other maintenance parts which are not listed above are registered as service parts F Asia NO Name Content Life Product name Remark 1 Toner CA Black Toner Toner Net Weight 814g 27K AR 450ST Life setup is based on A4 6 2 Developer Developer Developer Net Weight 450g 100K AR 4505D 3 Drum Drum x1 50K AR 450DR 4 50K PM kit Cleaner blade x1 50K AR 450KC Drum separation pawl x4 Screen grid x1 Toner reception seal x1 Side malt F x1 Side malt R x1 Charging plate x1 5 100K PM
273. sher AR FN6 staple rotation motor Check and Canceled by turning OFF ON the power trouble remedy Check connectors and harness in the Detail Front staple rotation motor trouble communication line Replace the finisher control PWB or PCU Cause Motor lock i PWB Motor rpm abnormality i Overcurrent to the motor 08 Content Finisher AR FN6 staple shift motor trouble Finisher control PWB trouble Detail Staple motor drive trouble Check and Use DIAG SIM3 3 to check the motor Cause Motor lock remedy operation Motor rpm abnormality Fi 00 Content Mail bin stacker AR MS1 Overcurrent to the motor communication trouble Finisher control PWB trouble Detail Cammunicatie ble test CEU i unication cable test error after turnin Check and Use DIAG SIM3 3 to check operations of on the power or exiting from DIAG remedy the staple motor Communication error with the Mail bin 10 Content Finisher AR FN6 stapler motor trouble stacker Detail Stapler motor operation abnormality Cause Improper connection or disconnection of Cause Motor lock connector and harness between the machine Motor rpm abnormality and the Mail bin stacker Overcurrent to the motor Mail bin stacker control PWB trouble Console finisher control PWB trouble Control PWB PCU trouble Check and Use DIAG SIM3 3 to check the motor Malfunction by noises remedy operation Check and Canceled by turning OFF ON the power 11 Content Finisher AR FN6 bundle exit motor trouble remedy
274. sing separation pawl Upper x4 Fusing separation pawl Lower x2 Cleaning roller x1 Bearing x2 7 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 3000x3 AR SC1 Common with cartridge for AR FN4 amp AR FN6 8 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000x3 AR SC2 Common with cartridge for AR FN7 Note1 Print on Master individual carton 2 languages English Chinease Note2 Packed with machine DR 50K Developer UN Process UN Note3 The other maintenance parts which are not listed above are registered as service parts H Taiwan NO Name Content Life Product name Remark 1 Toner CA Black Toner Toner Net Weight 814g 27K AR 450FT T Life setup is based on A4 6 2 Developer Developer Developer Net Weight 450g 100K AR 450SD C 3 Drum Drum x1 50K AR 450DR C 4 50K PM kit Cleaner blade x1 50K AR 450KC Drum separation pawl x4 Screen grid x1 Toner reception seal x1 Side malt F x1 Side malt R x1 Charging plate x1 5 100K PM kit Transfer roller x1 100K AR 450KA Discharging plate x1 Paper dust removing unit x1 DV blade x1 DV side seal F x1 DV side seal R x1 6 200K PM kit Upper heat roller x1 200K AR 450KB Lower heat roller x1 Fusing separation pawl Upper x4 Fusing separation pawl Lower x2 Cleaning roller x1 Bearing x2 7 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 3000x3 AR SC1 Common with cartridge for AR FN4 amp AR FN6 8 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000x3 AR SC2 Common with cartridge for AR FN7
275. ss CUSTOMSETTING to terminate SIMULATION 66 8 MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK LEVEL MAX SELECT 1 20 AND PRESS ab START 1 NONE 2 PAUSE 3 MESSAGE1 z 4 MESSAGE2 5 MESSAGE3 6 MESSAGE4 7 MESSAGE5 8 MESSAGE6 9 MESSAGE7 10 MESSAGE8 11 MESSAGE9 12 MESSAGE10 z 13 MESSAGE11 14 MESSAGE12 15 MESSAGE13 16 MESSAGE14 17 MESSAGE15 18 ALARM S 19 RINGER 20 EXT TEL RINGER seec randpress START Key z Press CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 66 8 MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK LEVEL MAX SELECT 1 20 AND PRESS START EXECUTING 1 NONE 2 PAUSE 3 MESSAGE1 Same 4 MESSAGE2 5 MESSAGE3 6 MESSAGE4 display 7 MESSAGE5 8 MESSAGE6 9 MESSAGE7 10 MESSAGE8 11 MESSAGE9 12 MESSAGE10 13 MESSAGE11 14 MESSAGE12 15 MESSAGE13 16 MESSAGE14 17 MESSAGE15 18 ALARM 19 RINGER 20 EXT TEL RINGER E x Select 2 and press START key z SIMULATION 66 8 MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK LEVEL MAX SELECT 1 20 AND PRESS z START EXECUTING i 1 NONE 2 PAUSE 3 MESSAGE1 4 MESSAGE2 5 MESSAGE3 6 MESSAGE4 z 7 MESSAGE5 8 MESSAGE6 9 MESSAGE7 10 MESSAGE8 11 MESSAGE9 12 MESSAGE10 13 MESSAGE11 14 MESSAGE12 15 MESSAGE13 16 MESSAGE14 17 MESSAGE15 18 ALARM 19 RINGER 20 EXT TEL RINGER Press CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 66 8 z gt MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK LEVEL MAX SELECT 1 20 AND PRESS START 1 NONE 2 PAUSE 3 MESSAGE1 4 MESSAGE2 5 MESSAGE3 6 MESSAGE4
276. st of set values 1 Main code 50 Default Set range 0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray selection 1 5 AAR 1 COPY START Copy start Initial value i 3 Purpose Adjustment 2 MAGNIFICATION Print magnification ratio S 25 400 Function Content Used to adjust the copy image position and the setup void area image loss on print paper in the copy 3 RRCA Document scan start 50 0 99 mode A similar adjustment can be made with position adjustment l SIM 50 2 simple method 4 RRCB Resist roller clutchON 50 0 99 Section timing adjustment value Item Picture quality 5 DENB R d id 35 0 99 Operation Procedure Perform the copy lead edge adjustment diem tie quantity 1 The current set value is highlighted on the agpisumen bie ug right of each item In this screen be sure to 6 IMAGE Lead edge image loss 15 0 99 select 1 COPY START Set value 1 LOSS LEAD quantity set value 2 Enter the correction value with 10 digit key 7 IMAGE Side image loss quantity 20 0 99 pad LOSS SIDE set value Press P to store the set value 8 DENA Lead edge void quantity set 35 0 99 3 Press START to start copying and store the value set value Display value 1 9 FR VOIDFR Void quantity adjustment 35 0 99 4 Set the scan magnification ratio Set value 3
277. stomer has forgotten the key Item Counter operator code Operation Procedure The counter data below are displayed SIMULATION 22 7 KEY OPERATOR CODE DISPLAY Section ltem Data SE SIMULATION 22 9 Operation Procedure The key operator code is displayed PAPER FEED COUNTER DATA DISPLAY 20 ARMAR List of display value s TRAY1 Use quantity of tray 1 TRAY2 Use quantity of tray 2 Multi purpose tray TRAY3 Use quantity of tray 3 LCC left tray Common to Desk LCC TRAY4 Use quantity of tray 4 LCC right tray Desk LCC BPT Use quantity of manual feed tray ADU Use quantity of duplex paper feed AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 22 22 10 List of machine model codes Purpose Adjustment setup operation data output check display Function Content Used to check the system configuration option internal hardware Section Item Spec Operation Procedure The machine composition below is displayed SIMULATION 22 10 DESK LCC PROCESS TYPE SYSTEM INFORMATION SYSTEM MEMORY MB List of display value MACHINE AR P350 350LP AR P450 450LP AR M350 350M AR M450 450M SPF NONE Model code DSPF NONE Model code FINISHER NONE Model code MAIL
278. t until the power is turned off or setting is made again lt List of set values gt No jam detection Aging mode Aging mode without jam detection Aging mode without jam without warm up without fusing temperature control 4 Without warm up 5 Intermittent aging mode 6 Intermittent aging mode without jam detection Above 10 No process unit including developing unit detection Above 20 No shading Above 30 No process unit detection No shading Com oO 7 6 _ _ ___ _ gt M Purpose Setup Function Content Used to set the intermittent aging cycle Section Item Operation Operation Procedure Select with 10 digit key pad Used to set the intermittent aging cycle of Sim 7 1 SIMULATION 7 6 INTERVAL AGING CYCLE SETUP INPUT TIME AND PRESS START 1 999 UNIT sec AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 15 7 8 Purpose Setup 8 1 Function Content Used to set Enable Disable of warm up time p LLIEAYAkAKXAkEE e LALIb amp KCK XSe A qAR display Purpose Adjustment Section Function Content Used to check and adjust the developing bias Item Operation voltage in each print mode and its control circuit Operation Procedure The warm up time is displayed in the unit of Section Process second OPC drum developing tr
279. tal multi function device with the following functions 1 Copy function 2 Network scanner function The AR NS2 network scanner kit is required 3 Fax function The AR FX5 fax extending kit is required B Multi function controller AR M1 1 This unit is a multi function controller for the laser printer AR P350 P450 When installing the AR EF1 to the above laser printer the printer controller must be replaced with this multi function controller C Scanner rack AR RK1 This rack is required when installing the scanner unit AR EF1 with duplex DSPF to the laser printer AR P350 P450 M350 M450 To install this rack the machine must be equipped with the large capacity paper feed desk AR D13 or the 3 stage paper feed desk AR D14 D AR M350 M450 This machine is a version of the AR P350 P450 and is equipped with the multi function controller as standard equipments To install this model the large capacity paper feed desk AR D13 or the 3 stage paper feed desk AR D14 is required AR M350 PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 1 2 CONFIGURATION 1 System Configurations Exit tray AR TE3 or AR DUA Standard B W scanner module DSPF AR EF1 Saddle stitch finisher AR FN7 ee Upper exit tray Finisher Dupl extension medi bypass OTEN tray AR DU4 i lt A y AR MU1 S Stand MPD amp 2000 sheet Stand 3 x 500 sheet Simultaneous installation paper draw
280. ternal dimensions 30 x 415 x 860 mm Single goods WxDxH Occupied space dimensions WxD 575 x 415 mm State of installation 2pieces Weight Approx 5 kg 2pieces For the items which are not specified in this Service Manual refer to the AR P350 P450 Service Manual AR M350 SPECIFICATIONS 3 6 4 CONSUMABLE PARTS 1 Supply system table A USA NO Name Content Life Product name Remark 1 Toner CA Black Toner Toner Net Weight 814g 27K AR 450NT Life setup is based on A4 6 1 AR 450NT J 2 Developer Developer Developer Net Weight 450g 100K AR 450ND 3 Drum Drum x1 50K AR 450DR 4 50K maintenance kit Cleaner blade xi 50K AR 450KC1 Drum separation pawl x4 Screen grid x1 Toner reception seal x1 Side malt F x1 Side malt R x1 Charging plate x1 5 100K maintenance kit Transfer roller x1 100K AR 450KA1 Discharging plate x1 Paper dust removing unit x1 DV blade x1 DV side seal F x1 DV side seal R x1 6 Upper heat roller kit Upper heat roller x1 200K AR 450UH Fusing separation pawl Upper x4 7 Lower heat roller kit Lower heat roller x1 200K AR 450LH Fusing separation pawl Lower x2 8 Cleaner blade Cleaner blade x10 50K x10 AR 450CB AR 450CB AR 450BL x10 9 Cleaning roller Cleaning roller x10 200K x10 AR 450CR AR 450CR AR 450RC x10 Bearing x20 10 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 3000x3 AR SC1 Common with cartridge for AR FN4 amp
281. the display returns to the main code entry menu 2 Without canceling a trouble the display returns to the main code entry menu Function Content Used to cancel the self diag U6 09 20 21 22 trouble Section Paper feed Item Trouble Operation Procedure Select with 10 digit key pad SIMULATION 15 ARE YOU SURE 1 YES 2 NO LCC TROUBLE CANCELLATION List of set values Main code 15 Main code 21 Purpose Cancel incase of a trouble 21 1 amp _ _ _ Sa Purpose Setup Function Content Used to set the maintenance cycle Section Item Spec Operation Procedure 1 After canceling LCC trouble the display returns to the main code entry menu 2 Without canceling a trouble the display returns to the main code entry menu Used to set the maintenance cycle in an SRU machine SIMULATION 21 1 MAINTENANCE CYC 0 DEFAULT 4 100K 5 120K 1 40K 2 50K LE SETUP SELECT 0 6 AND PRESS START 3 80K 6 FREE List of set values O Maintenance display at the cycle of each control spec Maintenance display at 40K Maintenance display at 50K Main code 16 Purpose Cancel incase of a trouble Function Content Used to cancel the self diag U2 trouble Section Item Trou
282. ther Sensors x x x x x Discharge brush x x x x x Staple UN Replace UN at 100K staple including the staple UN and the holder section Staple cartridge User replacement for every 5000 pcs Note 3 Replacement reference Use the counter value of each paper feed port as the replacement reference Paper feed roller Separation pad Torque limiter section 80K or 2 years AR M350 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY MAINTENANCE 7 3 3 Disassembly and assembly 2 Scanner section a Rear cabinet rear lower cabinet A Scanner unit 1 D SPF unit removal 1 Remove the scanner rear cabinet and the rear lower cabinet 1 Remove the rear cabinet of the scanner section 2 Disconnect the connector 3 Disconnect the grounding wire b Left cabinet L 7 1 Remove the original exit tray and remove the scanner left cabinet IIe 3 S Slide the SPF unit to the bottom then remove it c Right cabinet 1 Remove the scanner right cabinet AR M350 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY MAINTENANCE 7 4 d Table glass SPF glass f Original detection PWB Light emitting side 1 Remove the table glass holder and the SPF glass holder and 1 Remove the rear cabinet remove the table glass and the SPF glass 2 Remove the original detection unit Light emitting side 3 e Scanner upper cabinet unit Remove the SPF unit 2 Remove the table glass 3 Remove the rear cabinet
283. tio Touch to display the reduction and enlargement copy ratio selection COPY RATIO key Screen AR M350 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 5 3 B Print mode screen This screen is displayed when the print mode is selected The display varies with the mode For the display in other modes CONDITION SETTINGS 1 Message display A message is displayed in this column 2 Job status screen Refer to the text 3 Print hold job list If the job retention function is used the list of stored print jobs is displayed here up to 100 jobs The job retention function can be used only if the printer is equipped with a hard disk drive unit If the main switch is turned off stored print data will be cleared 4 Display scroll keys Use these keys to view the job hold list when it is contained on more than one screen 5 CONDITION SETTINGS key Use to switch the display to the printer configuration menu AR M350 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 5 4 C Job status screen common to print copy network scan and fax modes This screen is displayed when the JOB STATUS key on the operation panel is pressed A job list showing the current job at the top of the job queue or a list showing completed jobs can be displayed The contents of the jobs can be viewed moved up to the highest priority in the job queue or deleted from the queue 1 2 JOB QUEUE SETS
284. tion Content Used to reset the developer counter The developer counter of the DV unit installed is Function Content Used to clear the OPC drum counter and the toner cartridge counter reset Perform when the OPC drum is replaced Section Process Section Process OPC drum developing transfer cleaning OPC drum developing transfer cleaning Item Counter Item Counter Operation Procedure Select with 10 digit key pad and press START key The procedure below is executed and the display returns to the original state 1 Counter is cleared 2 Not cleared Operation Procedure Select with 10 digit key pad and press START key The procedure below is executed and the display returns to the original state 1 Counter is cleared 2 Not cleared SIMULATION 24 5 1 DV CARTRIDGE DEVELOPER COUNTI ER DATA CLEAR PRESS START Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key r START key o SIMULATION 24 5 ARE YOU SURE 1 YES 2 NO DV CARTRIDGE COUNTER DATA CLEAR lt List of set values gt SIMULATION 24 7 DRUM TONER COUNTER DATA CLEAR SELECT AND PRESS START 1 DRUM CARTRIDGE 2 TONER CARTRIDGE Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key or START key SIMULATION 24 7 ARE YOU SURE 1 YES 2 NO DRUM CARTRIDGE COUNTER DATA CLEAR lt List of set values gt
285. tion Paper transport paper exit switchback transport Item Operation Operation Procedure Select with 10 digit key pad SIMULATION 6 1 FEED OUTPUT CHECK SELECT 1 17 AND PRESS START 2 HLPR 3 DCPR 4 MM 5 DM 6 DSB FW 7T DSB RV 8 CPFC 9 RRC 10 TRC 11 FGS FIN 12 LUM 13 TRC DSK 14 PSPS 15 MCM 16 MCPCL 17 MCFCL 18 MCLUM 19 MPFS 20 MPFC 21 MSS Or stops after repeating the specified number of times Press START key to get started Press CUSTOM SETTING key to stop SIMULATION 6 1 FEED OUTPUT CHECK EXECUTING 2 HLPR 3 DCPR 4 MM 5 DM 6 DSB FW 7T DSB RV 8 CPFC 9 RRC 10 TRC 11 FGS FIN 12 LUM 13 TRC_DSK 14 PSPS 15 MCM 16 MCPCL 17 MCFCL 18 MCLUM 19 MPFS 20 MPFC 21 MSS List of set values 2 HLPR Heater power relay 3 DCPR DC power relay 4 MM Main motor 5 DM Drum motor 6 7 8 DSB FW Stepping motor forward rotation DSB RV Stepping motor reverse rotation CPFC Paper feed clutch 9 RRC Resist roller clutch 10 TRC Transport roller clutch 11 FGS FIN Finisher gate solenoid 12 LUM Tray 1 lift up motor 13 TROC DSK Desk clutch sync signal 14 PSPS Separation pawl solenoid 15 1 MCM MP drive motor control signal 16 1 MCPCL MP tray paper feed clutch signal 17 1 MCFCL MP tray transport clutch signal 18 1 MCLUM MP tray lift up motor signal 19 2 MPFS Manual paper feed solenoid signal 20 2 MPFC Manual paper fee
286. tion correction quantity Developing unit Machine tray remaining paper quantity data Effective paper counter Correction execution direction upper lower limits Developing unit Multi purpose remaining paper quantity data Tray 1 paper feed counter Toner concentration temperature correction low temperature side correction quantity Option tray 1 remaining paper quantity data Multi purpose paper feed counter Toner concentration temperature correction low temperature side set temperature Option tray 2 remaining paper quantity data Desk 1 LCC 1 paper feed counter Toner concentration temperature correction low temperature side cancel temperature Final toner concentration sensor output value Desk 2 LCC 2 paper feed counter Toner concentration temperature correction high temperature side correction quantity Toner cartridge IC chip destination Manual paper feed counter Toner concentration temperature correction high temperature side judgment temperature Counter mode setup ADU paper feed counter Toner concentration temperature correction high temperature side judgment voltage difference White paper exit count setup Staple counter Toner concentration temperature correction high temperature side correction value Trouble memory mode setup Punch counter Toner concentration temperature correction low temperature side cancel temperature Fusing operation mod
287. tion value correction quantity First rotation 1 0 150V Default 50 4 Vb1 2 3 Vb Devepoping bias correction value correction quantity First rotation 2 0 150V Default 50 5 Vb1 3 3 Vb Devepoping bias correction value correction quantity First rotation 3 0 150V Default 50 6 Vb2 1 4 Vb Devepoping bias correction value correction quantity Second rotation 1 0 50V Default 15 7 Vb2 2 4 Vb Devepoping bias correction value correction quantity Second rotation 2 0 50V Default 15 8 Vb2 3 4 Vb Devepoping bias correction value correction quantity Second rotation 3 0 50V Default 15 1 Only when this value is 0 control is performed with the actual measurement value of process Thermistor If it is not 0 control is forcibly performed 2 When the drum motor standby time is greater than this value the correction of SIM 44 1 Vb1 is performed 3 This value is SIM 44 9 Vb1 1 correction value The value corresponding to the drum rotating time is used 4 This value is SIM 44 9 Vb1 2 correction value The value corresponding to the drum rotating time is used DRUM ROTATION TOME Vb1 correction value 45PPM 35PPM X th rotation 0 40K sec 0 50K sec X th rotation 1 40 80K sec 50 95K sec EX th rotation 2 80K sec 95K sec X th rotation 3 44 9 EE Purpose Adjustment setup operation data output check display Used to
288. to make individual setup Fine mode Section Scanner reading Item Picture quality Operation Procedure 1 Select the exposure mode to be set Scanner fine mode individual adjustment The current set value is highlighted on the right of each item Set value 2 Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad Press P to store the set value Default 50 set range 0 99 The set value is changed only and printing is not performed SIMULATION 46 24 EXP LEVEL SETUP SCANNER SUPER FINE SELECT 0 5 AND PRESS START 0 AUTO 50 3 AUTO H EY 2 DARK Ef 5 DARK H kid 1 LIGHT P 4 LIGHT H EY Select 0 5 and press START key Press START key or CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 46 24 AND PRESS START EXP LEVEL SETUP SCANNER SUPER FINE INPUT VALUE 0 99 0 AUTO Set value gt O Auto 3 Auto half tone 1 Bright 4 Bright Half tone 2 Dark 5 Dark Half tone AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 45 46 25 display print Purpose Adjustment setup operation data output check make individual setup Super fine mode Function Content Used to adjust the scanner exposure level and to Section Scanner reading Item Picture quality Operation Procedure 1 Select the exposure mode to be set adjustment right of each item Set value Press P to store the set value Default 50 set range 0 99
289. tory After completion of maintenance these counters must be cleared 2 Used to clear the number of use print quantity of each paper Data clear Paper feed Counter feed section 3 Usedto clear the number of use of the staple ADF RADF SPF Data clear Counter DSPF and the scanner reading unit 4 Used to reset the maintenance counter Data clear Counter 5 Used to reset the developer counter Data clear Process OPC drum Counter Developer The developer counter of the DV unit installed is reset developing transfer DV unit cleaning 6 Used to reset the copy counter Data clear Counter Copy 7 Used to clear the OPC drum counter and the toner cartridge Data clear Process OPC drum Counter OPC drum counter Perform when the OPC drum is replaced developing transfer cleaning 9 Used to clear the printer print counter After completion of Data clear Printer Counter Printer maintenance this counter must be cleared 10 Used to clear the FAX counter After completion of Data clear FAX Counter maintenance this counter must be cleared Only when FAX is installed 11 Used to reset the drum rotation time toner motor rotation time Data clear Process OPC drum Counter Developer and developer rotation time counters developing transfer DV unit The developer counter of the DV unit installed is reset cleaning 15 Used to clear each counter in the scanner mode Data clear Counter 25 1 Used to check
290. ue 1 2 Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad Press P to store the set value Default 50 set range O 99 3 Press START and copying is started and the Set value is stored Display value 1 4 Select a paper feed tray Set value 2 5 Select an exposure level Set value 3 Select 1 and press START key SIMULATION 46 14 EXP LEVEL SETUP FAX FINE SELECT 0 8 AND PRESS START 0 TRAY SELECT 1 PRINT START 2 EXP LEVEL 3 AUTO 4 LIGHT 5 DARK 6 AUTO H 7 LIGHT H 8 DARK H EJ Select other than 0 2 and press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key mne mne SIMULATION 46 14 EXP LEVEL SETUP FAX FINE INPUT VALUE 0 99 AND PRESS START 2 AUTO Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key Or copying is terminated SIMULATION 46 14 EXP LEVEL SETUP FAX FINE NOW COPYING Select 0 and Press START Key or press BARON press CUSTOME SETTING key SIMULATION 46 14 EXP LEVEL SETUP FAX FINE SELECT 1 5 AND PRESS START FEED TRAY 1 TRAY1 2 TRAY2 3 TRAY3 4 TRAY4 5 BPT Select 2 and Press START key or press START key press CUSTOME SETTING key SIMULATION 46 14 EXP LEVEL SETUP FAX FINE SELECT 3 8 AND PRESS START EXP LEVEL SELECT
291. unction Content Used to check and adjust the main charger grid voltage in each print mode and its control circuit Section Process OPC drum developing transfer cleaning Item Operation Procedure Enter the output value to be adjusted with 10 digit key pad The current set value is highlighted at the right of each item After entering the value with 10 digit key pad press START key The output is made for 30sec at the set value Then the output is stopped SIMULATION 8 2 1 AUTO 3 MIX 5 PRINTER MAIN GRID SETTING SELECT 1 6 AND PRESS START 2 CHARACTER 4 PHOTO 6 FAX Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key SIMULATION 8 2 1 AUTO 200 900 Press MAIN GRID SETTING INPUT VALUE AND PRESS START Press CUSTOM SETTING key Or after 30sec output SIMULATION 8 2 MAIN GRID SETTING 1 AUTO EXECUTING List of set values Default Setrange Auto mode 645 200 900 Text mode Text Photo mo de Photo mode Printer mode o Oo A c nm Fax mode 8 6 Purpose Adjustment Function Content Used to check and adjust the transfer charger current and its control circuit Section Process OPC drum developing transfer cleaning Item Operation Procedure Enter the output value to be adjusted with
292. unter key returns to the original state 1 Counter is cleared 2 Not cleared Operation Procedure Select with 10 digit key pad and press START The procedure below is executed and the display SIMULATION 24 2 1 TRAY1 2 TRAY2 3 TRAY3 LCC1 5 BPT 6 ADU 2 TRAY4 LCC2 PAPER FEED COUNTER DATA CLEAR SELECT1 6 AND PRESS START Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key r START key o SIMULATION 24 2 TRAY1 COUNTER DATA CLEAR ARE YOU SURE 1 YES 2 NO Item Counter Operation Procedure Select with 10 digit key pad and press START key returns to the original state 1 Counter is cleared 2 Not cleared The procedure below is executed and the display SIMULATION 24 4 MAINTENANCE COUNTER DATA CLEAR PRESS START 1 MAINTENANCE Press START key Press CUSTOM SETTING key r START key o SIMULATION 24 4 MAINTENANCE COUNTER DATA CLEAR ARE YOU SURE 1 YES 2 NO lt List of set values gt lt List of set values gt 1 maintenance counter Tray 1 use quantity Tray 2 use quantity Tray 3 LCC left tray use quantity Tray 4 LCC right tray use quantity Manual feed tray use quantity OO A w Po Duplex paper feed use quantity AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 25 24 5 24 7 Purpose Data clear Purpose Data clear Func
293. value SIMULATION 50 1 List of display values 1 gt LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT SELECT 0 9 AND PRESS START T 0 TRAY SELECT 1 COPY START Normal display NOW COPYING 2 MAGNIFICATION ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN 3 RRCA EJ 4 RRCB 5 DENB Jam JAM 6 IMAGE LOSS LEAD MEN 7 IMAGE LOSS SIDE 4g 6 IMAGE LOSA MA ES Paper empty PAPER EMPTY Select other than 0 2 A A lt List of set values 2 gt and press START key P ess CUSTOM SETTING key E E 1 TBAYi E E 2 TRAY2 SIMULATION 50 1 3 TRAY3 LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT INPUT VALUE 0 99 AND PRESS START 3 RRCA 4 TRAY4 5 Manual feed Select 1 and I E E lt List of set values 3 gt press START key Press START key pee cm Or copying is terminated Set range 25 400 SIMULATION 50 1 LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT NOW COPYING Select 0 and press START key Press START key or press CUSTOME SETTING key FEED TRAY 5 BPT SIMULATION 50 1 LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT SELECT 1 5 AND PRESS START 1 TRAY1 2 TRAY2 3 TRAY3 4 TRAY4 Select 2 and press START key Press START key o press CUSTOME SETTING key MAGNIFICATI INPUT 25 400 SIMULATION 50 1 LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT ON 100 AR M350 SIMULATIONS 10 48 50 2 Purpose Adjustment Function Content Used to adjust the copy image position and the void area image loss on print paper in the copy mode
294. x print jobs that have been reserved however cannot be deleted 8 PRIORITY key If you select a job among the reserved jobs in the JOB QUEUE job list to which you wish to give the highest priority and touch this key the job will move to the highest priority reserved job 9 DETAIL key Use to display the detailed information of the selected job The paper size for printing can be changed from the specified size This function however cannot be used when a fax reception print job is selected PAPER EMPTY in the job status display When a job status display indicates PAPER EMPTY the specified size paper is not loaded in any tray to run that job In this case printing is suspended for that job until the required paper is loaded Until the required paper is loaded another reserved job data will be printed if possible If paper runs out during printing another job will not be printed If you wish to change the paper size because you do not have the specified size paper you can change the size by touching the current job key to select it and touch the DETAIL key described in 9 AR M350 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 5 5 4 Cross sectional view 3 SPSD 7 Ir 14 13 12 11 10 No Name No Name 1 CIS unit AR EF1 only 9 Original feed roller 2 Original resist roller 10 Copy lamp base unit 3 Orig
295. y 35 fonts are supported in the Windows NT 4 0 environment is limited for PPD 5 Compatibility B Expanded RAM Installation of an expanded RAM will avoid the following status 1 Time out error reduction 2 Spool time reduction 3 Avoidance of VM error memory full Use a commercially available RAM of the following specifications If a RAM which does not meet the specifications is installed it may cause a trouble such as that it is not recognized or its capacity is not correctly recognized lt Spesification gt DIMM TYPE 168pin 3 3V Unbuffered SDRAM DIMM Non ECC DIMM capacity 64MByte 128MByte 256MByte CAS LATENCY CL 2 SDRAM CLOCK For PC100 PC133 PCL 5e compatibility Target for PCL5e is to be compatible with HP LaserJet 4000 Small margin difference rendering difference by different font family default and transfer function difference are not to be included in the compatibility All the PJL commands are not necessarily included in the compatibility PCL6 compatibility Target for PCL6 is to be compatible with HP LaserJet 4000 Small margin difference rendering difference by different font family default and transfer function difference are not to be included in the compatibility All the PJL commands are not necessarily included in the compatibility PostScript Compatibility Roman PostScript is targeted to be compatible with Adobe PostScript as
296. y selection 1 5 51 2 SELECT Purpose Adjustment 1 PRINT Copy start Initial value Function Content Used to adjust the contact pressure of paper on START the resist roller in each section machine paper 2 TRAY1 Tray 1 resist adjustment value 60 65 feed duplex paper feed SPF paper feed 3 TRAY2 Tray 2 resist adjustment value 50 55 This adjustment is required when the print 4 DESK Desk resist adjustment value 50 55 image position varies or when paper jam occurs frequently 5 BPT Manual tray resist adjustment value 55 60 Section Paper transport 6 ADU ADU resist adjustment value 50 55 paper exit switchback transport 7 SPF HIGH SPF resist adjustment value 50 50 Item Operation High speed Operation Procedure Perform the resist quantity adjustment 8 SPF LOW SPF resist adjustment value 50 50 1 The current set value is highlighted on the Low speed right of each item In this screen be sure to select 1 COPY START Set value 1 List of display values 1 gt 2 Enter the correction value with 10 digit key Normal display NOW COPYING pad ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN Press P to store the set value Jam JAM 3 When the value is increased by 1 the resist Paper empty PAPER EMPTY quantity is changed by 1ms 4 Press START to start copying and store the List of set values 2 gt set value Display value 1 1 TRAYI 11 TRAY1 with Duplex 5 Select a paper feed tray Set value 2 2 TRAY2 12 TRAY2 with Duplex 3

AR-EF1 - Printertec

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents